High_Low_ProjectionHigh Low Projections of daily/weekly/quarterly/yearly price movement. Dark/night mode version. Green when broken through to upside, red when broken through to bottom side.
Wyszukaj w skryptach "high low"
High Low Bollinger Bands Better than Bollinger Bands for finding extreme points timed by an oscillator where the price is statistically likely to stay inside the boundaries.
Good for setting credit spreads such as call and put vertical spreads.
ORB Fusion🎯 CORE INNOVATION: INSTITUTIONAL ORB FRAMEWORK WITH FAILED BREAKOUT INTELLIGENCE
ORB Fusion represents a complete institutional-grade Opening Range Breakout system combining classic Market Profile concepts (Initial Balance, day type classification) with modern algorithmic breakout detection, failed breakout reversal logic, and comprehensive statistical tracking. Rather than simply drawing lines at opening range extremes, this system implements the full trading methodology used by professional floor traders and market makers—including the critical concept that failed breakouts are often higher-probability setups than successful breakouts .
The Opening Range Hypothesis:
The first 30-60 minutes of trading establishes the day's value area —the price range where the majority of participants agree on fair value. This range is formed during peak information flow (overnight news digestion, gap reactions, early institutional positioning). Breakouts from this range signal directional conviction; failures to hold breakouts signal trapped participants and create exploitable reversals.
Why Opening Range Matters:
1. Information Aggregation : Opening range reflects overnight news, pre-market sentiment, and early institutional orders. It's the market's initial "consensus" on value.
2. Liquidity Concentration : Stop losses cluster just outside opening range. Breakouts trigger these stops, creating momentum. Failed breakouts trap traders, forcing reversals.
3. Statistical Persistence : Markets exhibit range expansion tendency —when price accepts above/below opening range with volume, it often extends 1.0-2.0x the opening range size before mean reversion.
4. Institutional Behavior : Large players (market makers, institutions) use opening range as reference for the day's trading plan. They fade extremes in rotation days and follow breakouts in trend days.
Historical Context:
Opening Range Breakout methodology originated in commodity futures pits (1970s-80s) where floor traders noticed consistent patterns: the first 30-60 minutes established a "fair value zone," and directional moves occurred when this zone was violated with conviction. J. Peter Steidlmayer formalized this observation in Market Profile theory, introducing the "Initial Balance" concept—the first hour (two 30-minute periods) defining market structure.
📊 OPENING RANGE CONSTRUCTION
Four ORB Timeframe Options:
1. 5-Minute ORB (0930-0935 ET):
Captures immediate market direction during "opening drive"—the explosive first few minutes when overnight orders hit the tape.
Use Case:
• Scalping strategies
• High-frequency breakout trading
• Extremely liquid instruments (ES, NQ, SPY)
Characteristics:
• Very tight range (often 0.2-0.5% of price)
• Early breakouts common (7 of 10 days break within first hour)
• Higher false breakout rate (50-60%)
• Requires sub-minute chart monitoring
Psychology: Captures panic buyers/sellers reacting to overnight news. Range is small because sample size is minimal—only 5 minutes of price discovery. Early breakouts often fail because they're driven by retail FOMO rather than institutional conviction.
2. 15-Minute ORB (0930-0945 ET):
Balances responsiveness with statistical validity. Captures opening drive plus initial reaction to that drive.
Use Case:
• Day trading strategies
• Balanced scalping/swing hybrid
• Most liquid instruments
Characteristics:
• Moderate range (0.4-0.8% of price typically)
• Breakout rate ~60% of days
• False breakout rate ~40-45%
• Good balance of opportunity and reliability
Psychology: Includes opening panic AND the first retest/consolidation. Sophisticated traders (institutions, algos) start expressing directional bias. This is the "Goldilocks" timeframe—not too reactive, not too slow.
3. 30-Minute ORB (0930-1000 ET):
Classic ORB timeframe. Default for most professional implementations.
Use Case:
• Standard intraday trading
• Position sizing for full-day trades
• All liquid instruments (equities, indices, futures)
Characteristics:
• Substantial range (0.6-1.2% of price)
• Breakout rate ~55% of days
• False breakout rate ~35-40%
• Statistical sweet spot for extensions
Psychology: Full opening auction + first institutional repositioning complete. By 10:00 AM ET, headlines are digested, early stops are hit, and "real" directional players reveal themselves. This is when institutional programs typically finish their opening positioning.
Statistical Advantage: 30-minute ORB shows highest correlation with daily range. When price breaks and holds outside 30m ORB, probability of reaching 1.0x extension (doubling the opening range) exceeds 60% historically.
4. 60-Minute ORB (0930-1030 ET) - Initial Balance:
Steidlmayer's "Initial Balance"—the foundation of Market Profile theory.
Use Case:
• Swing trading entries
• Day type classification
• Low-frequency institutional setups
Characteristics:
• Wide range (0.8-1.5% of price)
• Breakout rate ~45% of days
• False breakout rate ~25-30% (lowest)
• Best for trend day identification
Psychology: Full first hour captures A-period (0930-1000) and B-period (1000-1030). By 10:30 AM ET, all early positioning is complete. Market has "voted" on value. Subsequent price action confirms (trend day) or rejects (rotation day) this value assessment.
Initial Balance Theory:
IB represents the market's accepted value area . When price extends significantly beyond IB (>1.5x IB range), it signals a Trend Day —strong directional conviction. When price remains within 1.0x IB, it signals a Rotation Day —mean reversion environment. This classification completely changes trading strategy.
🔬 LTF PRECISION TECHNOLOGY
The Chart Timeframe Problem:
Traditional ORB indicators calculate range using the chart's current timeframe. This creates critical inaccuracies:
Example:
• You're on a 5-minute chart
• ORB period is 30 minutes (0930-1000 ET)
• Indicator sees only 6 bars (30min ÷ 5min/bar = 6 bars)
• If any 5-minute bar has extreme wick, entire ORB is distorted
The Problem Amplifies:
• On 15-minute chart with 30-minute ORB: Only 2 bars sampled
• On 30-minute chart with 30-minute ORB: Only 1 bar sampled
• Opening spike or single large wick defines entire range (invalid)
Solution: Lower Timeframe (LTF) Precision:
ORB Fusion uses `request.security_lower_tf()` to sample 1-minute bars regardless of chart timeframe:
```
For 30-minute ORB on 15-minute chart:
- Traditional method: Uses 2 bars (15min × 2 = 30min)
- LTF Precision: Requests thirty 1-minute bars, calculates true high/low
```
Why This Matters:
Scenario: ES futures, 15-minute chart, 30-minute ORB
• Traditional ORB: High = 5850.00, Low = 5842.00 (range = 8 points)
• LTF Precision ORB: High = 5848.50, Low = 5843.25 (range = 5.25 points)
Difference: 2.75 points distortion from single 15-minute wick hitting 5850.00 at 9:31 AM then immediately reversing. LTF precision filters this out by seeing it was a fleeting wick, not a sustained high.
Impact on Extensions:
With inflated range (8 points vs 5.25 points):
• 1.5x extension projects +12 points instead of +7.875 points
• Difference: 4.125 points (nearly $200 per ES contract)
• Breakout signals trigger late; extension targets unreachable
Implementation:
```pinescript
getLtfHighLow() =>
float ha = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, "1", high)
float la = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, "1", low)
```
Function returns arrays of 1-minute high/low values, then finds true maximum and minimum across all samples.
When LTF Precision Activates:
Only when chart timeframe exceeds ORB session window:
• 5-minute chart + 30-minute ORB: LTF used (chart TF > session bars needed)
• 1-minute chart + 30-minute ORB: LTF not needed (direct sampling sufficient)
Recommendation: Always enable LTF Precision unless you're on 1-minute charts. The computational overhead is negligible, and accuracy improvement is substantial.
⚖️ INITIAL BALANCE (IB) FRAMEWORK
Steidlmayer's Market Profile Innovation:
J. Peter Steidlmayer developed Market Profile in the 1980s for the Chicago Board of Trade. His key insight: market structure is best understood through time-at-price (value area) rather than just price-over-time (traditional charts).
Initial Balance Definition:
IB is the price range established during the first hour of trading, subdivided into:
• A-Period : First 30 minutes (0930-1000 ET for US equities)
• B-Period : Second 30 minutes (1000-1030 ET)
A-Period vs B-Period Comparison:
The relationship between A and B periods forecasts the day:
B-Period Expansion (Bullish):
• B-period high > A-period high
• B-period low ≥ A-period low
• Interpretation: Buyers stepping in after opening assessed
• Implication: Bullish continuation likely
• Strategy: Buy pullbacks to A-period high (now support)
B-Period Expansion (Bearish):
• B-period low < A-period low
• B-period high ≤ A-period high
• Interpretation: Sellers stepping in after opening assessed
• Implication: Bearish continuation likely
• Strategy: Sell rallies to A-period low (now resistance)
B-Period Contraction:
• B-period stays within A-period range
• Interpretation: Market indecisive, digesting A-period information
• Implication: Rotation day likely, stay range-bound
• Strategy: Fade extremes, sell high/buy low within IB
IB Extensions:
Professional traders use IB as a ruler to project price targets:
Extension Levels:
• 0.5x IB : Initial probe outside value (minor target)
• 1.0x IB : Full extension (major target for normal days)
• 1.5x IB : Trend day threshold (classifies as trending)
• 2.0x IB : Strong trend day (rare, ~10-15% of days)
Calculation:
```
IB Range = IB High - IB Low
Bull Extension 1.0x = IB High + (IB Range × 1.0)
Bear Extension 1.0x = IB Low - (IB Range × 1.0)
```
Example:
ES futures:
• IB High: 5850.00
• IB Low: 5842.00
• IB Range: 8.00 points
Extensions:
• 1.0x Bull Target: 5850 + 8 = 5858.00
• 1.5x Bull Target: 5850 + 12 = 5862.00
• 2.0x Bull Target: 5850 + 16 = 5866.00
If price reaches 5862.00 (1.5x), day is classified as Trend Day —strategy shifts from mean reversion to trend following.
📈 DAY TYPE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Four Day Types (Market Profile Framework):
1. TREND DAY:
Definition: Price extends ≥1.5x IB range in one direction and stays there.
Characteristics:
• Opens and never returns to IB
• Persistent directional movement
• Volume increases as day progresses (conviction building)
• News-driven or strong institutional flow
Frequency: ~20-25% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Follow the trend, trail stops, let winners run
• DON'T: Fade extremes, take early profits
• Key: Add to position on pullbacks to previous extension level
• Risk: Getting chopped in false trend (see Failed Breakout section)
Example: FOMC decision, payroll report, earnings surprise—anything creating one-sided conviction.
2. NORMAL DAY:
Definition: Price extends 0.5-1.5x IB, tests both sides, returns to IB.
Characteristics:
• Two-sided trading
• Extensions occur but don't persist
• Volume balanced throughout day
• Most common day type
Frequency: ~45-50% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Take profits at extension levels, expect reversals
• DON'T: Hold for massive moves
• Key: Treat each extension as a profit-taking opportunity
• Risk: Holding too long when momentum shifts
Example: Typical day with no major catalysts—market balancing supply and demand.
3. ROTATION DAY:
Definition: Price stays within IB all day, rotating between high and low.
Characteristics:
• Never accepts outside IB
• Multiple tests of IB high/low
• Decreasing volume (no conviction)
• Classic range-bound action
Frequency: ~25-30% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Fade extremes (sell IB high, buy IB low)
• DON'T: Chase breakouts
• Key: Enter at extremes with tight stops just outside IB
• Risk: Breakout finally occurs after multiple failures
Example: [/b> Pre-holiday trading, summer doldrums, consolidation after big move.
4. DEVELOPING:
Definition: Day type not yet determined (early in session).
Usage: Classification before 12:00 PM ET when IB extension pattern unclear.
ORB Fusion's Classification Algorithm:
```pinescript
if close > ibHigh:
ibExtension = (close - ibHigh) / ibRange
direction = "BULLISH"
else if close < ibLow:
ibExtension = (ibLow - close) / ibRange
direction = "BEARISH"
if ibExtension >= 1.5:
dayType = "TREND DAY"
else if ibExtension >= 0.5:
dayType = "NORMAL DAY"
else if close within IB:
dayType = "ROTATION DAY"
```
Why Classification Matters:
Same setup (bullish ORB breakout) has opposite implications:
• Trend Day : Hold for 2.0x extension, trail stops aggressively
• Normal Day : Take profits at 1.0x extension, watch for reversal
• Rotation Day : Fade the breakout immediately (likely false)
Knowing day type prevents catastrophic errors like fading a trend day or holding through rotation.
🚀 BREAKOUT DETECTION & CONFIRMATION
Three Confirmation Methods:
1. Close Beyond Level (Recommended):
Logic: Candle must close above ORB high (bull) or below ORB low (bear).
Why:
• Filters out wicks (temporary liquidity grabs)
• Ensures sustained acceptance above/below range
• Reduces false breakout rate by ~20-30%
Example:
• ORB High: 5850.00
• Bar high touches 5850.50 (wick above)
• Bar closes at 5848.00 (inside range)
• Result: NO breakout signal
vs.
• Bar high touches 5850.50
• Bar closes at 5851.00 (outside range)
• Result: BREAKOUT signal confirmed
Trade-off: Slightly delayed entry (wait for close) but much higher reliability.
2. Wick Beyond Level:
Logic: [/b> Any touch of ORB high/low triggers breakout.
Why:
• Earliest possible entry
• Captures aggressive momentum moves
Risk:
• High false breakout rate (60-70%)
• Stop runs trigger signals
• Requires very tight stops (difficult to manage)
Use Case: Scalping with 1-2 point profit targets where any penetration = trade.
3. Body Beyond Level:
Logic: [/b> Candle body (close vs open) must be entirely outside range.
Why:
• Strictest confirmation
• Ensures directional conviction (not just momentum)
• Lowest false breakout rate
Example: Trade-off: [/b> Very conservative—misses some valid breakouts but rarely triggers on false ones.
Volume Confirmation Layer:
All confirmation methods can require volume validation:
Volume Multiplier Logic: Rationale: [/b> True breakouts are driven by institutional activity (large size). Volume spike confirms real conviction vs. stop-run manipulation.
Statistical Impact: [/b>
• Breakouts with volume confirmation: ~65% success rate
• Breakouts without volume: ~45% success rate
• Difference: 20 percentage points edge
Implementation Note: [/b>
Volume confirmation adds complexity—you'll miss breakouts that work but lack volume. However, when targeting 1.5x+ extensions (ambitious goals), volume confirmation becomes critical because those moves require sustained institutional participation.
Recommended Settings by Strategy: [/b>
Scalping (1-2 point targets): [/b>
• Method: Close
• Volume: OFF
• Rationale: Quick in/out doesn't need perfection
Intraday Swing (5-10 point targets): [/b>
• Method: Close
• Volume: ON (1.5x multiplier)
• Rationale: Balance reliability and opportunity
Position Trading (full-day holds): [/b>
• Method: Body
• Volume: ON (2.0x multiplier)
• Rationale: Must be certain—large stops require high win rate
🔥 FAILED BREAKOUT SYSTEM
The Core Insight: [/b>
Failed breakouts are often more profitable [/b> than successful breakouts because they create trapped traders with predictable behavior.
Failed Breakout Definition: [/b>
A breakout that:
1. Initially penetrates ORB level with confirmation
2. Attracts participants (volume spike, momentum)
3. Fails to extend (stalls or immediately reverses)
4. Returns inside ORB range within N bars
Psychology of Failure: [/b>
When breakout fails:
• Breakout buyers are trapped [/b>: Bought at ORB high, now underwater
• Early longs reduce: Take profit, fearful of reversal
• Shorts smell blood: See failed breakout as reversal signal
• Result: Cascade of selling as trapped bulls exit + new shorts enter
Mirror image for failed bearish breakouts (trapped shorts cover + new longs enter).
Failure Detection Parameters: [/b>
1. Failure Confirmation Bars (default: 3): [/b>
How many bars after breakout to confirm failure?
Logic: Settings: [/b>
• 2 bars: Aggressive failure detection (more signals, more false failures)
• 3 bars Balanced (default)
• 5-10 bars: Conservative (wait for clear reversal)
Why This Matters:
Too few bars: You call "failed breakout" when price is just consolidating before next leg.
Too many bars: You miss the reversal entry (price already back in range).
2. Failure Buffer (default: 0.1 ATR): [/b>
How far inside ORB must price return to confirm failure?
Formula: Why Buffer Matters: clear rejection [/b> (not just hovering at level).
Settings: [/b>
• 0.0 ATR: No buffer, immediate failure signal
• 0.1 ATR: Small buffer (default) - filters noise
• [b>0.2-0.3 ATR: Large buffer - only dramatic failures count
Example: Reversal Entry System: [/b>
When failure confirmed, system generates complete reversal trade:
For Failed Bull Breakout (Short Reversal): [/b>
Entry: [/b> Current close when failure confirmed
Stop Loss: [/b> Extreme high since breakout + 0.10 ATR padding
Target 1: [/b> ORB High - (ORB Range × 0.5)
Target 2: Target 3: [/b> ORB High - (ORB Range × 1.5)
Example:
• ORB High: 5850, ORB Low: 5842, Range: 8 points
• Breakout to 5853, fails, reverses to 5848 (entry)
• Stop: 5853 + 1 = 5854 (6 point risk)
• T1: 5850 - 4 = 5846 (-2 points, 1:3 R:R)
• T2: 5850 - 8 = 5842 (-6 points, 1:1 R:R)
• T3: 5850 - 12 = 5838 (-10 points, 1.67:1 R:R)
[b>Why These Targets? [/b>
• T1 (0.5x ORB below high): Trapped bulls start panic
• T2 (1.0x ORB = ORB Mid): Major retracement, momentum fully reversed
• T3 (1.5x ORB): Reversal extended, now targeting opposite side
Historical Performance: [/b>
Failed breakout reversals in ORB Fusion's tracking system show:
• Win Rate: 65-75% (significantly higher than initial breakouts)
• Average Winner: 1.2x ORB range
• Average Loser: 0.5x ORB range (protected by stop at extreme)
• Expectancy: Strongly positive even with <70% win rate
Why Failed Breakouts Outperform: [/b>
1. Information Advantage: You now know what price did (failed to extend). Initial breakout trades are speculative; reversal trades are reactive to confirmed failure.
2. Trapped Participant Pressure: Every trapped bull becomes a seller. This creates sustained pressure.
3. Stop Loss Clarity: Extreme high is obvious stop (just beyond recent high). Breakout trades have ambiguous stops (ORB mid? Recent low? Too wide or too tight).
4. Mean Reversion Edge: Failed breakouts return to value (ORB mid). Initial breakouts try to escape value (harder to sustain).
Critical Insight: [/b>
"The best trade is often the one that trapped everyone else."
Failed breakouts create asymmetric opportunity because you're trading against [/b> trapped participants rather than with [/b> them. When you see a failed breakout signal, you're seeing real-time evidence that the market rejected directional conviction—that's exploitable.
📐 FIBONACCI EXTENSION SYSTEM
Six Extension Levels: [/b>
Extensions project how far price will travel after ORB breakout. Based on Fibonacci ratios + empirical market behavior.
1. 1.272x (27.2% Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.272)
Psychology: [/b> Initial probe beyond ORB. Early momentum + trapped shorts (on bull side) covering.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~75-80% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• First resistance/support after breakout
• Partial profit target (take 30-50% off)
• Watch for rejection here (could signal failure in progress)
Why 1.272? [/b> Related to harmonic patterns (1.272 is √1.618). Empirically, markets often stall at 25-30% extension before deciding whether to continue or fail.
2. 1.5x (50% Extension):
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.5)
Psychology: [/b> Breakout gaining conviction. Requires sustained buying/selling (not just momentum spike).
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~60-65% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Major partial profit (take 50-70% off)
• Move stops to breakeven
• Trail remaining position
Why 1.5x? [/b> Classic halfway point to 2.0x. Markets often consolidate here before final push. If day type is "Normal," this is likely the high/low for the day.
3. 1.618x (Golden Ratio Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.618)
Psychology: [/b> Strong directional day. Institutional conviction + retail FOMO.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~45-50% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Final partial profit (close 80-90%)
• Trail remainder with wide stop (allow breathing room)
Why 1.618? [/b> Fibonacci golden ratio. Appears consistently in market geometry. When price reaches 1.618x extension, move is "mature" and reversal risk increases.
4. 2.0x (100% Extension): [/b>
Formula: ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 1.0)
Psychology: [/b> Trend day confirmed. Opening range completely duplicated.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~30-35% after confirmed breakout
Trading: Why 2.0x? [/b> Psychological level—range doubled. Also corresponds to typical daily ATR in many instruments (opening range ~ 0.5 ATR, daily range ~ 1.0 ATR).
5. 2.618x (Super Extension):
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 1.618)
Psychology: [/b> Parabolic move. News-driven or squeeze.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~10-15% after confirmed breakout
[b>Trading: Why 2.618? [/b> Fibonacci ratio (1.618²). Rare to reach—when it does, move is extreme. Often precedes multi-day consolidation or reversal.
6. 3.0x (Extreme Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 2.0)
Psychology: [/b> Market melt-up/crash. Only in extreme events.
[b>Probability of Reach: [/b> <5% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Close immediately if reached
• These are outlier events (black swans, flash crashes, squeeze-outs)
• Holding for more is greed—take windfall profit
Why 3.0x? [/b> Triple opening range. So rare it's statistical noise. When it happens, it's headline news.
Visual Example:
ES futures, ORB 5842-5850 (8 point range), Bullish breakout:
• ORB High : 5850.00 (entry zone)
• 1.272x : 5850 + 2.18 = 5852.18 (first resistance)
• 1.5x : 5850 + 4.00 = 5854.00 (major target)
• 1.618x : 5850 + 4.94 = 5854.94 (strong target)
• 2.0x : 5850 + 8.00 = 5858.00 (trend day)
• 2.618x : 5850 + 12.94 = 5862.94 (extreme)
• 3.0x : 5850 + 16.00 = 5866.00 (parabolic)
Profit-Taking Strategy:
Optimal scaling out at extensions:
• Breakout entry at 5850.50
• 30% off at 1.272x (5852.18) → +1.68 points
• 40% off at 1.5x (5854.00) → +3.50 points
• 20% off at 1.618x (5854.94) → +4.44 points
• 10% off at 2.0x (5858.00) → +7.50 points
[b>Average Exit: Conclusion: [/b> Scaling out at extensions produces 40% higher expectancy than holding for home runs.
📊 GAP ANALYSIS & FILL PSYCHOLOGY
[b>Gap Definition: [/b>
Price discontinuity between previous close and current open:
• Gap Up : Open > Previous Close + noise threshold (0.1 ATR)
• Gap Down : Open < Previous Close - noise threshold
Why Gaps Matter: [/b>
Gaps represent unfilled orders [/b>. When market gaps up, all limit buy orders between yesterday's close and today's open are never filled. Those buyers are "left behind." Psychology: they wait for price to return ("fill the gap") so they can enter. This creates magnetic pull [/b> toward gap level.
Gap Fill Statistics (Empirical): [/b>
• Gaps <0.5% [/b>: 85-90% fill within same day
• Gaps 0.5-1.0% [/b>: 70-75% fill within same day, 90%+ within week
• Gaps >1.0% [/b>: 50-60% fill within same day (major news often prevents fill)
Gap Fill Strategy: [/b>
Setup 1: Gap-and-Go
Gap opens, extends away from gap (doesn't fill).
• ORB confirms direction away from gap
• Trade WITH ORB breakout direction
• Expectation: Gap won't fill today (momentum too strong)
Setup 2: Gap-Fill Fade
Gap opens, but fails to extend. Price drifts back toward gap.
• ORB breakout TOWARD gap (not away)
• Trade toward gap fill level
• Target: Previous close (gap fill complete)
Setup 3: Gap-Fill Rejection
Gap fills (touches previous close) then rejects.
• ORB breakout AWAY from gap after fill
• Trade away from gap direction
• Thesis: Gap filled (orders executed), now resume original direction
[b>Example: Scenario A (Gap-and-Go):
• ORB breaks upward to $454 (away from gap)
• Trade: LONG breakout, expect continued rally
• Gap becomes support ($452)
Scenario B (Gap-Fill):
• ORB breaks downward through $452.50 (toward gap)
• Trade: SHORT toward gap fill at $450.00
• Target: $450.00 (gap filled), close position
Scenario C (Gap-Fill Rejection):
• Price drifts to $450.00 (gap filled) early in session
• ORB establishes $450-$451 after gap fill
• ORB breaks upward to $451.50
• Trade: LONG breakout (gap is filled, now resume rally)
ORB Fusion Integration: [/b>
Dashboard shows:
• Gap type (Up/Down/None)
• Gap size (percentage)
• Gap fill status (Filled ✓ / Open)
This informs setup confidence:
• ORB breakout AWAY from unfilled gap: +10% confidence (gap becomes support/resistance)
• ORB breakout TOWARD unfilled gap: -10% confidence (gap fill may override ORB)
[b>📈 VWAP & INSTITUTIONAL BIAS [/b>
[b>Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP): [/b>
Average price weighted by volume at each price level. Represents true "average" cost for the day.
[b>Calculation: Institutional Benchmark [/b>: Institutions (mutual funds, pension funds) use VWAP as performance benchmark. If they buy above VWAP, they underperformed; below VWAP, they outperformed.
2. [b>Algorithmic Target [/b>: Many algos are programmed to buy below VWAP and sell above VWAP to achieve "fair" execution.
3. [b>Support/Resistance [/b>: VWAP acts as dynamic support (price above) or resistance (price below).
[b>VWAP Bands (Standard Deviations): [/b>
• [b>1σ Band [/b>: VWAP ± 1 standard deviation
- Contains ~68% of volume
- Normal trading range
- Bounces common
• [b>2σ Band [/b>: VWAP ± 2 standard deviations
- Contains ~95% of volume
- Extreme extension
- Mean reversion likely
ORB + VWAP Confluence: [/b>
Highest-probability setups occur when ORB and VWAP align:
Bullish Confluence: [/b>
• ORB breakout upward (bullish signal)
• Price above VWAP (institutional buying)
• Confidence boost: +15%
Bearish Confluence: [/b>
• ORB breakout downward (bearish signal)
• Price below VWAP (institutional selling)
• Confidence boost: +15%
[b>Divergence Warning:
• ORB breakout upward BUT price below VWAP
• Conflict: Breakout says "buy," VWAP says "sell"
• Confidence penalty: -10%
• Interpretation: Retail buying but institutions not participating (lower quality breakout)
📊 MOMENTUM CONTEXT SYSTEM
[b>Innovation: Candle Coloring by Position
Rather than fixed support/resistance lines, ORB Fusion colors candles based on their [b>relationship to ORB :
[b>Three Zones: [/b>
1. Inside ORB (Blue Boxes): [/b>
[b>Calculation:
• Darker blue: Near extremes of ORB (potential breakout imminent)
• Lighter blue: Near ORB mid (consolidation)
[b>Trading: [/b> Coiled spring—await breakout.
[b>2. Above ORB (Green Boxes):
[b>Calculation: 3. Below ORB (Red Boxes):
Mirror of above ORB logic.
[b>Special Contexts: [/b>
[b>Breakout Bar (Darkest Green/Red): [/b>
The specific bar where breakout occurs gets maximum color intensity regardless of distance. This highlights the pivotal moment.
[b>Failed Breakout Bar (Orange/Warning): [/b>
When failed breakout is confirmed, that bar gets orange/warning color. Visual alert: "reversal opportunity here."
[b>Near Extension (Cyan/Magenta Tint): [/b>
When price is within 0.5 ATR of an extension level, candle gets tinted cyan (bull) or magenta (bear). Indicates "target approaching—prepare to take profit."
[b>Why Visual Context? [/b>
Traditional indicators show lines. ORB Fusion shows [b>context-aware momentum [/b>. Glance at chart:
• Lots of blue? Consolidation day (fade extremes).
• Progressive green? Trend day (follow).
• Green then orange? Failed breakout (reversal setup).
This visual language communicates market state instantly—no interpretation needed.
🎯 TRADE SETUP GENERATION & GRADING [/b>
[b>Algorithmic Setup Detection: [/b>
ORB Fusion continuously evaluates market state and generates current best trade setup with:
• Action (LONG / SHORT / FADE HIGH / FADE LOW / WAIT)
• Entry price
• Stop loss
• Three targets
• Risk:Reward ratio
• Confidence score (0-100)
• Grade (A+ to D)
[b>Setup Types: [/b>
[b>1. ORB LONG (Bullish Breakout): [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• Bullish ORB breakout confirmed
• Not failed
[b>Parameters:
• Entry: Current close
• Stop: ORB mid (protects against failure)
• T1: ORB High + 0.5x range (1.5x extension)
• T2: ORB High + 1.0x range (2.0x extension)
• T3: ORB High + 1.618x range (2.618x extension)
[b>Confidence Scoring:
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• Bearish breakout occurred
• Failed (returned inside ORB)
[b>Parameters: [/b>
• Entry: Close when failure confirmed
• Stop: Extreme low since breakout + 0.10 ATR
• T1: ORB Low + 0.5x range
• T2: ORB Low + 1.0x range (ORB mid)
• T3: ORB Low + 1.5x range
[b>Confidence Scoring:
[b>Trigger:
• Inside ORB
• Close > ORB mid (near high)
[b>Parameters: [/b>
• Entry: ORB High (limit order)
• Stop: ORB High + 0.2x range
• T1: ORB Mid
• T2: ORB Low
[b>Confidence Scoring: [/b>
Base: 40 points (lower base—range fading is lower probability than breakout/reversal)
[b>Use Case: [/b> Rotation days. Not recommended on normal/trend days.
[b>6. FADE LOW (Range Trade):
Mirror of FADE HIGH.
[b>7. WAIT:
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• ORB not complete yet OR
• No clear setup (price in no-man's-land)
[b>Action: [/b> Observe, don't trade.
[b>Confidence: [/b> 0 points
[b>Grading System:
```
Confidence → Grade
85-100 → A+
75-84 → A
65-74 → B+
55-64 → B
45-54 → C
0-44 → D
```
[b>Grade Interpretation: [/b>
• [b>A+ / A: High probability setup. Take these trades.
• [b>B+ / B [/b>: Decent setup. Trade if fits system rules.
• [b>C [/b>: Marginal setup. Only if very experienced.
• [b>D [/b>: Poor setup or no setup. Don't trade.
[b>Example Scenario: [/b>
ES futures:
• ORB: 5842-5850 (8 point range)
• Bullish breakout to 5851 confirmed
• Volume: 2.0x average (confirmed)
• VWAP: 5845 (price above VWAP ✓)
• Day type: Developing (too early, no bonus)
• Gap: None
[b>Setup: [/b>
• Action: LONG
• Entry: 5851
• Stop: 5846 (ORB mid, -5 point risk)
• T1: 5854 (+3 points, 1:0.6 R:R)
• T2: 5858 (+7 points, 1:1.4 R:R)
• T3: 5862.94 (+11.94 points, 1:2.4 R:R)
[b>Confidence: LONG with 55% confidence.
Interpretation: Solid setup, not perfect. Trade it if your system allows B-grade signals.
[b>📊 STATISTICS TRACKING & PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS [/b>
[b>Real-Time Performance Metrics: [/b>
ORB Fusion tracks comprehensive statistics over user-defined lookback (default 50 days):
[b>Breakout Performance: [/b>
• [b>Bull Breakouts: [/b> Total count, wins, losses, win rate
• [b>Bear Breakouts: [/b> Total count, wins, losses, win rate
[b>Win Definition: [/b> Breakout reaches ≥1.0x extension (doubles the opening range) before end of day.
[b>Example: [/b>
• ORB: 5842-5850 (8 points)
• Bull breakout at 5851
• Reaches 5858 (1.0x extension) by close
• Result: WIN
[b>Failed Breakout Performance: [/b>
• [b>Total Failed Breakouts [/b>: Count of breakouts that failed
• [b>Reversal Wins [/b>: Count where reversal trade reached target
• [b>Failed Reversal Win Rate [/b>: Wins / Total Failed
[b>Win Definition for Reversals: [/b>
• Failed bull → reversal short reaches ORB mid
• Failed bear → reversal long reaches ORB mid
[b>Extension Tracking: [/b>
• [b>Average Extension Reached [/b>: Mean of maximum extension achieved across all breakout days
• [b>Max Extension Overall [/b>: Largest extension ever achieved in lookback period
[b>Example: 🎨 THREE DISPLAY MODES
[b>Design Philosophy: [/b>
Not all traders need all features. Beginners want simplicity. Professionals want everything. ORB Fusion adapts.
[b>SIMPLE MODE: [/b>
[b>Shows: [/b>
• Primary ORB levels (High, Mid, Low)
• ORB box
• Breakout signals (triangles)
• Failed breakout signals (crosses)
• Basic dashboard (ORB status, breakout status, setup)
• VWAP
[b>Hides: [/b>
• Session ORBs (Asian, London, NY)
• IB levels and extensions
• ORB extensions beyond basic levels
• Gap analysis visuals
• Statistics dashboard
• Momentum candle coloring
• Narrative dashboard
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Traders who want clean chart
• Focus on core ORB concept only
• Mobile trading (less screen space)
[b>STANDARD MODE:
[b>Shows Everything in Simple Plus: [/b>
• Session ORBs (Asian, London, NY)
• IB levels (high, low, mid)
• IB extensions
• ORB extensions (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x)
• Gap analysis and fill targets
• VWAP bands (1σ and 2σ)
• Momentum candle coloring
• Context section in dashboard
• Narrative dashboard
[b>Hides: [/b>
• Advanced extensions (2.618x, 3.0x)
• Detailed statistics dashboard
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Most traders
• Balance between information and clarity
• Covers 90% of use cases
[b>ADVANCED MODE:
[b>Shows Everything:
• All session ORBs
• All IB levels and extensions
• All ORB extensions (including 2.618x and 3.0x)
• Full gap analysis
• VWAP with both 1σ and 2σ bands
• Momentum candle coloring
• Complete statistics dashboard
• Narrative dashboard
• All context metrics
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Professional traders
• System developers
• Those who want maximum information density
[b>Switching Modes: [/b>
Single dropdown input: "Display Mode" → Simple / Standard / Advanced
Entire indicator adapts instantly. No need to toggle 20 individual settings.
📖 NARRATIVE DASHBOARD
[b>Innovation: Plain-English Market State [/b>
Most indicators show data. ORB Fusion explains what the data [b>means [/b>.
[b>Narrative Components: [/b>
[b>1. Phase: [/b>
• "📍 Building ORB..." (during ORB session)
• "📊 Trading Phase" (after ORB complete)
• "⏳ Pre-Market" (before ORB session)
[b>2. Status (Current Observation): [/b>
• "⚠️ Failed breakout - reversal likely"
• "🚀 Bullish momentum in play"
• "📉 Bearish momentum in play"
• "⚖️ Consolidating in range"
• "👀 Monitoring for setup"
[b>3. Next Level:
Tells you what to watch for:
• "🎯 1.5x @ 5854.00" (next extension target)
• "Watch ORB levels" (inside range, await breakout)
[b>4. Setup: [/b>
Current trade setup + grade:
• "LONG " (bullish breakout, A-grade)
• "🔥 SHORT REVERSAL " (failed bull breakout, A+-grade)
• "WAIT " (no setup)
[b>5. Reason: [/b>
Why this setup exists:
• "ORB Bullish Breakout"
• "Failed Bear Breakout - High Probability Reversal"
• "Range Fade - Near High"
[b>6. Tip (Market Insight):
Contextual advice:
• "🔥 TREND DAY - Trail stops" (day type is trending)
• "🔄 ROTATION - Fade extremes" (day type is rotating)
• "📊 Gap unfilled - magnet level" (gap creates target)
• "📈 Normal conditions" (no special context)
[b>Example Narrative:
```
📖 ORB Narrative
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
Phase | 📊 Trading Phase
Status | 🚀 Bullish momentum in play
Next | 🎯 1.5x @ 5854.00
📈 Setup | LONG
Reason | ORB Bullish Breakout
💡 Tip | 🔥 TREND DAY - Trail stops
```
[b>Glance Interpretation: [/b>
"We're in trading phase. Bullish breakout happened (momentum in play). Next target is 1.5x extension at 5854. Current setup is LONG with A-grade. It's a trend day, so trail stops (don't take early profits)."
Complete market state communicated in 6 lines. No interpretation needed.
[b>Why This Matters:
Beginner traders struggle with "So what?" question. Indicators show lines and signals, but what does it mean [/b>? Narrative dashboard bridges this gap.
Professional traders benefit too—rapid context assessment during fast-moving markets. No time to analyze; glance at narrative, get action plan.
🔔 INTELLIGENT ALERT SYSTEM
[b>Four Alert Types: [/b>
[b>1. Breakout Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> ORB breakout confirmed (bull or bear)
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🚀 ORB BULLISH BREAKOUT
Price: 5851.00
Volume Confirmed
Grade: A
```
[b>Frequency: [/b> Once per bar (prevents spam)
[b>2. Failed Breakout Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> Breakout fails, reversal setup generated
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🔥 FAILED BULLISH BREAKOUT!
HIGH PROBABILITY SHORT REVERSAL
Entry: 5848.00
Stop: 5854.00
T1: 5846.00
T2: 5842.00
Historical Win Rate: 73%
```
[b>Why Comprehensive? [/b> Failed breakout alerts include complete trade plan. You can execute immediately from alert—no need to check chart.
[b>3. Extension Alert:
[b>Trigger: [/b> Price reaches extension level for first time
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🎯 Bull Extension 1.5x reached @ 5854.00
```
[b>Use: [/b> Profit-taking reminder. When extension hit, consider scaling out.
[b>4. IB Break Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> Price breaks above IB high or below IB low
[b>Message: [/b>
```
📊 IB HIGH BROKEN - Potential Trend Day
```
[b>Use: [/b> Day type classification. IB break suggests trend day developing—adjust strategy to trend-following mode.
[b>Alert Management: [/b>
Each alert type can be enabled/disabled independently. Prevents notification overload.
[b>Cooldown Logic: [/b>
Alerts won't fire if same alert type triggered within last bar. Prevents:
• "Breakout" alert every tick during choppy breakout
• Multiple "extension" alerts if price oscillates at level
Ensures: One clean alert per event.
⚙️ KEY PARAMETERS EXPLAINED
[b>Opening Range Settings: [/b>
• [b>ORB Timeframe [/b> (5/15/30/60 min): Duration of opening range window
- 30 min recommended for most traders
• [b>Use RTH Only [/b> (ON/OFF): Only trade during regular trading hours
- ON recommended (avoids thin overnight markets)
• [b>Use LTF Precision [/b> (ON/OFF): Sample 1-minute bars for accuracy
- ON recommended (critical for charts >1 minute)
• [b>Precision TF [/b> (1/5 min): Timeframe for LTF sampling
- 1 min recommended (most accurate)
[b>Session ORBs: [/b>
• [b>Show Asian/London/NY ORB [/b> (ON/OFF): Display multi-session ranges
- OFF in Simple mode
- ON in Standard/Advanced if trading 24hr markets
• [b>Session Windows [/b>: Time ranges for each session ORB
- Defaults align with major session opens
[b>Initial Balance: [/b>
• [b>Show IB [/b> (ON/OFF): Display Initial Balance levels
- ON recommended for day type classification
• [b>IB Session Window [/b> (0930-1030): First hour of trading
- Default is standard for US equities
• [b>Show IB Extensions [/b> (ON/OFF): Project IB extension targets
- ON recommended (identifies trend days)
• [b>IB Extensions 1-4 [/b> (0.5x, 1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x): Extension multipliers
- Defaults are Market Profile standard
[b>ORB Extensions: [/b>
• [b>Show Extensions [/b> (ON/OFF): Project ORB extension targets
- ON recommended (defines profit targets)
• [b>Enable Individual Extensions [/b> (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x, 2.618x, 3.0x)
- Enable 1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x minimum
- Disable 2.618x and 3.0x unless trading very volatile instruments
[b>Breakout Detection:
• [b>Confirmation Method [/b> (Close/Wick/Body):
- Close recommended (best balance)
- Wick for scalping
- Body for conservative
• [b>Require Volume Confirmation [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (increases reliability)
• [b>Volume Multiplier [/b> (1.0-3.0):
- 1.5x recommended
- Lower for thin instruments
- Higher for heavy volume instruments
[b>Failed Breakout System: [/b>
• [b>Enable Failed Breakouts [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON strongly recommended (highest edge)
• [b>Bars to Confirm Failure [/b> (2-10):
- 3 bars recommended
- 2 for aggressive (more signals, more false failures)
- 5+ for conservative (fewer signals, higher quality)
• [b>Failure Buffer [/b> (0.0-0.5 ATR):
- 0.1 ATR recommended
- Filters noise during consolidation near ORB level
• [b>Show Reversal Targets [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (visualizes trade plan)
• [b>Reversal Target Mults [/b> (0.5x, 1.0x, 1.5x):
- Defaults are tested values
- Adjust based on average daily range
[b>Gap Analysis:
• [b>Show Gap Analysis [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON if trading instruments that gap frequently
- OFF for 24hr markets (forex, crypto—no gaps)
• [b>Gap Fill Target [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON to visualize previous close (gap fill level)
[b>VWAP:
• [b>Show VWAP [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (key institutional level)
• [b>Show VWAP Bands [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON in Standard/Advanced
- OFF in Simple
• [b>Band Multipliers (1.0σ, 2.0σ):
- Defaults are standard
- 1σ = normal range, 2σ = extreme
[b>Day Type: [/b>
• [b>Show Day Type Analysis [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (critical for strategy adaptation)
• [b>Trend Day Threshold [/b> (1.0-2.5 IB mult):
- 1.5x recommended
- When price extends >1.5x IB, classifies as Trend Day
[b>Enhanced Visuals:
• [b>Show Momentum Candles [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON for visual context
- OFF if chart gets too colorful
• [b>Show Gradient Zone Fills [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON for professional look
- OFF for minimalist chart
• [b>Label Display Mode [/b> (All/Adaptive/Minimal):
- Adaptive recommended (shows nearby labels only)
- All for information density
- Minimal for clean chart
• [b>Label Proximity [/b> (1.0-5.0 ATR):
- 3.0 ATR recommended
- Labels beyond this distance are hidden (Adaptive mode)
[b>🎓 PROFESSIONAL USAGE PROTOCOL [/b>
[b>Phase 1: Learning the System (Week 1) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Understand ORB concepts and dashboard interpretation
[b>Setup: [/b>
• Display Mode: STANDARD
• ORB Timeframe: 30 minutes
• Enable ALL features (IB, extensions, failed breakouts, VWAP, gap analysis)
• Enable statistics tracking
[b>Actions: [/b>
• Paper trade ONLY—no real money
• Observe ORB formation every day (9:30-10:00 AM ET for US markets)
• Note when ORB breakouts occur and if they extend
• Note when breakouts fail and reversals happen
• Watch day type classification evolve during session
• Track statistics—which setups are working?
[b>Key Learning: [/b>
• How often do breakouts reach 1.5x extension? (typically 50-60% of confirmed breakouts)
• How often do breakouts fail? (typically 30-40%)
• Which setup grade (A/B/C) actually performs best? (should see A-grade outperforming)
• What day type produces best results? (trend days favor breakouts, rotation days favor fades)
[b>Phase 2: Parameter Optimization (Week 2) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Tune system to your instrument and timeframe
[b>ORB Timeframe Selection:
• Run 5 days with 15-minute ORB
• Run 5 days with 30-minute ORB
• Compare: Which captures better breakouts on your instrument?
• Typically: 30-minute optimal for most, 15-minute for very liquid (ES, SPY)
[b>Volume Confirmation Testing:
• Run 5 days WITH volume confirmation
• Run 5 days WITHOUT volume confirmation
• Compare: Does volume confirmation increase win rate?
• If win rate improves by >5%: Keep volume confirmation ON
• If no improvement: Turn OFF (avoid missing valid breakouts)
[b>Failed Breakout Bars:
[b>Goal: [/b> Develop personal trading rules based on system signals
[b>Setup Selection Rules: [/b>
Define which setups you'll trade:
• [b>Conservative: [/b> Only A+ and A grades
• [b>Balanced: [/b> A+, A, B+ grades
• [b>Aggressive: [/b> All grades B and above
Test each approach for 5-10 trades, compare results.
[b>Position Sizing by Grade: [/b>
Consider risk-weighting by setup quality:
• A+ grade: 100% position size
• A grade: 75% position size
• B+ grade: 50% position size
• B grade: 25% position size
Example: If max risk is $1000/trade:
• A+ setup: Risk $1000
• A setup: Risk $750
• B+ setup: Risk $500
This matches bet sizing to edge.
[b>Day Type Adaptation: [/b>
Create rules for different day types:
Trend Days:
• Take ALL breakout signals (A/B/C grades)
• Hold for 2.0x extension minimum
• Trail stops aggressively (1.0 ATR trail)
• DON'T fade—reversals unlikely
Rotation Days:
• ONLY take failed breakout reversals
• Ignore initial breakout signals (likely to fail)
• Take profits quickly (0.5x extension)
• Focus on fade setups (Fade High/Fade Low)
Normal Days:
• Take A/A+ breakout signals only
• Take ALL failed breakout reversals (high probability)
• Target 1.0-1.5x extensions
• Partial profit-taking at extensions
Time-of-Day Rules: [/b>
Breakouts at different times have different probabilities:
10:00-10:30 AM (Early Breakout):
• ORB just completed
• Fresh breakout
• Probability: Moderate (50-55% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Conservative position sizing
10:30-12:00 PM (Mid-Morning):
• Momentum established
• Volume still healthy
• Probability: High (60-65% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Standard position sizing
12:00-2:00 PM (Lunch Doldrums):
• Volume dries up
• Whipsaw risk increases
• Probability: Low (40-45% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Avoid new entries OR reduce size 50%
2:00-4:00 PM (Afternoon Session):
• Late-day positioning
• EOD squeezes possible
• Probability: Moderate-High (55-60%)
• Strategy: Watch for IB break—if trending all day, follow
[b>Phase 4: Live Micro-Sizing (Month 2) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Validate paper trading results with minimal risk
[b>Setup: [/b>
• 10-20% of intended full position size
• Take ONLY A+ and A grade setups
• Follow stop loss and targets religiously
[b>Execution: [/b>
• Execute from alerts OR from dashboard setup box
• Entry: Close of signal bar OR next bar market order
• Stop: Use exact stop from setup (don't widen)
• Targets: Scale out at T1/T2/T3 as indicated
[b>Tracking: [/b>
• Log every trade: Entry, Exit, Grade, Outcome, Day Type
• Calculate: Win rate, Average R-multiple, Max consecutive losses
• Compare to paper trading results (should be within 15%)
[b>Red Flags: [/b>
• Win rate <45%: System not suitable for this instrument/timeframe
• Major divergence from paper trading: Execution issues (slippage, late entries, emotional exits)
• Max consecutive losses >8: Hitting rough patch OR market regime changed
[b>Phase 5: Scaling Up (Months 3-6)
[b>Goal: [/b> Gradually increase to full position size
[b>Progression: [/b>
• Month 3: 25-40% size (if micro-sizing profitable)
• Month 4: 40-60% size
• Month 5: 60-80% size
• Month 6: 80-100% size
[b>Milestones Required to Scale Up: [/b>
• Minimum 30 trades at current size
• Win rate ≥48%
• Profit factor ≥1.2
• Max drawdown <20%
• Emotional control (no revenge trading, no FOMO)
[b>Advanced Techniques:
[b>Multi-Timeframe ORB: Assumes first 30-60 minutes establish value. Violation: Market opens after major news, price discovery continues for hours (opening range meaningless).
2. [b>Volume Indicates Conviction: ES, NQ, RTY, SPY, QQQ—high liquidity, clean ORB formation, reliable extensions
• [b>Large-Cap Stocks: AAPL, MSFT, TSLA, NVDA (>$5B market cap, >5M daily volume)
• [b>Liquid Futures: CL (crude oil), GC (gold), 6E (EUR/USD), ZB (bonds)—24hr markets benefit from session ORBs
• [b>Major Forex Pairs: [/b> EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY—London/NY session ORBs work well
[b>Performs Poorly On: [/b>
• [b>Illiquid Stocks: <$1M daily volume, wide spreads, gappy price action
• [b>Penny Stocks: [/b> Manipulated, pump-and-dump, no real price discovery
• [b>Low-Volume ETFs: Exotic sector ETFs, leveraged products with thin volume
• [b>Crypto on Sketchy Exchanges: Wash trading, spoofing invalidates volume analysis
• [b>Earnings Days: [/b> ORB completes before earnings release, then completely resets (useless)
• Binary Event Days: FDA approvals, court rulings—discontinuous price action
[b>Known Weaknesses: [/b>
• [b>Slow Starts: ORB doesn't complete until 10:00 AM (30-min ORB). Early morning traders have no signals for 30 minutes. Consider using 15-minute ORB if this is problematic.
• [b>Failure Detection Lag: [/b> Failed breakout requires 3+ bars to confirm. By the time system signals reversal, price may have already moved significantly back inside range. Manual traders watching in real-time can enter earlier.
• [b>Extension Overshoot: [/b> System projects extensions mathematically (1.5x, 2.0x, etc.). Actual moves may stop short (1.3x) or overshoot (2.2x). Extensions are targets, not magnets.
• [b>Day Type Misclassification: [/b> Early in session, day type is "Developing." By the time it's classified definitively (often 11:00 AM+), half the day is over. Strategy adjustments happen late.
• [b>Gap Assumptions: [/b> System assumes gaps want to fill. Strong trend days never fill gaps (gap becomes support/resistance forever). Blindly trading toward gaps can backfire on trend days.
• [b>Volume Data Quality: Forex doesn't have centralized volume (uses tick volume as proxy—less reliable). Crypto volume is often fake (wash trading). Volume confirmation less effective on these instruments.
• [b>Multi-Session Complexity: [/b> When using Asian/London/NY ORBs simultaneously, chart becomes cluttered. Requires discipline to focus on relevant session for current time.
[b>Risk Factors: [/b>
• [b>Opening Gaps: Large gaps (>2%) can create distorted ORBs. Opening range might be unusually wide or narrow, making extensions unreliable.
• [b>Low Volatility Environments:[/b> When VIX <12, opening ranges can be tiny (0.2-0.3%). Extensions are equally tiny. Profit targets don't justify commission/slippage.
• [b>High Volatility Environments:[/b> When VIX >30, opening ranges are huge (2-3%+). Extensions project unrealistic targets. Failed breakouts happen faster (volatility whipsaw).
• [b>Algorithm Dominance:[/b> In heavily algorithmic markets (ES during overnight session), ORB levels can be manipulated—algos pin price to ORB high/low intentionally. Breakouts become stop-runs rather than genuine directional moves.
[b>⚠️ RISK DISCLOSURE[/b>
Trading futures, stocks, options, forex, and cryptocurrencies involves substantial risk of loss and is not suitable for all investors. Opening Range Breakout strategies, while based on sound market structure principles, do not guarantee profits and can result in significant losses.
The ORB Fusion indicator implements professional trading concepts including Opening Range theory, Market Profile Initial Balance analysis, Fibonacci extensions, and failed breakout reversal logic. These methodologies have theoretical foundations but past performance—whether backtested or live—is not indicative of future results.
Opening Range theory assumes the first 30-60 minutes of trading establish a meaningful value area and that breakouts from this range signal directional conviction. This assumption may not hold during:
• Major news events (FOMC, NFP, earnings surprises)
• Market structure changes (circuit breakers, trading halts)
• Low liquidity periods (holidays, early closures)
• Algorithmic manipulation or spoofing
Failed breakout detection relies on patterns of trapped participant behavior. While historically these patterns have shown statistical edges, market conditions change. Institutional algorithms, changing market structure, or regime shifts can reduce or eliminate edges that existed historically.
Initial Balance classification (trend day vs rotation day vs normal day) is a heuristic framework, not a deterministic prediction. Day type can change mid-session. Early classification may prove incorrect as the day develops.
Extension projections (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x, etc.) are probabilistic targets derived from Fibonacci ratios and empirical market behavior. They are not "support and resistance levels" that price must reach or respect. Markets can stop short of extensions, overshoot them, or ignore them entirely.
Volume confirmation assumes high volume indicates institutional participation and conviction. In algorithmic markets, volume can be artificially high (HFT activity) or artificially low (dark pools, internalization). Volume is a proxy, not a guarantee of conviction.
LTF precision sampling improves ORB accuracy by using 1-minute bars but introduces additional data dependencies. If 1-minute data is unavailable, inaccurate, or delayed, ORB calculations will be incorrect.
The grading system (A+/A/B+/B/C/D) and confidence scores aggregate multiple factors (volume, VWAP, day type, IB expansion, gap context) into a single assessment. This is a mechanical calculation, not artificial intelligence. The system cannot adapt to unprecedented market conditions or events outside its programmed logic.
Real trading involves slippage, commissions, latency, partial fills, and rejected orders not present in indicator calculations. ORB Fusion generates signals at bar close; actual fills occur with delay. Opening range forms during highest volatility (first 30 minutes)—spreads widen, slippage increases. Execution quality significantly impacts realized results.
Statistics tracking (win rates, extension levels reached, day type distribution) is based on historical bars in your lookback window. If lookback is small (<50 bars) or market regime changed, statistics may not represent future probabilities.
Users must independently validate system performance on their specific instruments, timeframes, and broker execution environment. Paper trade extensively (100+ trades minimum) before risking capital. Start with micro position sizing (5-10% of intended size) for 50+ trades to validate execution quality matches expectations.
Never risk more than you can afford to lose completely. Use proper position sizing (0.5-2% risk per trade maximum). Implement stop losses on every single trade without exception. Understand that most retail traders lose money—sophisticated indicators do not change this fundamental reality. They systematize analysis but cannot eliminate risk.
The developer makes no warranties regarding profitability, suitability, accuracy, reliability, or fitness for any purpose. Users assume full responsibility for all trading decisions, parameter selections, risk management, and outcomes.
By using this indicator, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and accepted these risk disclosures and limitations, and you accept full responsibility for all trading activity and potential losses.
[b>═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════[/b>
[b>CLOSING STATEMENT[/b>
[b>═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════[/b>
Opening Range Breakout is not a trick. It's a framework. The first 30-60 minutes reveal where participants believe value lies. Breakouts signal directional conviction. Failures signal trapped participants. Extensions define profit targets. Day types dictate strategy. Failed breakouts create the highest-probability reversals.
ORB Fusion doesn't predict the future—it identifies [b>structure[/b>, detects [b>breakouts[/b>, recognizes [b>failures[/b>, and generates [b>probabilistic trade plans[/b> with defined risk and reward.
The edge is not in the opening range itself. The edge is in recognizing when the market respects structure (follow breakouts) versus when it violates structure (fade breakouts). The edge is in detecting failures faster than discretionary traders. The edge is in systematic classification that prevents catastrophic errors—like fading a trend day or holding through rotation.
Most indicators draw lines. ORB Fusion implements a complete institutional trading methodology: Opening Range theory, Market Profile classification, failed breakout intelligence, Fibonacci projections, volume confirmation, gap psychology, and real-time performance tracking.
Whether you're a beginner learning market structure or a professional seeking systematic ORB implementation, this system provides the framework.
"The market's first word is its opening range. Everything after is commentary." — ORB Fusion
Wyckoff Method - Comprehensive Analysis# WYCKOFF METHOD - QUICK REFERENCE CHEAT SHEET
## 🟢 STRONGEST BUY SIGNALS
### 1. SPRING ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** False breakdown below support on LOW volume
- **Look for:** Quick reversal, close above support
- **Entry:** When price closes back in range
- **Stop:** Below spring low
- **Target:** Top of range minimum
### 2. SOS (Sign of Strength) ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Breakout above resistance on HIGH volume
- **Look for:** Wide spread up bar, strong close
- **Entry:** On breakout or wait for LPS pullback
- **Stop:** Below range top
- **Target:** Height of range projected up
### 3. SHAKEOUT ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Sharp move below support with HIGH volume, immediate reversal
- **Look for:** Long lower wick, closes strong
- **Entry:** When price reclaims support
- **Stop:** Below shakeout low
- **Target:** Previous resistance
---
## 🔴 STRONGEST SELL SIGNALS
### 1. UTAD (Upthrust After Distribution) ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** False breakout above resistance, quick rejection
- **Look for:** Spike high, weak close, often high volume
- **Entry:** When price closes back in range
- **Stop:** Above UTAD high
- **Target:** Bottom of range minimum
### 2. SOW (Sign of Weakness) ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Breakdown below support on HIGH volume
- **Look for:** Wide spread down bar, weak close
- **Entry:** On breakdown or wait for LPSY rally
- **Stop:** Above range bottom
- **Target:** Height of range projected down
### 3. UPTHRUST ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Move above resistance on LOW volume, weak close
- **Look for:** Long upper wick, closes in lower half
- **Entry:** When resistance holds
- **Stop:** Above upthrust high
- **Target:** Support level
---
## 📊 ACCUMULATION PHASES (Bottom Formation)
```
PHASE A: Stopping the Downtrend
├─ PS (Preliminary Support) - First buying
├─ SC (Selling Climax) - Panic bottom ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ AR (Automatic Rally) - Relief bounce
└─ ST (Secondary Test) - Retest SC low
PHASE B: Building the Cause
├─ Trading range forms
├─ Multiple tests of support
├─ Volume decreasing
└─ Absorption occurring
PHASE C: The Test
├─ SPRING - False breakdown ⚠️ KEY EVENT
└─ TEST - Support holds on low volume
PHASE D: Dominance Emerges
├─ SOS - Breakout ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ LPS - Last Point of Support (pullback)
└─ BU - Backup
PHASE E: Markup
└─ New uptrend, strong momentum
```
**Background Color:** Blue → Green (getting brighter)
**Action:** Buy in Phase C/D, Hold through Phase E
---
## 📊 DISTRIBUTION PHASES (Top Formation)
```
PHASE A: Stopping the Uptrend
├─ PSY (Preliminary Supply) - First selling
├─ BC (Buying Climax) - Euphoric top ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ AR (Automatic Reaction) - Sharp drop
└─ ST (Secondary Test) - Retest BC high
PHASE B: Building the Cause
├─ Trading range forms
├─ Multiple tests of resistance
├─ Demand being absorbed
└─ Volume patterns change
PHASE C: The Test
└─ UTAD - False breakout ⚠️ KEY EVENT
PHASE D: Dominance Emerges
├─ SOW - Breakdown ⚠️ KEY EVENT
└─ LPSY - Last Point of Supply (rally to exit)
PHASE E: Markdown
└─ New downtrend, strong selling
```
**Background Color:** Orange → Red (getting darker)
**Action:** Sell in Phase C/D, Stay out during Phase E
---
## 💰 VOLUME SPREAD ANALYSIS (VSA)
| Signal | Meaning | Color | Implication |
|--------|---------|-------|-------------|
| **ND** (No Demand) | Up bar, LOW volume | 🟠 Orange | Weakness - uptrend ending |
| **NS** (No Supply) | Down bar, LOW volume | 🔵 Blue | Strength - downtrend ending |
| **SV** (Stopping Volume) | VERY HIGH volume, narrow spread | 🟣 Purple | Potential reversal |
| **UT** (Upthrust) | Above resistance, LOW vol, weak close | 🔴 Red | Sell signal |
| **SO** (Shakeout) | Below support, HIGH vol, strong close | 🟢 Green | Buy signal |
---
## 🎯 VOLUME INTERPRETATION
| Volume Level | Bar Color | Meaning |
|--------------|-----------|---------|
| **VERY HIGH** (>2x average) | Dark Green/Red | Climax, potential reversal |
| **HIGH** (>1.5x average) | Light Green/Red | Strong interest |
| **NORMAL** | Gray | Average trading |
| **LOW** (<0.7x average) | Faint Gray | Testing, no interest |
---
## ⚖️ EFFORT vs RESULT
| Scenario | Volume | Spread | Meaning |
|----------|--------|--------|---------|
| **High Effort, Low Result** | HIGH | Narrow | ⚠️ Potential reversal |
| **Low Effort, High Result** | LOW | Wide | ⚠️ Trend weakening |
| **High Effort, High Result** | HIGH | Wide | ✅ Strong trend |
| **Low Effort, Low Result** | LOW | Narrow | 😴 No interest |
---
## 📏 TRADING RULES
### ✅ DO:
- ✅ Wait for confirmation before entering
- ✅ Trade in direction of higher timeframe
- ✅ Use springs and UTAD as primary signals
- ✅ Measure trading range for targets
- ✅ Place stops outside the range
- ✅ Look for volume confirmation
- ✅ Check multiple timeframes
- ✅ Focus on Phase C and D events
### ❌ DON'T:
- ❌ Buy during Phase E Markdown
- ❌ Sell during Phase E Markup
- ❌ Trade against major trend
- ❌ Ignore volume signals
- ❌ Enter without clear stop loss
- ❌ Trade every signal
- ❌ Use on very low timeframes without practice
- ❌ Ignore the context
---
## 🎪 COMPOSITE OPERATOR (Smart Money)
### 💰 Green Money Symbol (Bottom)
- **Meaning:** Institutions accumulating
- **Location:** Demand zones, springs, tests
- **Action:** Follow the smart money - buy
### 💰 Red Money Symbol (Top)
- **Meaning:** Institutions distributing
- **Location:** Supply zones, UTAD, weak rallies
- **Action:** Follow the smart money - sell
---
## 📍 SUPPLY & DEMAND ZONES
### 🟢 Demand Zones (Green Boxes)
- **Created at:** SC, Spring, Shakeout
- **Represents:** Where smart money bought
- **Action:** Look for bounces
### 🔴 Supply Zones (Red Boxes)
- **Created at:** BC, UTAD, Upthrust
- **Represents:** Where smart money sold
- **Action:** Look for rejections
---
## 🎯 TARGET CALCULATION
### Measured Move Method
```
1. Measure trading range height
Example: Top at 120, Bottom at 100 = 20 points
2. Add to breakout point (accumulation)
Breakout at 120 + 20 = Target: 140
3. Or subtract from breakdown (distribution)
Breakdown at 100 - 20 = Target: 80
```
### Multiple Targets
- **Conservative:** 1x range height (100% probability reached)
- **Moderate:** 1.5x range height (70% probability)
- **Aggressive:** 2x range height (40% probability)
---
## ⏰ TIMEFRAME GUIDE
| Timeframe | Use For | Reliability | Recommended For |
|-----------|---------|-------------|-----------------|
| **Weekly** | Major trends | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Position traders |
| **Daily** | Swing trades | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Most traders |
| **4-Hour** | Active swing | ⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Active traders |
| **1-Hour** | Day trading | ⭐⭐⭐ | Experienced only |
| **15-Min** | Scalping | ⭐⭐ | Experts only |
**Golden Rule:** Always check one timeframe higher for context!
---
## 🚨 ALERT PRIORITY
### 🔔 MUST-HAVE ALERTS
1. Spring
2. UTAD
3. SOS
4. SOW
### 🔔 NICE-TO-HAVE ALERTS
5. Selling Climax (SC)
6. Buying Climax (BC)
7. Smart Money Accumulation
8. Smart Money Distribution
### 🔔 CONFIRMATION ALERTS
9. Phase E Markup
10. Phase E Markdown
---
## 💡 QUICK DECISION TREE
```
Is there a clear trading range?
├─ YES
│ ├─ Did price break BELOW support?
│ │ ├─ Volume LOW + Quick reversal = SPRING → BUY ✅
│ │ └─ Volume HIGH + Stays down = Breakdown → SELL ⚠️
│ │
│ └─ Did price break ABOVE resistance?
│ ├─ Volume LOW + Quick reversal = UTAD → SELL ✅
│ └─ Volume HIGH + Stays up = Breakout → BUY ⚠️
│
└─ NO
├─ Strong uptrend = Wait for re-accumulation
└─ Strong downtrend = Wait for re-distribution
```
---
## 📝 PRE-TRADE CHECKLIST
Before entering any trade:
- Identified the current Wyckoff phase
- Confirmed with volume analysis
- Checked higher timeframe trend
- Located supply/demand zones
- Identified clear entry point
- Set stop loss level
- Calculated target (risk:reward >1:2)
- Verified position size (risk 1-2%)
- Have at least 2 confirming signals
- Not trading against major trend
---
## 🧠 REMEMBER
**The Three Laws:**
1. **Supply & Demand** - Price is determined by imbalance
2. **Cause & Effect** - Range size predicts move size
3. **Effort & Result** - Volume should confirm price movement
**The Key Principle:**
> "Trade with the Composite Operator (smart money), not against them"
**Best Setups:**
1. Spring in accumulation (Phase C)
2. UTAD in distribution (Phase C)
3. SOS breakout (Phase D)
4. SOW breakdown (Phase D)
**When in Doubt:**
- ❓ Stay out
- 📈 Use higher timeframe
- 📚 Review the documentation
- 🎯 Wait for clearer signal
---
## 📱 INDICATOR SETTINGS QUICK SETUP
**For Stocks/Crypto (Good Volume Data):**
- Volume MA Length: 20
- High Volume Multiplier: 1.5
- Climax Volume: 2.0
- Swing Length: 5
**For Forex (Limited Volume Data):**
- Volume MA Length: 20
- High Volume Multiplier: 1.3
- Climax Volume: 1.8
- Swing Length: 7
- Turn OFF "Volume Confirmation"
**For Day Trading:**
- Swing Length: 3
- All other settings: Default
**For Position Trading:**
- Swing Length: 7-10
- Volume MA Length: 30
- Use Daily/Weekly charts
---
## 🎓 SKILL PROGRESSION
### Beginner (Month 1-2)
- Focus on: SC, Spring, SOS
- Timeframe: Daily only
- Goal: Identify phases correctly
### Intermediate (Month 3-6)
- Add: All accumulation events
- Timeframe: Daily + 4H
- Goal: Trade springs profitably
### Advanced (Month 6-12)
- Add: Distribution events, VSA
- Timeframe: Multiple timeframes
- Goal: Trade complete cycles
### Expert (Year 2+)
- Master: All events, all timeframes
- Combine: With other methodologies
- Goal: Consistent profitability
---
**Print this sheet and keep it next to your trading desk!**
*Remember: Quality over quantity. Wait for the best setups.*
# Wyckoff Method - Comprehensive Analysis Indicator
## Complete Implementation Guide for TradingView Pine Script
---
## TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. (#overview)
2. (#installation)
3. (#theory)
4. (#components)
5. (#signals)
6. (#strategies)
7. (#settings)
8. (#alerts)
9. (#patterns)
10. (#troubleshooting)
---
## OVERVIEW
This indicator implements Richard Wyckoff's complete trading methodology, including:
- **All 5 Phases** of Accumulation and Distribution
- **18+ Wyckoff Events** (PS, SC, AR, ST, Spring, SOS, LPS, BC, UTAD, SOW, etc.)
- **Volume Spread Analysis (VSA)** principles
- **Supply & Demand Zone** detection
- **Composite Operator** logic (Smart Money tracking)
- **Effort vs Result** analysis
- **Three Wyckoff Laws**: Supply/Demand, Cause/Effect, Effort/Result
---
## INSTALLATION
### Step 1: Copy the Code
1. Open the `wyckoff_comprehensive.pine` file
2. Select all code (Ctrl+A / Cmd+A)
3. Copy to clipboard (Ctrl+C / Cmd+C)
### Step 2: Add to TradingView
1. Go to TradingView.com
2. Open any chart
3. Click "Pine Editor" at the bottom of the screen
4. Click "New" or "Open"
5. Paste the entire code
6. Click "Save" and give it a name
7. Click "Add to Chart"
### Step 3: Verify Installation
You should see:
- Labels on the chart (PS, SC, Spring, SOS, etc.)
- Background colors indicating phases
- Volume analysis in the lower pane
- A table in the top-right corner showing current phase
---
## WYCKOFF METHOD THEORY
### The Three Fundamental Laws
#### 1. **Law of Supply and Demand**
- Price rises when demand exceeds supply
- Price falls when supply exceeds demand
- The indicator tracks volume vs price movement to identify imbalances
#### 2. **Law of Cause and Effect**
- A period of accumulation (cause) leads to markup (effect)
- A period of distribution (cause) leads to markdown (effect)
- Trading ranges build "cause" for future price movement
#### 3. **Law of Effort vs Result**
- **Effort** = Volume (energy put into the market)
- **Result** = Price movement (spread of the bar)
- High effort with low result = potential reversal
- Low effort with high result = trend weakness
### The Five Phases
#### **ACCUMULATION CYCLE**
**Phase A: Stopping the Downtrend**
- Preliminary Support (PS): First sign of buying
- Selling Climax (SC): Panic selling exhaustion
- Automatic Rally (AR): Bounce from SC
- Secondary Test (ST): Test of SC low on lower volume
**Phase B: Building the Cause**
- Trading range develops
- Supply being absorbed by composite operator
- Multiple tests of support and resistance
- Volume generally decreases
**Phase C: The Test (Spring)**
- False breakdown below support
- Traps late sellers
- Quick reversal on low volume
- Last chance to accumulate before markup
**Phase D: Dominance Emerges**
- Sign of Strength (SOS): Break above resistance
- Last Point of Support (LPS): Pullback opportunity
- Backup (BU): Final consolidation
- Demand clearly exceeds supply
**Phase E: Markup**
- New uptrend established
- Price moves rapidly higher
- Phase E can last months/years
- Original trading range becomes support
#### **DISTRIBUTION CYCLE**
**Phase A: Stopping the Uptrend**
- Preliminary Supply (PSY): First sign of selling
- Buying Climax (BC): Euphoric buying exhaustion
- Automatic Reaction (AR): Sharp selloff from BC
- Secondary Test (ST): Test of BC high on lower volume
**Phase B: Building the Cause**
- Trading range at top
- Demand being absorbed by composite operator
- Multiple tests of support and resistance
**Phase C: The Test (UTAD)**
- Upthrust After Distribution
- False breakout above resistance
- Traps late buyers
- Quick reversal
**Phase D: Dominance Emerges**
- Sign of Weakness (SOW): Break below support
- Last Point of Supply (LPSY): Rally opportunity to exit
- Supply clearly exceeds demand
**Phase E: Markdown**
- New downtrend established
- Price moves rapidly lower
- Original trading range becomes resistance
---
## INDICATOR COMPONENTS
### 1. EVENT LABELS
#### Accumulation Events (Green labels)
- **PS** = Preliminary Support
- **SC** = Selling Climax (largest label, most important)
- **AR** = Automatic Rally
- **ST** = Secondary Test
- **SPRING** = Spring (critical buy signal)
- **TEST** = Test of support
- **SOS** = Sign of Strength (breakout)
- **LPS** = Last Point of Support
- **BU** = Backup
#### Distribution Events (Red labels)
- **PSY** = Preliminary Supply
- **BC** = Buying Climax (largest label, most important)
- **AR** = Automatic Reaction
- **ST** = Secondary Test
- **UTAD** = Upthrust After Distribution (critical sell signal)
- **SOW** = Sign of Weakness
- **LPSY** = Last Point of Supply
#### VSA Events (Small colored labels)
- **ND** (Orange) = No Demand - weakness
- **NS** (Blue) = No Supply - strength
- **SV** (Purple) = Stopping Volume
- **UT** (Red) = Upthrust - weakness
- **SO** (Green) = Shakeout - strength
#### Composite Operator (💰 symbols)
- Green 💰 at bottom = Smart Money Accumulation
- Red 💰 at top = Smart Money Distribution
### 2. BACKGROUND COLORS
- **Light Blue** = Phase A (Accumulation)
- **Light Orange** = Phase A (Distribution)
- **Very Light Green** = Phase C (Accumulation Testing)
- **Very Light Red** = Phase C (Distribution Testing)
- **Light Green** = Phase D (Accumulation Strength)
- **Light Red** = Phase D (Distribution Weakness)
- **Green** = Phase E (Markup - Bull trend)
- **Red** = Phase E (Markdown - Bear trend)
### 3. SUPPLY & DEMAND ZONES
- **Green boxes** = Demand zones (where smart money accumulated)
- **Red boxes** = Supply zones (where smart money distributed)
- Zones extend 20 bars into the future
- Price reactions at these zones are significant
### 4. VOLUME PANEL
- **Dark Green/Red bars** = Very High Volume (climax)
- **Light Green/Red bars** = High Volume
- **Gray bars** = Normal Volume
- **Faint Gray bars** = Low Volume
- **Blue line** = Volume Moving Average
### 5. INFORMATION TABLE (Top Right)
Displays real-time analysis:
- **Current Phase** (A, B, C, D, or E)
- **Status** (description of what's happening)
- **Volume** (Very High, High, Normal, Low)
- **Spread** (Wide, Normal, Narrow)
- **Effort/Result** (Poor, Normal, Good)
- **Range** (YES if in trading range)
- **Bias** (BULLISH, BEARISH, or NEUTRAL)
---
## HOW TO READ THE SIGNALS
### STRONG BUY SIGNALS (in order of strength)
1. **SPRING** (strongest)
- False breakdown below support
- Look for: Low volume, quick reversal, close above support
- Entry: When price closes back above support level
- Stop: Below the spring low
2. **SOS (Sign of Strength)**
- Break above trading range resistance
- Look for: High volume, wide spread up bar
- Entry: On breakout or pullback to LPS
- Stop: Below trading range
3. **Shakeout (SO)**
- Similar to spring but more violent
- Look for: High volume, penetration of support, strong close
- Entry: When price reclaims support
- Stop: Below shakeout low
4. **LPS (Last Point of Support)**
- Pullback after SOS
- Look for: Low volume, shallow pullback
- Entry: When support holds
- Stop: Below LPS
5. **No Supply (NS)**
- Down bar on very low volume
- Indicates lack of selling pressure
- Confirms accumulation phase
### STRONG SELL SIGNALS (in order of strength)
1. **UTAD (Upthrust After Distribution)** (strongest)
- False breakout above resistance
- Look for: High volume spike, rejection, close below resistance
- Entry: When price closes back below resistance
- Stop: Above UTAD high
2. **SOW (Sign of Weakness)**
- Break below trading range support
- Look for: High volume, wide spread down bar
- Entry: On breakdown or rally to LPSY
- Stop: Above trading range
3. **Upthrust (UT)**
- Move above resistance on low volume, weak close
- Look for: Low volume, close in lower half of bar
- Entry: When resistance becomes resistance again
- Stop: Above upthrust high
4. **LPSY (Last Point of Supply)**
- Rally after SOW
- Look for: Low volume, weak rally
- Entry: When rally fails
- Stop: Above LPSY
5. **No Demand (ND)**
- Up bar on very low volume
- Indicates lack of buying pressure
- Confirms distribution phase
### NEUTRAL/WARNING SIGNALS
- **High Effort, Low Result** = Potential reversal coming
- **Stopping Volume** = Trend may be ending
- **Absorption** = Large volume with small movement (accumulation/distribution)
---
## TRADING STRATEGY EXAMPLES
### Strategy 1: Accumulation Range Breakout
**Setup:**
1. Identify trading range (blue background in Phase B)
2. Wait for Spring or Test (Phase C)
3. Wait for SOS breakout (Phase D)
**Entry:**
- Option A: Buy on SOS breakout
- Option B: Wait for LPS pullback (better risk/reward)
**Stop Loss:**
- Below the spring low or trading range bottom
**Target:**
- Measure height of trading range (cause)
- Project upward from breakout point (effect)
- Minimum target = range height
**Example:**
```
Trading Range: 100 to 120 (20 point range)
SOS Breakout at: 120
Target: 120 + 20 = 140 minimum
```
### Strategy 2: Distribution Range Breakdown
**Setup:**
1. Identify trading range after uptrend
2. Wait for UTAD (Phase C)
3. Wait for SOW breakdown (Phase D)
**Entry:**
- Option A: Sell on SOW breakdown
- Option B: Wait for LPSY rally (better risk/reward)
**Stop Loss:**
- Above the UTAD high or trading range top
**Target:**
- Measure height of trading range
- Project downward from breakdown point
- Minimum target = range height
### Strategy 3: Spring Trading
**Setup:**
1. Strong downtrend followed by range
2. Price breaks below range bottom
3. Volume is LOW on breakdown
4. Price quickly reverses and closes above support
**Entry:**
- When candle closes above support level
- Or on retest of support
**Stop Loss:**
- Below spring low (usually tight)
**Target:**
- Top of trading range
- Previous swing high
**Risk/Reward:**
- Typically 1:3 or better
### Strategy 4: Smart Money Tracking
**Setup:**
1. Look for 💰 symbols in demand zones
2. Multiple accumulation signals (PS, SC, ST, Test)
3. Volume decreasing during range
**Entry:**
- At next demand zone test
- On SOS breakout
**Confirmation:**
- Background turning green (Phase D/E)
- Table shows "BULLISH" bias
### Strategy 5: VSA Reversal
**Setup:**
1. Strong trend in place
2. Stopping Volume (SV) appears at extreme
3. Followed by No Demand (ND) or No Supply (NS)
**Entry:**
- When trend breaks down/up
- On retest of extreme
**Example (Bullish):**
```
Downtrend → Stopping Volume → No Supply → Up bar
Entry: Buy when price moves above SV bar
```
---
## SETTINGS & CUSTOMIZATION
### Volume Analysis Settings
**Volume MA Length** (default: 20)
- Shorter = More sensitive to volume changes
- Longer = Smoother, less noise
- Recommended: 15-25 for most timeframes
**High Volume Multiplier** (default: 1.5)
- Threshold for "high volume"
- Lower = More signals
- Higher = Only extreme volume
- Recommended: 1.3-2.0
**Climax Volume Multiplier** (default: 2.0)
- Threshold for climax events (SC, BC)
- Should be significantly higher than normal
- Recommended: 2.0-3.0
### Phase Detection Settings
**Swing Detection Length** (default: 5)
- How many bars to look left/right for swing points
- Shorter = More swings detected (more noise)
- Longer = Fewer swings (cleaner, might miss some)
- Recommended: 3-7
**Range Expansion Threshold** (default: 1.5)
- Multiplier for "wide spread" bars
- Higher = Only very wide bars qualify
- Recommended: 1.3-2.0
**Volume Confirmation** (default: ON)
- Requires volume confirmation for events
- Turn OFF for very low volume instruments
- Keep ON for stocks, forex, crypto
### Display Options
Toggle on/off:
- ✅ **Show Accumulation/Distribution Phases** - Background colors
- ✅ **Show Wyckoff Events** - All labeled events
- ✅ **Show Volume Spread Analysis** - VSA labels
- ✅ **Show Supply/Demand Zones** - Boxes on chart
- ✅ **Show Composite Operator Signals** - 💰 symbols
### Color Customization
- **Bullish Color** - All accumulation events
- **Bearish Color** - All distribution events
- **Neutral Color** - Range/neutral signals
---
## ALERT SETUP
### Available Alerts
1. **Selling Climax (SC)** - Potential bottom forming
2. **Spring** - Strong buy signal
3. **Sign of Strength (SOS)** - Bullish breakout
4. **Buying Climax (BC)** - Potential top forming
5. **UTAD** - Strong sell signal
6. **Sign of Weakness (SOW)** - Bearish breakdown
7. **Phase E Markup** - Uptrend confirmed
8. **Phase E Markdown** - Downtrend confirmed
9. **Smart Money Accumulation** - Institutions buying
10. **Smart Money Distribution** - Institutions selling
### How to Set Up Alerts
1. Click the "⏰" icon on TradingView
2. Select "Create Alert"
3. Condition: Choose the indicator and alert type
4. Example: "Wyckoff Method - Spring"
5. Set notification preferences (popup, email, webhook)
6. Click "Create"
### Recommended Alert Strategy
**Conservative Trader:**
- Spring
- SOS
- UTAD
- SOW
**Aggressive Trader:**
- Add: SC, BC, Smart Money signals
**Long-term Investor:**
- Phase E Markup
- Phase E Markdown
- Smart Money Accumulation
---
## COMMON PATTERNS
### Pattern 1: Classic Accumulation
```
Phase A: Downtrend → PS → SC → AR → ST
Phase B: Range building (4-12 weeks typical)
Phase C: Spring (false breakdown)
Phase D: SOS → LPS → BU
Phase E: Markup (new uptrend)
```
**What to do:**
- Mark the range boundaries
- Wait for spring
- Buy on LPS or SOS
- Hold through markup
### Pattern 2: Classic Distribution
```
Phase A: Uptrend → PSY → BC → AR → ST
Phase B: Range building (topping process)
Phase C: UTAD (false breakout)
Phase D: SOW → LPSY
Phase E: Markdown (new downtrend)
```
**What to do:**
- Mark the range boundaries
- Wait for UTAD
- Sell on LPSY or SOW
- Stay out during markdown
### Pattern 3: Re-Accumulation
```
Uptrend → Trading Range → Spring → Uptrend continues
```
- Occurs during existing uptrend
- Shorter accumulation period
- Often no clear SC (trend is already up)
- Spring is the key signal
### Pattern 4: Re-Distribution
```
Downtrend → Trading Range → UTAD → Downtrend continues
```
- Occurs during existing downtrend
- Shorter distribution period
- Often no clear BC (trend is already down)
- UTAD is the key signal
### Pattern 5: Failed Breakout
**Bullish Failed Breakout:**
```
Range → Breakdown → Immediate reversal (Spring)
```
- Price breaks support
- Volume is LOW
- Immediate strong reversal
- Very bullish
**Bearish Failed Breakout:**
```
Range → Breakout → Immediate reversal (UTAD)
```
- Price breaks resistance
- Volume may be high initially
- Quick rejection and reversal
- Very bearish
---
## TIMEFRAME RECOMMENDATIONS
### Daily Charts (Most Reliable)
- Best for swing trading
- Clear phases and events
- Less noise
- Recommended for beginners
### 4-Hour Charts
- Good for active swing traders
- Faster signals than daily
- Still reliable
### 1-Hour Charts
- For day traders
- More false signals
- Need to filter carefully
- Use in conjunction with higher timeframe
### 15-Minute / 5-Minute
- Only for experienced traders
- High noise level
- Many false signals
- Use daily chart for context
**Golden Rule:** Always check higher timeframe first!
---
## MULTI-TIMEFRAME ANALYSIS
### Top-Down Approach (Recommended)
1. **Weekly Chart** - Identify major trend and phase
2. **Daily Chart** - Find current accumulation/distribution
3. **4H Chart** - Identify entry timing
4. **Entry Timeframe** - Execute trade
### Example Analysis:
**Weekly:** Phase E Markup (bullish)
**Daily:** Phase B Re-accumulation
**4-Hour:** Spring detected
**Action:** Buy on daily LPS
---
## WYCKOFF + OTHER INDICATORS
### Complementary Tools
1. **Moving Averages**
- 20/50 SMA for trend context
- Already plotted on indicator
2. **RSI**
- Divergences at SC/BC
- Confirms overbought/oversold
3. **MACD**
- Confirms trend change in Phase D
- Divergences support Wyckoff events
4. **Volume Profile**
- Identifies value areas
- Confirms supply/demand zones
5. **Order Flow / Footprint Charts**
- See institutional activity
- Confirms smart money signals
**Don't Over-Complicate:**
- Wyckoff is a complete system
- Other indicators are supplementary
- When in doubt, trust Wyckoff
---
## TROUBLESHOOTING
### Issue: Too Many Labels
**Solution:**
- Increase swing length (Settings → 7 or 10)
- Increase volume multipliers
- Turn off VSA labels if not needed
- Focus on major events only (SC, Spring, SOS, BC, UTAD, SOW)
### Issue: Missing Expected Events
**Solution:**
- Decrease swing length (Settings → 3)
- Decrease volume multipliers
- Turn OFF volume confirmation
- Check timeframe (use daily chart)
### Issue: False Signals
**Solution:**
- Use higher timeframe
- Wait for confirmation
- Don't trade against major trend
- Look for multiple signal convergence
### Issue: Can't See Background Colors
**Solution:**
- Check "Show Phases" is enabled
- Increase monitor brightness
- Colors are subtle by design (not to obscure price)
### Issue: Volume Shows Incorrectly
**Solution:**
- Ensure volume data is available for your symbol
- Some symbols have poor volume data
- Forex spot pairs have no real volume
- Use futures or stock markets for best results
### Issue: No Trading Range Detected
**Solution:**
- Market may be trending strongly
- Trading range might be too small
- Wait for price to consolidate
- Not all markets have clear ranges
---
## ADVANCED TIPS
### 1. Count Point & Figure Charts
- Wyckoff used P&F to measure "cause"
- Width of range × height = minimum move target
- Longer accumulation = larger markup
### 2. Watch for Absorption
- High volume + narrow spread = someone absorbing
- In downtrend = accumulation
- In uptrend = distribution
### 3. Multiple Timeframe Springs
- Spring on daily + spring on weekly = very strong
- Increases probability significantly
### 4. Failed Signals Are Signals Too
- Failed spring = weakness, expect lower
- Failed UTAD = strength, expect higher
### 5. Context is King
- Don't buy during Phase E Markdown
- Don't sell during Phase E Markup
- Respect the major trend
### 6. Volume Precedes Price
- Study volume changes first
- Price follows volume
- Decreasing volume in range = building energy
### 7. Composite Operator Mindset
- Think like institutions
- Where would smart money buy/sell?
- They need liquidity (retail traders)
---
## RISK MANAGEMENT
### Position Sizing
**Conservative:**
- Risk 1% per trade
- Wider stops at range boundaries
**Moderate:**
- Risk 1-2% per trade
- Stops below spring/above UTAD
**Aggressive:**
- Risk 2-3% per trade
- Tight stops
- Higher win rate needed
### Stop Loss Placement
**Accumulation:**
- Below spring low
- Below trading range bottom
- Below demand zone
**Distribution:**
- Above UTAD high
- Above trading range top
- Above supply zone
### Take Profit Strategy
**Method 1: Measured Move**
- Range height = minimum target
- 2x range height = extended target
**Method 2: Fibonacci Extensions**
- 1.0 = range height
- 1.618 = extended target
- 2.618 = maximum target
**Method 3: Trail the Stop**
- Move stop to breakeven at 1R
- Trail under swing lows in markup
- Lock in profits progressively
---
## BACKTESTING CHECKLIST
Before trading with real money:
- Backtest on 50+ historical examples
- Record all signals in trading journal
- Calculate win rate (aim for >50%)
- Calculate average R:R (aim for >1:2)
- Test on multiple instruments
- Test on multiple timeframes
- Test in different market conditions
- Verify signal consistency
- Practice on demo account
- Start small with real money
---
## RECOMMENDED READING
### Books
1. **"Studies in Tape Reading"** - Richard D. Wyckoff
2. **"The Richard D. Wyckoff Method"** - Rubén Villahermosa
3. **"Charting the Stock Market: The Wyckoff Method"** - Jack Hutson
4. **"Master the Markets"** - Tom Williams (VSA)
### Courses
1. Wyckoff Analytics - Official Wyckoff course
2. TradeVSA - Volume Spread Analysis
3. StockCharts - Wyckoff education
### Communities
1. Wyckoff Analytics Forum
2. Reddit r/Wyckoff
3. TradingView Wyckoff ideas section
---
## FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
**Q: Can I use this on crypto?**
A: Yes, works well on major cryptocurrencies with good volume.
**Q: Does it work on forex?**
A: Yes, but use futures volume (like 6E for EUR/USD) for better accuracy.
**Q: What's the best timeframe?**
A: Daily chart for most traders. 4H for more active trading.
**Q: How long does accumulation last?**
A: Typically 2-12 weeks. Longer accumulation = bigger markup.
**Q: Can I automate this?**
A: You can use the alerts, but manual analysis is recommended.
**Q: What's the win rate?**
A: With proper filtering: 60-70% on major signals (Spring, UTAD, SOS, SOW).
**Q: Should I trade every signal?**
A: No. Focus on Spring, UTAD, SOS, and SOW in trending markets.
**Q: What if I see conflicting signals?**
A: Use higher timeframe for context. When in doubt, stay out.
**Q: How do I know which phase I'm in?**
A: Check the table in top-right corner. Also look at background color.
**Q: Can I use this for options trading?**
A: Yes, excellent for timing option entries (especially around Spring/UTAD).
---
## FINAL THOUGHTS
The Wyckoff Method is:
- **A complete trading system** (not just an indicator)
- **Based on 100+ years** of market wisdom
- **Used by institutions** and professional traders
- **Requires practice** and screen time
- **Highly effective** when applied correctly
**Success Tips:**
1. Start with daily charts
2. Focus on major events (SC, Spring, SOS, BC, UTAD, SOW)
3. Always check higher timeframe context
4. Wait for confirmation before entering
5. Manage risk properly
6. Keep a trading journal
7. Be patient - wait for the best setups
**Remember:**
- Not every range will have all events
- Some phases may be abbreviated
- Context and confluence matter most
- Practice makes perfect
---
## SUPPORT & UPDATES
For questions, improvements, or bug reports:
- Check TradingView script comments
- Join Wyckoff trading communities
- Study historical examples
- Practice on demo accounts
**Good luck and happy trading!**
---
*Disclaimer: This indicator is for educational purposes. Always do your own analysis and risk management. Past performance does not guarantee future results.*
# WYCKOFF VISUAL SETUP EXAMPLES
## ACCUMULATION SCHEMATIC #1 (Classic Bottom)
```
Price Chart View:
│ PHASE E
│ MARKUP
│ ╱
│ ╱
┌─SOS─────┤ ╱
│ │ ╱
┌───────────┤ ┌LPS │╱
│ PHASE B │ │ │
│ (Cause) └──┴──────┤
┌AR──┤ │
┌────┤ │ ┌─Spring │ PHASE D
│ └ST──┤ │ │
│ │ │ │
────SC────────┴─────────┴───────────┴──────────
│
PS
│ PHASE A
│
Downtrend
```
### PHASE A - Stopping the Downtrend
```
PS: │ High volume down bar
▼ First sign of support
■ Not bottom yet
SC: │ VERY HIGH volume
▼ Panic selling exhaustion
█ Long lower wick
█ This is the low
AR: │ Automatic rally
▲ Relief bounce
■ High volume acceptable
ST: │ Secondary test
▼ Low volume (KEY!)
■ Tests SC low
```
### PHASE B - Building the Cause
```
┌─────────┐
│ ~~~ │ Multiple tests
│ ~ ~ │ Volume decreases
│~ ~ │ Range gets tighter
└─────────┘
Duration: 2-12 weeks typical
The longer, the bigger the eventual move
```
### PHASE C - The Test (SPRING)
```
║ False breakdown
─────╨─────
▼ Low volume
█ Breaks below support
■
█ Quick reversal
▲ Closes ABOVE support
CRITICAL: Volume must be LOW
Close must be strong
Happens quickly (1-3 bars)
```
### PHASE D - Strength Emerges
```
SOS: ▲ Sign of Strength
────╥──── Break above resistance
║ High volume
║ Wide spread
LPS: ▼ Last Point Support
■ Pullback on LOW volume
▲ Great entry point
BU: ▲ Backup
■ Final consolidation
▲ Before markup
```
### PHASE E - Markup
```
╱
╱
╱ Strong uptrend
╱ High momentum
╱ Can last months/years
──╱──
```
---
## DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATIC #2 (Classic Top)
```
Price Chart View:
Uptrend
│
PSY
│ PHASE A
────BC────────┬─────────┬───────────┬──────────
│ │ UTAD │
│ PHASE B │ │ PHASE D
┌AR──┤ ┌LPSY │ │
│ │ │ └───────────┤
│ └──┴──────┐ │╲
└ST──┤ │ │ ╲
│ └───────────┤ ╲
└─SOW─────┤ │ ╲
│ │ ╲
│ PHASE C │ ╲
│ │ PHASE E
│ │ MARKDOWN
```
### PHASE A - Stopping the Uptrend
```
PSY: │ High volume up bar
▲ Preliminary supply
■ Selling starting
BC: │ VERY HIGH volume
▲ Buying climax
█ Euphoric top
█ Long upper wick
AR: │ Automatic reaction
▼ Sharp selloff
■ High volume
ST: │ Secondary test
▲ Low volume (KEY!)
■ Tests BC high
```
### PHASE C - The Test (UTAD)
```
▲ False breakout
────╥────
║ Breaks ABOVE resistance
║ Often high volume spike
▼
█ Rejection / weak close
█ Closes BELOW resistance
▼
CRITICAL: Closes weak
Quick rejection
Traps buyers
```
### PHASE D - Weakness Emerges
```
SOW: ▼ Sign of Weakness
────╨──── Break below support
║ High volume
║ Wide spread
LPSY: ▲ Last Point Supply
■ Rally on LOW volume
▼ Last chance to exit
```
---
## VOLUME PATTERNS (Critical to Understanding)
### ACCUMULATION Volume Pattern
```
Volume
│ SC
█
█ ST
■ ■ Spring
■ ■ ■ SOS LPS
──┴────┴────┴──────█───■────►
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │
A A C D D
Pattern: HIGH → low → low → HIGH → low
Key: Volume DECREASES during range
INCREASES on breakout
```
### DISTRIBUTION Volume Pattern
```
Volume
│ BC
█
█ ST
■ ■ UTAD
■ ■ ■ SOW LPSY
──┴────┴────┴──────█───■────►
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │
A A C D D
Pattern: HIGH → low → varies → HIGH → low
Key: Volume MAY increase on UTAD
Definitely HIGH on breakdown (SOW)
```
---
## REAL TRADE SETUPS
### Setup #1: SPRING BUY
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear trading range identified
2. Price breaks BELOW support
3. Volume is LOW (critical!)
4. Price reverses QUICKLY
5. Closes ABOVE support level
Entry: Next bar or on retest
Stop: Below spring low
Target: Top of range (minimum)
Example:
Support: $100
Spring low: $98 (low volume)
Close: $101
Entry: $102
Stop: $97.50
Target: $120 (range top)
Risk/Reward: 1:4
```
### Setup #2: UTAD SELL
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear trading range identified (after uptrend)
2. Price breaks ABOVE resistance
3. Often high volume spike
4. Price reverses QUICKLY
5. Closes BELOW resistance level
Entry: Next bar or on retest
Stop: Above UTAD high
Target: Bottom of range (minimum)
Example:
Resistance: $200
UTAD high: $205 (spike)
Close: $198
Entry: $197
Stop: $206
Target: $180 (range bottom)
Risk/Reward: 1:2
```
### Setup #3: SOS BREAKOUT
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear accumulation range
2. Spring already occurred (ideal)
3. Price breaks ABOVE resistance
4. HIGH volume on breakout
5. Wide spread up bar
Entry Option A: On breakout ($120)
Entry Option B: Wait for LPS pullback ($115)
Stop: Below range or LPS
Target: Range height projected up
Example:
Range: $100-$120 (20 points)
SOS breakout: $120
Entry A: $120
Stop: $115
Target 1: $140 (100%)
Target 2: $150 (150%)
```
---
## VSA SPECIFIC PATTERNS
### Pattern 1: No Demand (Weakness)
```
▲
■ Up bar
■ Low volume ◄── KEY
▲ Small body
Context: After uptrend
Meaning: Buyers exhausted
Action: Prepare to sell
```
### Pattern 2: No Supply (Strength)
```
▼
■ Down bar
■ Low volume ◄── KEY
▼ Small body
Context: After downtrend
Meaning: Sellers exhausted
Action: Prepare to buy
```
### Pattern 3: Stopping Volume
```
═ Very high volume
█ Narrow spread ◄── KEY
═ Price not moving
Context: At extremes
Meaning: Absorption
Action: Expect reversal
```
---
## COMMON MISTAKES (What NOT to Do)
### ❌ Mistake 1: Buying Prematurely
```
WRONG:
SC
▼
█ ← DON'T BUY HERE
CORRECT:
Spring
─────╨─────
▼
█ ← BUY HERE
▲
```
### ❌ Mistake 2: Ignoring Volume
```
WRONG: "It broke below support, must be spring"
─────╨───── High volume
█
This is a BREAKDOWN, not a spring!
CORRECT Spring:
─────╨───── LOW volume ✓
■ Quick reversal ✓
▲
```
### ❌ Mistake 3: Trading Against Trend
```
WRONG:
Markdown Phase E
╲
╲ ← Trying to buy here
╲
╲
CORRECT:
Wait for new accumulation to complete
```
---
## MULTI-TIMEFRAME EXAMPLE
### Weekly Chart: Phase E Markup (Bullish)
```
╱
╱
╱ Long-term uptrend
╱
───╱─────
```
### Daily Chart: Re-Accumulation Phase C
```
┌─────────┐
│ Spring │ ← We are here
│ ▼ │
─────┴────█────┴─────
▲
```
### 4-Hour Chart: Entry Timing
```
Last 48 hours:
─────╨───── Spring occurred
█
▲ ← Enter now
■
```
**Result:** Triple confirmation across timeframes = High probability trade
---
## PROFIT TARGETS (Visual Guide)
### Method 1: Basic Measured Move
```
Resistance: 120 ┐ ─────────
│
│ 20 points
│
Support: 100 ┘ ─────────
Breakout: 120
Target: 120 + 20 = 140
╱╱╱ 140 (Target)
╱╱╱
╱╱╱
──────◄ 120 (Breakout)
│
Range │ 20
│
──────┘ 100
```
### Method 2: Multiple Targets
```
╱╱╱ 150 (Target 3: 2.5x) - 20% position
╱╱╱
╱╱╱ 140 (Target 2: 2x) - 30% position
╱╱╱
─────◄╱ 130 (Target 1: 1x) - 50% position
│
10 │ 120 (Breakout)
│
─────┘ 110 (Support)
```
### Method 3: Trailing Stop
```
1. Move stop to breakeven at Target 1
2. Trail stop under swing lows
3. Let winners run
╱╱╱
╱ ╱╱ ← Trail stop here
╱╱ ╱
╱ ╱ ← Then here
─────◄──╱
← Start here (breakeven)
```
---
## TIMING ENTRIES (Exact Bar Patterns)
### Perfect Spring Entry
```
Bar 1: ▼ Breaks below (Low vol)
█
Bar 2: ▲ Reverses (Closes strong)
█ ◄─ ENTER HERE
Bar 3: ■ Confirms
▲
DON'T WAIT for Bar 3!
Enter on Bar 2 close
```
### Perfect UTAD Entry
```
Bar 1: ▲ Breaks above (Spike vol OK)
█
Bar 2: ▼ Reverses (Closes weak)
█ ◄─ ENTER HERE
Bar 3: ■ Confirms
▼
SHORT on Bar 2 close
Don't wait for more confirmation
```
---
## COMPOSITE OPERATOR PSYCHOLOGY
### What Smart Money Does (Follow Them)
**Accumulation:**
```
1. Create fear (PS, SC)
2. Shake out weak hands (Spring)
3. Absorb supply quietly (Phase B)
4. Test for remaining supply (Test)
5. Mark it up (SOS → Phase E)
💰 They buy LOW when retail panics
```
**Distribution:**
```
1. Create euphoria (PSY, BC)
2. Trap late buyers (UTAD)
3. Distribute to buyers (Phase B)
4. Test for remaining demand (ST)
5. Mark it down (SOW → Phase E)
💰 They sell HIGH when retail buys
```
### Where to Look for Smart Money
```
💰 Buy signals appear at:
- Demand zones (green boxes)
- Springs and shakeouts
- Tests of support
- After selling climax
💰 Sell signals appear at:
- Supply zones (red boxes)
- UTAD and upthrusts
- Weak rallies (LPSY)
- After buying climax
```
---
## PRACTICE EXERCISES
### Exercise 1: Identify the Phase
Look at any chart and ask:
1. Is there a trading range? (Phase B likely)
2. Did we just stop a trend? (Phase A)
3. Was there a spring/UTAD? (Phase C)
4. Is there a breakout? (Phase D)
5. Is trend running? (Phase E)
### Exercise 2: Volume Analysis
For each bar, note:
- Volume level (High/Normal/Low)
- Spread (Wide/Normal/Narrow)
- Effort vs Result (Matching? Diverging?)
### Exercise 3: Find Historical Springs
Go back 6 months:
- Mark all springs you can find
- Note the setup before each
- Track what happened after
- Calculate win rate
---
## FINAL VISUALIZATION: The Complete Cycle
```
ACCUMULATION → MARKUP → DISTRIBUTION → MARKDOWN → ACCUMULATION...
Distribution Accumulation
(Top) (Bottom)
┌───────────────┐ ┌───────────────┐
│ BC UTAD │ │ Spring SC │
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
────┴───┴───┴───────┴─╲ ╱────────┴───┴───┴────
╲ ╱
Markdown ╲ ╱ Markup
(Phase E) ╲ ╱ (Phase E)
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
V
The market cycles endlessly
Your job: Identify where you are in the cycle
Trade accordingly
```
---
**Remember:**
- 📊 Study charts daily
- 📝 Journal every setup
- 🎯 Wait for the best signals
- 💰 Follow smart money
- ⏰ Be patient
- 🚀 Let winners run
**The indicator does the heavy lifting - you make the decisions!**
Bifurcation Zone - CAEBifurcation Zone — Cognitive Adversarial Engine (BZ-CAE)
Bifurcation Zone — CAE (BZ-CAE) is a next-generation divergence detection system enhanced by a Cognitive Adversarial Engine that evaluates both sides of every potential trade before presenting signals. Unlike traditional divergence indicators that show every price-oscillator disagreement regardless of context, BZ-CAE applies comprehensive market-state intelligence to identify only the divergences that occur in favorable conditions with genuine probability edges.
The system identifies structural bifurcation points — critical junctures where price and momentum disagree, signaling potential reversals or continuations — then validates these opportunities through five interconnected intelligence layers: Trend Conviction Scoring , Directional Momentum Alignment , Multi-Factor Exhaustion Modeling , Adversarial Validation , and Confidence Scoring . The result is a selective, context-aware signal system that filters noise and highlights high-probability setups.
This is not a "buy the arrow" indicator. It's a decision support framework that teaches you how to read market state, evaluate divergence quality, and make informed trading decisions based on quantified intelligence rather than hope.
What Sets BZ-CAE Apart: Technical Architecture
The Problem With Traditional Divergence Indicators
Most divergence indicators operate on a simple rule: if price makes a higher high and RSI makes a lower high, show a bearish signal. If price makes a lower low and RSI makes a higher low, show a bullish signal. This creates several critical problems:
Context Blindness : They show counter-trend signals in powerful trends that rarely reverse, leading to repeated losses as you fade momentum.
Signal Spam : Every minor price-oscillator disagreement generates an alert, overwhelming you with low-quality setups and creating analysis paralysis.
No Quality Ranking : All signals are treated identically. A marginal divergence in choppy conditions receives the same visual treatment as a high-conviction setup at a major exhaustion point.
Single-Sided Evaluation : They ask "Is this a good long?" without checking if the short case is overwhelmingly stronger, leading you into obvious bad trades.
Static Configuration : You manually choose RSI 14 or Stochastic 14 and hope it works, with no systematic way to validate if that's optimal for your instrument.
BZ-CAE's Solution: Cognitive Adversarial Intelligence
BZ-CAE solves these problems through an integrated five-layer intelligence architecture:
1. Trend Conviction Score (TCS) — 0 to 1 Scale
Most indicators check if ADX is above 25 to determine "trending" conditions. This binary approach misses nuance. TCS is a weighted composite metric:
Formula : 0.35 × normalize(ADX, 10, 35) + 0.35 × structural_strength + 0.30 × htf_alignment
Structural Strength : 10-bar SMA of consecutive directional bars. Captures persistence — are bulls or bears consistently winning?
HTF Alignment : Multi-timeframe EMA stacking (20/50/100/200). When all EMAs align in the same direction, you're in institutional trend territory.
Purpose : Quantifies how "locked in" the trend is. When TCS exceeds your threshold (default 0.80), the system knows to avoid counter-trend trades unless other factors override.
Interpretation :
TCS > 0.85: Very strong trend — counter-trading is extremely high risk
TCS 0.70-0.85: Strong trend — favor continuation, require exhaustion for reversals
TCS 0.50-0.70: Moderate trend — context matters, both directions viable
TCS < 0.50: Weak/choppy — reversals more viable, range-bound conditions
2. Directional Momentum Alignment (DMA) — ATR-Normalized
Formula : (EMA21 - EMA55) / ATR14
This isn't just "price above EMA" — it's a regime-aware momentum gauge. The same $100 price movement reads completely differently in high-volatility crypto versus low-volatility forex. By normalizing with ATR, DMA adapts its interpretation to current market conditions.
Purpose : Quantifies the directional "force" behind current price action. Positive = bullish push, negative = bearish push. Magnitude = strength.
Interpretation :
DMA > 0.7: Strong bullish momentum — bearish divergences risky
DMA 0.3 to 0.7: Moderate bullish bias
DMA -0.3 to 0.3: Balanced/choppy conditions
DMA -0.7 to -0.3: Moderate bearish bias
DMA < -0.7: Strong bearish momentum — bullish divergences risky
3. Multi-Factor Exhaustion Modeling — 0 to 1 Probability
Single-metric exhaustion detection (like "RSI > 80") misses complex market states. BZ-CAE aggregates five independent exhaustion signals:
Volume Spikes : Current volume versus 50-bar average
2.5x average: 0.25 weight
2.0x average: 0.15 weight
1.5x average: 0.10 weight
Divergence Present : The fact that a divergence exists contributes 0.30 weight — structural momentum disagreement is itself an exhaustion signal.
RSI Extremes : Captures oscillator climax zones
RSI > 80 or < 20: 0.25 weight
RSI > 75 or < 25: 0.15 weight
Pin Bar Detection : Identifies rejection candles (2:1 wick-to-body ratio, indicating failed breakout attempts): 0.15 weight
Extended Runs : Consecutive bars above/below EMA20 without pullback
30+ bars: 0.15 weight (market hasn't paused to consolidate)
Total exhaustion score is the sum of all applicable weights, capped at 1.0.
Purpose : Detects when strong trends become vulnerable to reversal. High exhaustion can override trend filters, allowing counter-trend trades at genuine turning points that basic indicators would miss.
Interpretation :
Exhaustion > 0.75: High probability of climax — yellow background shading alerts you visually
Exhaustion 0.50-0.75: Moderate overextension — watch for confirmation
Exhaustion < 0.50: Fresh move — trend can continue, counter-trend trades higher risk
4. Adversarial Validation — Game Theory Applied to Trading
This is BZ-CAE's signature innovation. Before approving any signal, the engine quantifies BOTH sides of the trade simultaneously:
For Bullish Divergences , it calculates:
Bull Case Score (0-1+) :
Distance below EMA20 (pullback quality): up to 0.25
Bullish EMA alignment (close > EMA20 > EMA50): 0.25
Oversold RSI (< 40): 0.25
Volume confirmation (> 1.2x average): 0.25
Bear Case Score (0-1+) :
Price below EMA50 (structural weakness): 0.30
Very oversold RSI (< 30, indicating knife-catching): 0.20
Differential = Bull Case - Bear Case
If differential < -0.10 (default threshold), the bear case is dominating — signal is BLOCKED or ANNOTATED.
For Bearish Divergences , the logic inverts (Bear Case vs Bull Case).
Purpose : Prevents trades where you're fighting obvious strength in the opposite direction. This is institutional-grade risk management — don't just evaluate your trade, evaluate the counter-trade simultaneously.
Why This Matters : You might see a bullish divergence at a local low, but if price is deeply below major support EMAs with strong bearish momentum, you're catching a falling knife. The adversarial check catches this and blocks the signal.
5. Confidence Scoring — 0 to 1 Quality Assessment
Every signal that passes initial filters receives a comprehensive quality score:
Formula :
0.30 × normalize(TCS) // Trend context
+ 0.25 × normalize(|DMA|) // Momentum magnitude
+ 0.20 × pullback_quality // Entry distance from EMA20
+ 0.15 × state_quality // ADX + alignment + structure
+ 0.10 × divergence_strength // Slope separation magnitude
+ adversarial_bonus (0-0.30) // Your side's advantage
Purpose : Ranks setup quality for filtering and position sizing decisions. You can set a minimum confidence threshold (default 0.35) to ensure only quality setups reach your chart.
Interpretation :
Confidence > 0.70: Premium setup — consider increased position size
Confidence 0.50-0.70: Good quality — standard size
Confidence 0.35-0.50: Acceptable — reduced size or skip if conservative
Confidence < 0.35: Marginal — blocked in Filtering mode, annotated in Advisory mode
CAE Operating Modes: Learning vs Enforcement
Off : Disables all CAE logic. Raw divergence pipeline only. Use for baseline comparison.
Advisory : Shows ALL signals regardless of CAE evaluation, but annotates signals that WOULD be blocked with specific warnings (e.g., "Bull: strong downtrend (TCS=0.87)" or "Adversarial bearish"). This is your learning mode — see CAE's decision logic in action without missing educational opportunities.
Filtering : Actively blocks low-quality signals. Only setups that pass all enabled gates (Trend Filter, Adversarial Validation, Confidence Gating) reach your chart. This is your live trading mode — trust the system to enforce discipline.
CAE Filter Gates: Three-Layer Protection
When CAE is enabled, signals must pass through three independent gates (each can be toggled on/off):
Gate 1: Strong Trend Filter
If TCS ≥ tcs_threshold (default 0.80)
And signal is counter-trend (bullish in downtrend or bearish in uptrend)
And exhaustion < exhaustion_required (default 0.50)
Then: BLOCK signal
Logic: Don't fade strong trends unless the move is clearly overextended
Gate 2: Adversarial Validation
Calculate both bull case and bear case scores
If opposing case dominates by more than adv_threshold (default 0.10)
Then: BLOCK signal
Logic: Avoid trades where you're fighting obvious strength in the opposite direction
Gate 3: Confidence Gating
Calculate composite confidence score (0-1)
If confidence < min_confidence (default 0.35)
Then: In Filtering mode, BLOCK signal; in Advisory mode, ANNOTATE with warning
Logic: Only take setups with minimum quality threshold
All three gates work together. A signal must pass ALL enabled gates to fire.
Visual Intelligence System
Bifurcation Zones (Supply/Demand Blocks)
When a divergence signal fires, BZ-CAE draws a semi-transparent box extending 15 bars forward from the signal pivot:
Demand Zones (Bullish) : Theme-colored box (cyan in Cyberpunk, blue in Professional, etc.) labeled "Demand" — marks where smart money likely placed buy orders as price diverged at the low.
Supply Zones (Bearish) : Theme-colored box (magenta in Cyberpunk, orange in Professional) labeled "Supply" — marks where smart money likely placed sell orders as price diverged at the high.
Theory : Divergences represent institutional disagreement with the crowd. The crowd pushed price to an extreme (new high or low), but momentum (oscillator) is waning, indicating smart money is taking the opposite side. These zones mark order placement areas that become future support/resistance.
Use Cases :
Exit targets: Take profit when price returns to opposite-side zone
Re-entry levels: If price returns to your entry zone, consider adding
Stop placement: Place stops just beyond your zone (below demand, above supply)
Auto-Cleanup : System keeps the last 20 zones to prevent chart clutter.
Adversarial Bar Coloring — Real-Time Market Debate Heatmap
Each bar is colored based on the Bull Case vs Bear Case differential:
Strong Bull Advantage (diff > 0.3): Full theme bull color (e.g., cyan)
Moderate Bull Advantage (diff > 0.1): 50% transparency bull
Neutral (diff -0.1 to 0.1): Gray/neutral theme
Moderate Bear Advantage (diff < -0.1): 50% transparency bear
Strong Bear Advantage (diff < -0.3): Full theme bear color (e.g., magenta)
This creates a real-time visual heatmap showing which side is "winning" the market debate. When bars flip from cyan to magenta (or vice versa), you're witnessing a shift in adversarial advantage — a leading indicator of potential momentum changes.
Exhaustion Shading
When exhaustion score exceeds 0.75, the chart background displays a semi-transparent yellow highlight. This immediate visual warning alerts you that the current move is at high risk of reversal, even if trend indicators remain strong.
Visual Themes — Six Aesthetic Options
Cyberpunk : Cyan/Magenta/Yellow — High contrast, neon aesthetic, excellent for dark-themed trading environments
Professional : Blue/Orange/Green — Corporate color palette, suitable for presentations and professional documentation
Ocean : Teal/Red/Cyan — Aquatic palette, calming for extended monitoring sessions
Fire : Orange/Red/Coral — Warm aggressive colors, high energy
Matrix : Green/Red/Lime — Code aesthetic, homage to classic hacker visuals
Monochrome : White/Gray — Minimal distraction, maximum focus on price action
All visual elements (signal markers, zones, bar colors, dashboard) adapt to your selected theme.
Divergence Engine — Core Detection System
What Are Divergences?
Divergences occur when price action and momentum indicators disagree, creating structural tension that often resolves in a change of direction:
Regular Divergence (Reversal Signal) :
Bearish Regular : Price makes higher high, oscillator makes lower high → Potential trend reversal down
Bullish Regular : Price makes lower low, oscillator makes higher low → Potential trend reversal up
Hidden Divergence (Continuation Signal) :
Bearish Hidden : Price makes lower high, oscillator makes higher high → Downtrend continuation
Bullish Hidden : Price makes higher low, oscillator makes lower low → Uptrend continuation
Both types can be enabled/disabled independently in settings.
Pivot Detection Methods
BZ-CAE uses symmetric pivot detection with separate lookback and lookforward periods (default 5/5):
Pivot High : Bar where high > all highs within lookback range AND high > all highs within lookforward range
Pivot Low : Bar where low < all lows within lookback range AND low < all lows within lookforward range
This ensures structural validity — the pivot must be a clear local extreme, not just a minor wiggle.
Divergence Validation Requirements
For a divergence to be confirmed, it must satisfy:
Slope Disagreement : Price slope and oscillator slope must move in opposite directions (for regular divs) or same direction with inverted highs/lows (for hidden divs)
Minimum Slope Change : |osc_slope| > min_slope_change / 100 (default 1.0) — filters weak, marginal divergences
Maximum Lookback Range : Pivots must be within max_lookback bars (default 60) — prevents ancient, irrelevant divergences
ATR-Normalized Strength : Divergence strength = min(|price_slope| × |osc_slope| × 10, 1.0) — quantifies the magnitude of disagreement in volatility context
Regular divergences receive 1.0× weight; hidden divergences receive 0.8× weight (slightly less reliable historically).
Oscillator Options — Five Professional Indicators
RSI (Relative Strength Index) : Classic overbought/oversold momentum indicator. Best for: General purpose divergence detection across all instruments.
Stochastic : Range-bound %K momentum comparing close to high-low range. Best for: Mean reversion strategies and range-bound markets.
CCI (Commodity Channel Index) : Measures deviation from statistical mean, auto-normalized to 0-100 scale. Best for: Cyclical instruments and commodities.
MFI (Money Flow Index) : Volume-weighted RSI incorporating money flow. Best for: Volume-driven markets like stocks and crypto.
Williams %R : Inverse stochastic looking back over period, auto-adjusted to 0-100. Best for: Reversal detection at extremes.
Each oscillator has adjustable length (2-200, default 14) and smoothing (1-20, default 1). You also set overbought (50-100, default 70) and oversold (0-50, default 30) thresholds.
Signal Timing Modes — Understanding Repainting
BZ-CAE offers two timing policies with complete transparency about repainting behavior:
Realtime (1-bar, peak-anchored)
How It Works :
Detects peaks 1 bar ago using pattern: high > high AND high > high
Signal prints on the NEXT bar after peak detection (bar_index)
Visual marker anchors to the actual PEAK bar (bar_index - 1, offset -1)
Signal locks in when bar CONFIRMS (closes)
Repainting Behavior :
On the FORMING bar (before close), the peak condition may change as new prices arrive
Once bar CLOSES (barstate.isconfirmed), signal is locked permanently
This is preview/early warning behavior by design
Best For :
Active monitoring and immediate alerts
Learning the system (seeing signals develop in real-time)
Responsive entry if you're watching the chart live
Confirmed (lookforward)
How It Works :
Uses Pine Script's built-in ta.pivothigh() and ta.pivotlow() functions
Requires full pivot validation period (lookback + lookforward bars)
Signal prints pivot_lookforward bars after the actual peak (default 5-bar delay)
Visual marker anchors to the actual peak bar (offset -pivot_lookforward)
No Repainting Behavior
Best For :
Backtesting and historical analysis
Conservative entries requiring full confirmation
Automated trading systems
Swing trading with larger timeframes
Tradeoff :
Delayed entry by pivot_lookforward bars (typically 5 bars)
On a 5-minute chart, this is a 25-minute delay
On a 4-hour chart, this is a 20-hour delay
Recommendation : Use Confirmed for backtesting to verify system performance honestly. Use Realtime for live monitoring only if you're actively watching the chart and understand pre-confirmation repainting behavior.
Signal Spacing System — Anti-Spam Architecture
Even after CAE filtering, raw divergences can cluster. The spacing system enforces separation:
Three Independent Filters
1. Min Bars Between ANY Signals (default 12):
Prevents rapid-fire clustering across both directions
If last signal (bull or bear) was within N bars, block new signal
Ensures breathing room between all setups
2. Min Bars Between SAME-SIDE Signals (default 24, optional enforcement):
Prevents bull-bull or bear-bear spam
Separate tracking for bullish and bearish signal timelines
Toggle enforcement on/off
3. Min ATR Distance From Last Signal (default 0, optional):
Requires price to move N × ATR from last signal location
Ensures meaningful price movement between setups
0 = disabled, 0.5-2.0 = typical range for enabled
All three filters work independently. A signal must pass ALL enabled filters to proceed.
Practical Guidance :
Scalping (1-5m) : Any 6-10, Same-side 12-20, ATR 0-0.5
Day Trading (15m-1H) : Any 12, Same-side 24, ATR 0-1.0
Swing Trading (4H-D) : Any 20-30, Same-side 40-60, ATR 1.0-2.0
Dashboard — Real-Time Control Center
The dashboard (toggleable, four corner positions, three sizes) provides comprehensive system intelligence:
Oscillator Section
Current oscillator type and value
State: OVERBOUGHT / OVERSOLD / NEUTRAL (color-coded)
Length parameter
Cognitive Engine Section
TCS (Trend Conviction Score) :
Current value with emoji state indicator
🔥 = Strong trend (>0.75)
📊 = Moderate trend (0.50-0.75)
〰️ = Weak/choppy (<0.50)
Color: Red if above threshold (trend filter active), yellow if moderate, green if weak
DMA (Directional Momentum Alignment) :
Current value with emoji direction indicator
🐂 = Bullish momentum (>0.5)
⚖️ = Balanced (-0.5 to 0.5)
🐻 = Bearish momentum (<-0.5)
Color: Green if bullish, red if bearish
Exhaustion :
Current value with emoji warning indicator
⚠️ = High exhaustion (>0.75)
🟡 = Moderate (0.50-0.75)
✓ = Low (<0.50)
Color: Red if high, yellow if moderate, green if low
Pullback :
Quality of current distance from EMA20
Values >0.6 are ideal entry zones (not too close, not too far)
Bull Case / Bear Case (if Adversarial enabled):
Current scores for both sides of the market debate
Differential with emoji indicator:
📈 = Bull advantage (>0.2)
➡️ = Balanced (-0.2 to 0.2)
📉 = Bear advantage (<-0.2)
Last Signal Metrics Section (New Feature)
When a signal fires, this section captures and displays:
Signal type (BULL or BEAR)
Bars elapsed since signal
Confidence % at time of signal
TCS value at signal time
DMA value at signal time
Purpose : Provides a historical reference for learning. You can see what the market state looked like when the last signal fired, helping you correlate outcomes with conditions.
Statistics Section
Total Signals : Lifetime count across session
Blocked Signals : Count and percentage (filter effectiveness metric)
Bull Signals : Total bullish divergences
Bear Signals : Total bearish divergences
Purpose : System health monitoring. If blocked % is very high (>60%), filters may be too strict. If very low (<10%), filters may be too loose.
Advisory Annotations
When CAE Mode = Advisory, this section displays warnings for signals that would be blocked in Filtering mode:
Examples:
"Bull spacing: wait 8 bars"
"Bear: strong uptrend (TCS=0.87)"
"Adversarial bearish"
"Low confidence 32%"
Multiple warnings can stack, separated by " | ". This teaches you CAE's decision logic transparently.
How to Use BZ-CAE — Complete Workflow
Phase 1: Initial Setup (First Session)
Apply BZ-CAE to your chart
Select your preferred Visual Theme (Cyberpunk recommended for visibility)
Set Signal Timing to "Confirmed (lookforward)" for learning
Choose your Oscillator Type (RSI recommended for general use, length 14)
Set Overbought/Oversold to 70/30 (standard)
Enable both Regular Divergence and Hidden Divergence
Set Pivot Lookback/Lookforward to 5/5 (balanced structure)
Enable CAE Intelligence
Set CAE Mode to "Advisory" (learning mode)
Enable all three CAE filters: Strong Trend Filter , Adversarial Validation , Confidence Gating
Enable Show Dashboard , position Top Right, size Normal
Enable Draw Bifurcation Zones and Adversarial Bar Coloring
Phase 2: Learning Period (Weeks 1-2)
Goal : Understand how CAE evaluates market state and filters signals.
Activities :
Watch the dashboard during signals :
Note TCS values when counter-trend signals fail — this teaches you the trend strength threshold for your instrument
Observe exhaustion patterns at actual turning points — learn when overextension truly matters
Study adversarial differential at signal times — see when opposing cases dominate
Review blocked signals (orange X-crosses):
In Advisory mode, you see everything — signals that would pass AND signals that would be blocked
Check the advisory annotations to understand why CAE would block
Track outcomes: Were the blocks correct? Did those signals fail?
Use Last Signal Metrics :
After each signal, check the dashboard capture of confidence, TCS, and DMA
Journal these values alongside trade outcomes
Identify patterns: Do confidence >0.70 signals work better? Does your instrument respect TCS >0.85?
Understand your instrument's "personality" :
Trending instruments (indices, major forex) may need TCS threshold 0.85-0.90
Choppy instruments (low-cap stocks, exotic pairs) may work best with TCS 0.70-0.75
High-volatility instruments (crypto) may need wider spacing
Low-volatility instruments may need tighter spacing
Phase 3: Calibration (Weeks 3-4)
Goal : Optimize settings for your specific instrument, timeframe, and style.
Calibration Checklist :
Min Confidence Threshold :
Review confidence distribution in your signal journal
Identify the confidence level below which signals consistently fail
Set min_confidence slightly above that level
Day trading : 0.35-0.45
Swing trading : 0.40-0.55
Scalping : 0.30-0.40
TCS Threshold :
Find the TCS level where counter-trend signals consistently get stopped out
Set tcs_threshold at or slightly below that level
Trending instruments : 0.85-0.90
Mixed instruments : 0.80-0.85
Choppy instruments : 0.75-0.80
Exhaustion Override Level :
Identify exhaustion readings that marked genuine reversals
Set exhaustion_required just below the average
Typical range : 0.45-0.55
Adversarial Threshold :
Default 0.10 works for most instruments
If you find CAE is too conservative (blocking good trades), raise to 0.15-0.20
If signals are still getting caught in opposing momentum, lower to 0.07-0.09
Spacing Parameters :
Count bars between quality signals in your journal
Set min bars ANY to ~60% of that average
Set min bars SAME-SIDE to ~120% of that average
Scalping : Any 6-10, Same 12-20
Day trading : Any 12, Same 24
Swing : Any 20-30, Same 40-60
Oscillator Selection :
Try different oscillators for 1-2 weeks each
Track win rate and average winner/loser by oscillator type
RSI : Best for general use, clear OB/OS
Stochastic : Best for range-bound, mean reversion
MFI : Best for volume-driven markets
CCI : Best for cyclical instruments
Williams %R : Best for reversal detection
Phase 4: Live Deployment
Goal : Disciplined execution with proven, calibrated system.
Settings Changes :
Switch CAE Mode from Advisory to Filtering
System now actively blocks low-quality signals
Only setups passing all gates reach your chart
Keep Signal Timing on Confirmed for conservative entries
OR switch to Realtime if you're actively monitoring and want faster entries (accept pre-confirmation repaint risk)
Use your calibrated thresholds from Phase 3
Enable high-confidence alerts: "⭐ High Confidence Bullish/Bearish" (>0.70)
Trading Discipline Rules :
Respect Blocked Signals :
If CAE blocks a trade you wanted to take, TRUST THE SYSTEM
Don't manually override — if you consistently disagree, return to Phase 2/3 calibration
The block exists because market state failed intelligence checks
Confidence-Based Position Sizing :
Confidence >0.70: Standard or increased size (e.g., 1.5-2.0% risk)
Confidence 0.50-0.70: Standard size (e.g., 1.0% risk)
Confidence 0.35-0.50: Reduced size (e.g., 0.5% risk) or skip if conservative
TCS-Based Management :
High TCS + counter-trend signal: Use tight stops, quick exits (you're fading momentum)
Low TCS + reversal signal: Use wider stops, trail aggressively (genuine reversal potential)
Exhaustion Awareness :
Exhaustion >0.75 (yellow shading): Market is overextended, reversal risk is elevated — consider early exit or tighter trailing stops even on winning trades
Exhaustion <0.30: Continuation bias — hold for larger move, wide trailing stops
Adversarial Context :
Strong differential against you (e.g., bullish signal with bear diff <-0.2): Use very tight stops, consider skipping
Strong differential with you (e.g., bullish signal with bull diff >0.2): Trail aggressively, this is your tailwind
Practical Settings by Timeframe & Style
Scalping (1-5 Minute Charts)
Objective : High frequency, tight stops, quick reversals in fast-moving markets.
Oscillator :
Type: RSI or Stochastic (fast response to quick moves)
Length: 9-11 (more responsive than standard 14)
Smoothing: 1 (no lag)
OB/OS: 65/35 (looser thresholds ensure frequent crossings in fast conditions)
Divergence :
Pivot Lookback/Lookforward: 3/3 (tight structure, catch small swings)
Max Lookback: 40-50 bars (recent structure only)
Min Slope Change: 0.8-1.0 (don't be overly strict)
CAE :
Mode: Advisory first (learn), then Filtering
Min Confidence: 0.30-0.35 (lower bar for speed, accept more signals)
TCS Threshold: 0.70-0.75 (allow more counter-trend opportunities)
Exhaustion Required: 0.45-0.50 (moderate override)
Strong Trend Filter: ON (still respect major intraday trends)
Adversarial: ON (critical for scalping protection — catches bad entries quickly)
Spacing :
Min Bars ANY: 6-10 (fast pace, many setups)
Min Bars SAME-SIDE: 12-20 (prevent clustering)
Min ATR Distance: 0 or 0.5 (loose)
Timing : Realtime (speed over precision, but understand repaint risk)
Visuals :
Signal Size: Tiny (chart clarity in busy conditions)
Show Zones: Optional (can clutter on low timeframes)
Bar Coloring: ON (helps read momentum shifts quickly)
Dashboard: Small size (corner reference, not main focus)
Key Consideration : Scalping generates noise. Even with CAE, expect lower win rate (45-55%) but aim for favorable R:R (2:1 or better). Size conservatively.
Day Trading (15-Minute to 1-Hour Charts)
Objective : Balance quality and frequency. Standard divergence trading approach.
Oscillator :
Type: RSI or MFI (proven reliability, volume confirmation with MFI)
Length: 14 (industry standard, well-studied)
Smoothing: 1-2
OB/OS: 70/30 (classic levels)
Divergence :
Pivot Lookback/Lookforward: 5/5 (balanced structure)
Max Lookback: 60 bars
Min Slope Change: 1.0 (standard strictness)
CAE :
Mode: Filtering (enforce discipline from the start after brief Advisory learning)
Min Confidence: 0.35-0.45 (quality filter without being too restrictive)
TCS Threshold: 0.80-0.85 (respect strong trends)
Exhaustion Required: 0.50 (balanced override threshold)
Strong Trend Filter: ON
Adversarial: ON
Confidence Gating: ON (all three filters active)
Spacing :
Min Bars ANY: 12 (breathing room between all setups)
Min Bars SAME-SIDE: 24 (prevent bull/bear clusters)
Min ATR Distance: 0-1.0 (optional refinement, typically 0.5-1.0)
Timing : Confirmed (1-bar delay for reliability, no repainting)
Visuals :
Signal Size: Tiny or Small
Show Zones: ON (useful reference for exits/re-entries)
Bar Coloring: ON (context awareness)
Dashboard: Normal size (full visibility)
Key Consideration : This is the "sweet spot" timeframe for BZ-CAE. Market structure is clear, CAE has sufficient data, and signal frequency is manageable. Expect 55-65% win rate with proper execution.
Swing Trading (4-Hour to Daily Charts)
Objective : Quality over quantity. High conviction only. Larger stops and targets.
Oscillator :
Type: RSI or CCI (robust on higher timeframes, smooth longer waves)
Length: 14-21 (capture larger momentum swings)
Smoothing: 1-3
OB/OS: 70/30 or 75/25 (strict extremes)
Divergence :
Pivot Lookback/Lookforward: 5/5 or 7/7 (structural purity, major swings only)
Max Lookback: 80-100 bars (broader historical context)
Min Slope Change: 1.2-1.5 (require strong, undeniable divergence)
CAE :
Mode: Filtering (strict enforcement, premium setups only)
Min Confidence: 0.40-0.55 (high bar for entry)
TCS Threshold: 0.85-0.95 (very strong trend protection — don't fade established HTF trends)
Exhaustion Required: 0.50-0.60 (higher bar for override — only extreme exhaustion justifies counter-trend)
Strong Trend Filter: ON (critical on HTF)
Adversarial: ON (avoid obvious bad trades)
Confidence Gating: ON (quality gate essential)
Spacing :
Min Bars ANY: 20-30 (substantial separation)
Min Bars SAME-SIDE: 40-60 (significant breathing room)
Min ATR Distance: 1.0-2.0 (require meaningful price movement)
Timing : Confirmed (purity over speed, zero repaint for swing accuracy)
Visuals :
Signal Size: Small or Normal (clear markers on zoomed-out view)
Show Zones: ON (important HTF levels)
Bar Coloring: ON (long-term trend awareness)
Dashboard: Normal or Large (comprehensive analysis)
Key Consideration : Swing signals are rare but powerful. Expect 2-5 signals per month per instrument. Win rate should be 60-70%+ due to stringent filtering. Position size can be larger given confidence.
Dashboard Interpretation Reference
TCS (Trend Conviction Score) States
0.00-0.50: Weak/Choppy
Emoji: 〰️
Color: Green/cyan
Meaning: No established trend. Range-bound or consolidating. Both reversal and continuation signals viable.
Action: Reversals (regular divs) are safer. Use wider profit targets (market has room to move). Consider mean reversion strategies.
0.50-0.75: Moderate Trend
Emoji: 📊
Color: Yellow/neutral
Meaning: Developing trend but not locked in. Context matters significantly.
Action: Check DMA and exhaustion. If DMA confirms trend and exhaustion is low, favor continuation (hidden divs). If exhaustion is high, reversals are viable.
0.75-0.85: Strong Trend
Emoji: 🔥
Color: Orange/warning
Meaning: Well-established trend with persistence. Counter-trend is high risk.
Action: Require exhaustion >0.50 for counter-trend entries. Favor continuation signals. Use tight stops on counter-trend attempts.
0.85-1.00: Very Strong Trend
Emoji: 🔥🔥
Color: Red/danger (if counter-trading)
Meaning: Locked-in institutional trend. Extremely high risk to fade.
Action: Avoid counter-trend unless exhaustion >0.75 (yellow shading). Focus exclusively on continuation opportunities. Momentum is king here.
DMA (Directional Momentum Alignment) Zones
-2.0 to -1.0: Strong Bearish Momentum
Emoji: 🐻🐻
Color: Dark red
Meaning: Powerful downside force. Sellers are in control.
Action: Bullish divergences are counter-momentum (high risk). Bearish divergences are with-momentum (lower risk). Size down on longs.
-0.5 to 0.5: Neutral/Balanced
Emoji: ⚖️
Color: Gray/neutral
Meaning: No strong directional bias. Choppy or consolidating.
Action: Both directions have similar probability. Focus on confidence score and adversarial differential for edge.
1.0 to 2.0: Strong Bullish Momentum
Emoji: 🐂🐂
Color: Bright green/cyan
Meaning: Powerful upside force. Buyers are in control.
Action: Bearish divergences are counter-momentum (high risk). Bullish divergences are with-momentum (lower risk). Size down on shorts.
Exhaustion States
0.00-0.50: Fresh Move
Emoji: ✓
Color: Green
Meaning: Trend is healthy, not overextended. Room to run.
Action: Counter-trend trades are premature. Favor continuation. Hold winners for larger moves. Avoid early exits.
0.50-0.75: Mature Move
Emoji: 🟡
Color: Yellow
Meaning: Move is aging. Watch for signs of climax.
Action: Tighten trailing stops on winning trades. Be ready for reversals. Don't add to positions aggressively.
0.75-0.85: High Exhaustion
Emoji: ⚠️
Color: Orange
Background: Yellow shading appears
Meaning: Move is overextended. Reversal risk elevated significantly.
Action: Counter-trend reversals are higher probability. Consider early exits on with-trend positions. Size up on reversal divergences (if CAE allows).
0.85-1.00: Critical Exhaustion
Emoji: ⚠️⚠️
Color: Red
Background: Yellow shading intensifies
Meaning: Climax conditions. Reversal imminent or underway.
Action: Aggressive reversal trades justified. Exit all with-trend positions. This is where major turns occur.
Confidence Score Tiers
0.00-0.30: Low Quality
Color: Red
Status: Blocked in Filtering mode
Action: Skip entirely. Setup lacks fundamental quality across multiple factors.
0.30-0.50: Moderate Quality
Color: Yellow/orange
Status: Marginal — passes in Filtering only if >min_confidence
Action: Reduced position size (0.5-0.75% risk). Tight stops. Conservative profit targets. Skip if you're selective.
0.50-0.70: High Quality
Color: Green/cyan
Status: Good setup across most quality factors
Action: Standard position size (1.0-1.5% risk). Normal stops and targets. This is your bread-and-butter trade.
0.70-1.00: Premium Quality
Color: Bright green/gold
Status: Exceptional setup — all factors aligned
Visual: Double confidence ring appears
Action: Consider increased position size (1.5-2.0% risk, maximum). Wider stops. Larger targets. High probability of success. These are rare — capitalize when they appear.
Adversarial Differential Interpretation
Bull Differential > 0.3 :
Visual: Strong cyan/green bar colors
Meaning: Bull case strongly dominates. Buyers have clear advantage.
Action: Bullish divergences favored (with-advantage). Bearish divergences face headwind (reduce size or skip). Momentum is bullish.
Bull Differential 0.1 to 0.3 :
Visual: Moderate cyan/green transparency
Meaning: Moderate bull advantage. Buyers have edge but not overwhelming.
Action: Both directions viable. Slight bias toward longs.
Differential -0.1 to 0.1 :
Visual: Gray/neutral bars
Meaning: Balanced debate. No clear advantage either side.
Action: Rely on other factors (confidence, TCS, exhaustion) for direction. Adversarial is neutral.
Bear Differential -0.3 to -0.1 :
Visual: Moderate red/magenta transparency
Meaning: Moderate bear advantage. Sellers have edge but not overwhelming.
Action: Both directions viable. Slight bias toward shorts.
Bear Differential < -0.3 :
Visual: Strong red/magenta bar colors
Meaning: Bear case strongly dominates. Sellers have clear advantage.
Action: Bearish divergences favored (with-advantage). Bullish divergences face headwind (reduce size or skip). Momentum is bearish.
Last Signal Metrics — Post-Trade Analysis
After a signal fires, dashboard captures:
Type : BULL or BEAR
Bars Ago : How long since signal (updates every bar)
Confidence : What was the quality score at signal time
TCS : What was trend conviction at signal time
DMA : What was momentum alignment at signal time
Use Case : Post-trade journaling and learning.
Example: "BULL signal 12 bars ago. Confidence: 68%, TCS: 0.42, DMA: -0.85"
Analysis : This was a bullish reversal (regular div) with good confidence, weak trend (TCS), but strong bearish momentum (DMA). The bet was that momentum would reverse — a counter-momentum play requiring exhaustion confirmation. Check if exhaustion was high at that time to justify the entry.
Track patterns:
Do your best trades have confidence >0.65?
Do low-TCS signals (<0.50) work better for you?
Are you more successful with-momentum (DMA aligned with signal) or counter-momentum?
Troubleshooting Guide
Problem: No Signals Appearing
Symptoms : Chart loads, dashboard shows metrics, but no divergence signals fire.
Diagnosis Checklist :
Check dashboard oscillator value : Is it crossing OB/OS levels (70/30)? If oscillator stays in 40-60 range constantly, it can't reach extremes needed for divergence detection.
Are pivots forming? : Look for local swing highs/lows on your chart. If price is in tight consolidation, pivots may not meet lookback/lookforward requirements.
Is spacing too tight? : Check "Last Signal" metrics — how many bars since last signal? If <12 and your min_bars_ANY is 12, spacing filter is blocking.
Is CAE blocking everything? : Check dashboard Statistics section — what's the blocked signal count? High blocks indicate overly strict filters.
Solutions :
Loosen OB/OS Temporarily :
Try 65/35 to verify divergence detection works
If signals appear, the issue was threshold strictness
Gradually tighten back to 67/33, then 70/30 as appropriate
Lower Min Confidence :
Try 0.25-0.30 (diagnostic level)
If signals appear, filter was too strict
Raise gradually to find sweet spot (0.35-0.45 typical)
Disable Strong Trend Filter Temporarily :
Turn off in CAE settings
If signals appear, TCS threshold was blocking everything
Re-enable and lower TCS_threshold to 0.70-0.75
Reduce Min Slope Change :
Try 0.7-0.8 (from default 1.0)
Allows weaker divergences through
Helpful on low-volatility instruments
Widen Spacing :
Set min_bars_ANY to 6-8
Set min_bars_SAME_SIDE to 12-16
Reduces time between allowed signals
Check Timing Mode :
If using Confirmed, remember there's a pivot_lookforward delay (5+ bars)
Switch to Realtime temporarily to verify system is working
Realtime has no delay but repaints
Verify Oscillator Settings :
Length 14 is standard but might not fit all instruments
Try length 9-11 for faster response
Try length 18-21 for slower, smoother response
Problem: Too Many Signals (Signal Spam)
Symptoms : Dashboard shows 50+ signals in Statistics, confidence scores mostly <0.40, signals clustering close together.
Solutions :
Raise Min Confidence :
Try 0.40-0.50 (quality filter)
Blocks bottom-tier setups
Targets top 50-60% of divergences only
Tighten OB/OS :
Use 70/30 or 75/25
Requires more extreme oscillator readings
Reduces false divergences in mid-range
Increase Min Slope Change :
Try 1.2-1.5 (from default 1.0)
Requires stronger, more obvious divergences
Filters marginal slope disagreements
Raise TCS Threshold :
Try 0.85-0.90 (from default 0.80)
Stricter trend filter blocks more counter-trend attempts
Favors only strongest trend alignment
Enable ALL CAE Gates :
Turn on Trend Filter + Adversarial + Confidence
Triple-layer protection
Blocks aggressively — expect 20-40% reduction in signals
Widen Spacing :
min_bars_ANY: 15-20 (from 12)
min_bars_SAME_SIDE: 30-40 (from 24)
Creates substantial breathing room
Switch to Confirmed Timing :
Removes realtime preview noise
Ensures full pivot validation
5-bar delay filters many false starts
Problem: Signals in Strong Trends Get Stopped Out
Symptoms : You take a bullish divergence in a downtrend (or bearish in uptrend), and it immediately fails. Dashboard showed high TCS at the time.
Analysis : This is INTENDED behavior — CAE is protecting you from low-probability counter-trend trades.
Understanding :
Check Last Signal Metrics in dashboard — what was TCS when signal fired?
If TCS was >0.85 and signal was counter-trend, CAE correctly identified it as high risk
Strong trends rarely reverse cleanly without major exhaustion
Your losses here are the system working as designed (blocking bad odds)
If You Want to Override (Not Recommended) :
Lower TCS_threshold to 0.70-0.75 (allows more counter-trend)
Lower exhaustion_required to 0.40 (easier override)
Disable Strong Trend Filter entirely (very risky)
Better Approach :
TRUST THE FILTER — it's preventing costly mistakes
Wait for exhaustion >0.75 (yellow shading) before counter-trending strong TCS
Focus on continuation signals (hidden divs) in high-TCS environments
Use Advisory mode to see what CAE is blocking and learn from outcomes
Problem: Adversarial Blocking Seems Wrong
Symptoms : You see a divergence that "looks good" visually, but CAE blocks with "Adversarial bearish/bullish" warning.
Diagnosis :
Check dashboard Bull Case and Bear Case scores at that moment
Look at Differential value
Check adversarial bar colors — was there strong coloring against your intended direction?
Understanding :
Adversarial catches "obvious" opposing momentum that's easy to miss
Example: Bullish divergence at a local low, BUT price is deeply below EMA50, bearish momentum is strong, and RSI shows knife-catching conditions
Bull Case might be 0.20 while Bear Case is 0.55
Differential = -0.35, far beyond threshold
Block is CORRECT — you'd be fighting overwhelming opposing flow
If You Disagree Consistently
Review blocked signals on chart — scroll back and check outcomes
Did those blocked signals actually work, or did they fail as adversarial predicted?
Raise adv_threshold to 0.15-0.20 (more permissive, allows closer battles)
Disable Adversarial Validation temporarily (diagnostic) to isolate its effect
Use Advisory mode to learn adversarial patterns over 50-100 signals
Remember : Adversarial is conservative BY DESIGN. It prevents "obvious" bad trades where you're fighting strong strength the other way.
Problem: Dashboard Not Showing or Incomplete
Solutions :
Toggle "Show Dashboard" to ON in settings
Try different dashboard sizes (Small/Normal/Large)
Try different positions (Top Left/Right, Bottom Left/Right) — might be off-screen
Some sections require CAE Enable = ON (Cognitive Engine section won't appear if CAE is disabled)
Statistics section requires at least 1 lifetime signal to populate
Check that visual theme is set (dashboard colors adapt to theme)
Problem: Performance Lag, Chart Freezing
Symptoms : Chart loading is slow, indicator calculations cause delays, pinch-to-zoom lags.
Diagnosis : Visual features are computationally expensive, especially adversarial bar coloring (recalculates every bar).
Solutions (In Order of Impact) :
Disable Adversarial Bar Coloring (MOST EXPENSIVE):
Turn OFF "Adversarial Bar Coloring" in settings
This is the single biggest performance drain
Immediate improvement
Reduce Vertical Lines :
Lower "Keep last N vertical lines" to 20-30
Or set to 0 to disable entirely
Moderate improvement
Disable Bifurcation Zones :
Turn OFF "Draw Bifurcation Zones"
Reduces box drawing calculations
Moderate improvement
Set Dashboard Size to Small :
Smaller dashboard = fewer cells = less rendering
Minor improvement
Use Shorter Max Lookback :
Reduce max_lookback to 40-50 (from 60+)
Fewer bars to scan for divergences
Minor improvement
Disable Exhaustion Shading :
Turn OFF "Show Market State"
Removes background coloring calculations
Minor improvement
Extreme Performance Mode :
Disable ALL visual enhancements
Keep only triangle markers
Dashboard Small or OFF
Use Minimal theme if available
Problem: Realtime Signals Repainting
Symptoms : You see a signal appear, but on next bar it disappears or moves.
Explanation :
Realtime mode detects peaks 1 bar ago: high > high AND high > high
On the FORMING bar (before close), this condition can change as new prices arrive
Example: At 10:05, high (10:04 bar) was 100, current high is 99 → peak detected
At 10:05:30, new high of 101 arrives → peak condition breaks → signal disappears
At 10:06 (bar close), final high is 101 → no peak at 10:04 anymore → signal gone permanently
This is expected behavior for realtime responsiveness. You get preview/early warning, but it's not locked until bar confirms.
Solutions :
Use Confirmed Timing :
Switch to "Confirmed (lookforward)" mode
ZERO repainting — pivot must be fully validated
5-bar delay (pivot_lookforward)
What you see in history is exactly what would have appeared live
Accept Realtime Repaint as Tradeoff :
Keep Realtime mode for speed and alerts
Understand that pre-confirmation signals may vanish
Only trade signals that CONFIRM at bar close (check barstate.isconfirmed)
Use for live monitoring, NOT for backtesting
Trade Only After Confirmation :
In Realtime mode, wait 1 full bar after signal appears before entering
If signal survives that bar close, it's locked
This adds 1-bar delay but removes repaint risk
Recommendation : Use Confirmed for backtesting and conservative trading. Use Realtime only for active monitoring with full understanding of preview behavior.
Risk Management Integration
BZ-CAE is a signal generation system, not a complete trading strategy. You must integrate proper risk management:
Position Sizing by Confidence
Confidence 0.70-1.00 (Premium) :
Risk: 1.5-2.0% of account (MAXIMUM)
Reasoning: High-quality setup across all factors
Still cap at 2% — even premium setups can fail
Confidence 0.50-0.70 (High Quality) :
Risk: 1.0-1.5% of account
Reasoning: Standard good setup
Your bread-and-butter risk level
Confidence 0.35-0.50 (Moderate Quality) :
Risk: 0.5-1.0% of account
Reasoning: Marginal setup, passes minimum threshold
Reduce size or skip if you're selective
Confidence <0.35 (Low Quality) :
Risk: 0% (blocked in Filtering mode)
Reasoning: Insufficient quality factors
System protects you by not showing these
Stop Placement Strategies
For Reversal Signals (Regular Divergences) :
Place stop beyond the divergence pivot plus buffer
Bullish : Stop below the divergence low - 1.0-1.5 × ATR
Bearish : Stop above the divergence high + 1.0-1.5 × ATR
Reasoning: If price breaks the pivot, divergence structure is invalidated
For Continuation Signals (Hidden Divergences) :
Place stop beyond recent swing in opposite direction
Bullish continuation : Stop below recent swing low (not the divergence pivot itself)
Bearish continuation : Stop above recent swing high
Reasoning: You're trading with trend, allow more breathing room
ATR-Based Stops :
1.5-2.0 × ATR is standard
Scale by timeframe:
Scalping (1-5m): 1.0-1.5 × ATR (tight)
Day trading (15m-1H): 1.5-2.0 × ATR (balanced)
Swing (4H-D): 2.0-3.0 × ATR (wide)
Never Use Fixed Dollar/Pip Stops :
Markets have different volatility
50-pip stop on EUR/USD ≠ 50-pip stop on GBP/JPY
Always normalize by ATR or pivot structure
Profit Targets and Scaling
Primary Target :
2-3 × ATR from entry (minimum 2:1 reward-risk)
Example : Entry at 100, ATR = 2, stop at 97 (1.5 × ATR) → target at 106 (3 × ATR) = 2:1 R:R
Scaling Out Strategy :
Take 50% off at 1.5 × ATR (secure partial profit)
Move stop to breakeven
Trail remaining 50% with 1.0 × ATR trailing stop
Let winners run if trend persists
Targets by Confidence :
High Confidence (>0.70) : Aggressive targets (3-4 × ATR), trail wider (1.5 × ATR)
Standard Confidence (0.50-0.70) : Normal targets (2-3 × ATR), standard trail (1.0 × ATR)
Low Confidence (0.35-0.50) : Conservative targets (1.5-2 × ATR), tight trail (0.75 × ATR)
Use Bifurcation Zones :
If opposite-side zone is visible on chart (from previous signal), use it as target
Example : Bullish signal at 100, prior supply zone at 110 → use 110 as target
Zones mark institutional resistance/support
Exhaustion-Based Exits :
If you're in a trade and exhaustion >0.75 develops (yellow shading), consider early exit
Market is overextended — reversal risk is high
Take profit even if target not reached
Trade Management by TCS
High TCS + Counter-Trend Trade (Risky) :
Use very tight stops (1.0-1.5 × ATR)
Conservative targets (1.5-2 × ATR)
Quick exit if trade doesn't work immediately
You're fading momentum — respect it
Low TCS + Reversal Trade (Safer) :
Use wider stops (2.0-2.5 × ATR)
Aggressive targets (3-4 × ATR)
Trail with patience
Genuine reversal potential in weak trend
High TCS + Continuation Trade (Safest) :
Standard stops (1.5-2.0 × ATR)
Very aggressive targets (4-5 × ATR)
Trail wide (1.5-2.0 × ATR)
You're with institutional momentum — let it run
Educational Value — Learning Machine Intelligence
BZ-CAE is designed as a learning platform, not just a tool:
Advisory Mode as Teacher
Most indicators are binary: signal or no signal. You don't learn WHY certain setups are better.
BZ-CAE's Advisory mode shows you EVERY potential divergence, then annotates the ones that would be blocked in Filtering mode with specific reasons:
"Bull: strong downtrend (TCS=0.87)" teaches you that TCS >0.85 makes counter-trend very risky
"Adversarial bearish" teaches you that the opposing case was dominating
"Low confidence 32%" teaches you that the setup lacked quality across multiple factors
"Bull spacing: wait 8 bars" teaches you that signals need breathing room
After 50-100 signals in Advisory mode, you internalize the CAE's decision logic. You start seeing these factors yourself BEFORE the indicator does.
Dashboard Transparency
Most "intelligent" indicators are black boxes — you don't know how they make decisions.
BZ-CAE shows you ALL metrics in real-time:
TCS tells you trend strength
DMA tells you momentum alignment
Exhaustion tells you overextension
Adversarial shows both sides of the debate
Confidence shows composite quality
You learn to interpret market state holistically, a skill applicable to ANY trading system beyond this indicator.
Divergence Quality Education
Not all divergences are equal. BZ-CAE teaches you which conditions produce high-probability setups:
Quality divergence : Regular bullish div at a low, TCS <0.50 (weak trend), exhaustion >0.75 (overextended), positive adversarial differential, confidence >0.70
Low-quality divergence : Regular bearish div at a high, TCS >0.85 (strong uptrend), exhaustion <0.30 (not overextended), negative adversarial differential, confidence <0.40
After using the system, you can evaluate divergences manually with similar intelligence.
Risk Management Discipline
Confidence-based position sizing teaches you to adjust risk based on setup quality, not emotions:
Beginners often size all trades identically
Or worse, size UP on marginal setups to "make up" for losses
BZ-CAE forces systematic sizing: premium setups get larger size, marginal setups get smaller size
This creates a probabilistic approach where your edge compounds over time.
What This Indicator Is NOT
Complete transparency about limitations and positioning:
Not a Prediction System
BZ-CAE does not predict future prices. It identifies structural divergences (price-momentum disagreements) and assesses current market state (trend, exhaustion, adversarial conditions). It tells you WHEN conditions favor a potential reversal or continuation, not WHAT WILL HAPPEN.
Markets are probabilistic. Even premium-confidence setups fail ~30-40% of the time. The system improves your probability distribution over many trades — it doesn't eliminate risk.
Not Fully Automated
This is a decision support tool, not a trading robot. You must:
Execute trades manually based on signals
Manage positions (stops, targets, trailing)
Apply discretionary judgment (news events, liquidity, context)
Integrate with your broader strategy and risk rules
The confidence scores guide position sizing, but YOU determine final risk allocation based on your account size, risk tolerance, and portfolio context.
Not Beginner-Friendly
BZ-CAE requires understanding of:
Divergence trading concepts (regular vs hidden, reversal vs continuation)
Market state interpretation (trend vs range, momentum, exhaustion)
Basic technical analysis (pivots, support/resistance, EMAs)
Risk management fundamentals (position sizing, stops, R:R)
This is designed for intermediate to advanced traders willing to invest time learning the system. If you want "buy the arrow" simplicity, this isn't the tool.
Not a Holy Grail
There is no perfect indicator. BZ-CAE filters noise and improves signal quality significantly, but:
Losing trades are inevitable (even at 70% win rate, 30% still fail)
Market conditions change rapidly (yesterday's strong trend becomes today's chop)
Black swan events occur (fundamentals override technicals)
Execution matters (slippage, fees, emotional discipline)
The system provides an EDGE, not a guarantee. Your job is to execute that edge consistently with proper risk management over hundreds of trades.
Not Financial Advice
BZ-CAE is an educational and analytical tool. All trading decisions are your responsibility. Past performance (backtested or live) does not guarantee future results. Only risk capital you can afford to lose. Consult a licensed financial advisor for investment advice specific to your situation.
Ideal Market Conditions
Best Performance Characteristics
Liquid Instruments :
Major forex pairs (EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY)
Large-cap stocks and index ETFs (SPY, QQQ, AAPL, MSFT)
High-volume crypto (BTC, ETH)
Major commodities (Gold, Oil, Natural Gas)
Reasoning: Clean price structure, clear pivots, meaningful oscillator behavior
Trending with Consolidations :
Markets that trend for 20-40 bars, then consolidate 10-20 bars, repeat
Creates divergences at consolidation boundaries (reversals) and within trends (continuations)
Both regular and hidden divs find opportunities
5-Minute to Daily Timeframes :
Below 5m: too much noise, false pivots, CAE metrics unstable
Above daily: too few signals, edge diminishes (fundamentals dominate)
Sweet spot: 15m to 4H for most traders
Consistent Volume and Participation :
Regular trading sessions (not holidays or thin markets)
Predictable volatility patterns
Avoid instruments with sudden gaps or circuit breakers
Challenging Conditions
Extremely Low Liquidity :
Penny stocks, exotic forex pairs, low-volume crypto
Erratic pivots, unreliable oscillator readings
CAE metrics can't assess market state properly
Very Low Timeframes (1-Minute or Below) :
Dominated by market microstructure noise
Divergences are everywhere but meaningless
CAE filtering helps but still unreliable
Extended Sideways Consolidation :
100+ bars of tight range with no clear pivots
Oscillator hugs midpoint (45-55 range)
No divergences to detect
Fundamentally-Driven Gap Markets :
Earnings releases, economic data, geopolitical events
Price gaps over stops and targets
Technical structure breaks down
Recommendation: Disable trading around known events
Calculation Methodology — Technical Depth
For users who want to understand the math:
Oscillator Computation
Each oscillator type calculates differently, but all normalize to 0-100:
RSI : ta.rsi(close, length) — Standard Relative Strength Index
Stochastic : ta.stoch(high, low, close, length) — %K calculation
CCI : (ta.cci(hlc3, length) + 100) / 2 — Normalized from -100/+100 to 0-100
MFI : ta.mfi(hlc3, length) — Volume-weighted RSI equivalent
Williams %R : ta.wpr(length) + 100 — Inverted stochastic adjusted to 0-100
Smoothing: If smoothing > 1, apply ta.sma(oscillator, smoothing)
Divergence Detection Algorithm
Identify Pivots :
Price high pivot: ta.pivothigh(high, lookback, lookforward)
Price low pivot: ta.pivotlow(low, lookback, lookforward)
Oscillator high pivot: ta.pivothigh(osc, lookback, lookforward)
Oscillator low pivot: ta.pivotlow(osc, lookback, lookforward)
Store Recent Pivots :
Maintain arrays of last 10 pivots with bar indices
When new pivot confirmed, unshift to array, pop oldest if >10
Scan for Slope Disagreements :
Loop through last 5 pivots
For each pair (current pivot, historical pivot):
Check if within max_lookback bars
Calculate slopes: (current - historical) / bars_between
Regular bearish: price_slope > 0, osc_slope < 0, |osc_slope| > min_threshold
Regular bullish: price_slope < 0, osc_slope > 0, |osc_slope| > min_threshold
Hidden bearish: price_slope < 0, osc_slope > 0, osc_slope > min_threshold
Hidden bullish: price_slope > 0, osc_slope < 0, |osc_slope| > min_threshold
Important Disclaimers and Terms
Performance Disclosure
Past performance, whether backtested or live-traded, does not guarantee future results. Markets change. What works today may not work tomorrow. Hypothetical or simulated performance results have inherent limitations and do not represent actual trading.
Risk of Loss
Trading involves substantial risk of loss. Only trade with risk capital you can afford to lose entirely. The high degree of leverage often available in trading can work against you as well as for you. Leveraged trading may result in losses exceeding your initial deposit.
Not Financial Advice
BZ-CAE is an educational and analytical tool for technical analysis. It is not financial advice, investment advice, or a recommendation to buy or sell any security or instrument. All trading decisions are your sole responsibility. Consult a licensed financial advisor for advice specific to your circumstances.
Technical Indicator Limitations
BZ-CAE is a technical analysis tool based on price and volume data. It does not account for:
Fundamental analysis (earnings, economic data, financial health)
Market sentiment and positioning
Geopolitical events and news
Liquidity conditions and market microstructure changes
Regulatory changes or exchange rules
Integrate with broader analysis and strategy. Do not rely solely on technical indicators for trading decisions.
Repainting Acknowledgment
As disclosed throughout this documentation:
Realtime mode may repaint on forming bars before confirmation (by design for preview functionality)
Confirmed mode has zero repainting (fully validated pivots only)
Choose timing mode appropriate for your use case. Understand the tradeoffs.
Testing Recommendation
ALWAYS test on demo/paper accounts before committing real capital. Validate the indicator's behavior on your specific instruments and timeframes. Learn the system thoroughly in Advisory mode before using Filtering mode.
Learning Resources :
In-indicator tooltips (hover over setting names for detailed explanations)
This comprehensive publishing statement (save for reference)
User guide in script comments (top of code)
Final Word — Philosophy of BZ-CAE
BZ-CAE is not designed to replace your judgment — it's designed to enhance it.
The indicator identifies structural inflection points (bifurcations) where price and momentum disagree. The Cognitive Engine evaluates market state to determine if this disagreement is meaningful or noise. The Adversarial model debates both sides of the trade to catch obvious bad setups. The Confidence system ranks quality so you can choose your risk appetite.
But YOU still execute. YOU still manage risk. YOU still learn from outcomes.
This is intelligence amplification, not intelligence replacement.
Use Advisory mode to learn how expert traders evaluate market state. Use Filtering mode to enforce discipline when emotions run high. Use the dashboard to develop a systematic approach to reading markets. Use confidence scores to size positions probabilistically.
The system provides an edge. Your job is to execute that edge with discipline, patience, and proper risk management over hundreds of trades.
Markets are probabilistic. No system wins every trade. But a systematic edge + disciplined execution + proper risk management compounds over time. That's the path to consistent profitability. BZ-CAE gives you the edge. The discipline and risk management are on you.
Taking you to school. — Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
VMDM - Volume, Momentum & Divergence Master [BullByte]VMDM - Volume, Momentum and Divergence Master
Educational Multi-Layer Market Structure Analysis System
Multi-factor divergence engine that scores RSI momentum, volume pressure, and institutional footprints into one non-repainting confluence rating (0-100).
WHAT THIS INDICATOR IS
VMDM is an educational indicator designed to teach traders how to recognize high-probability reversal and continuation patterns by analyzing four independent market dimensions simultaneously. Instead of relying on a single indicator that may produce frequent false signals, VMDM creates a confluence-based scoring system that weights multiple confirmation factors, helping you understand which setups have stronger technical backing and which are lower quality.
This is NOT a trading system or signal generator. It is a learning tool that visualizes complex market structure concepts in an accessible format for both coders and non-coders.
THE PROBLEM IT SOLVES
Most traders face these common challenges:
Challenge 1 - Indicator Overload: Running RSI, volume analysis, and divergence detection separately creates chart clutter and conflicting signals. You waste time cross-referencing multiple windows trying to determine if all factors align.
Challenge 2 - False Divergences: Standard divergence indicators trigger on every minor pivot, creating noise. Many divergences fail because they lack supporting evidence from volume or market structure.
Challenge 3 - Missed Context: A bullish RSI divergence means nothing if it occurs during weak volume or in the middle of strong distribution. Context determines quality.
Challenge 4 - Repainting Confusion: Many divergence scripts repaint, showing perfect historical signals that never actually triggered in real-time, leading to false confidence.
Challenge 5 - Institutional Pattern Recognition: Absorption zones, stop hunts, and exhaustion patterns are taught in trading education but difficult to identify systematically without manual analysis.
VMDM addresses all five challenges by combining complementary analytical layers into one transparent, non-repainting, confluence-weighted system with visual clarity.
WHY THIS SPECIFIC COMBINATION - MASHUP JUSTIFICATION
This indicator is NOT a random mashup of popular indicators. Each of the four layers serves a specific analytical purpose and together they create a complete market structure assessment framework.
THE FOUR ANALYTICAL LAYERS
LAYER 1 - RSI MOMENTUM DIVERGENCE (Trend Exhaustion Detection)
Purpose: Identifies when price momentum is weakening before price itself reverses.
Why RSI: The Relative Strength Index measures momentum on a bounded 0-100 scale, making divergence detection mathematically consistent across all assets and timeframes. Unlike raw price oscillators, RSI normalizes momentum regardless of volatility regime.
How It Contributes: Divergence between price pivots and RSI pivots reveals early momentum exhaustion. A lower price low with a higher RSI low (bullish regular divergence) signals sellers are losing strength even as price makes new lows. This is the PRIMARY signal generator in VMDM.
Limitation If Used Alone: RSI divergence by itself produces many false signals because momentum can remain weak during continued trends. It needs confirmation from volume and structural evidence.
LAYER 2 - VOLUME PRESSURE ANALYSIS (Buying vs Selling Intensity)
Purpose: Quantifies whether the current bar's volume reflects buying pressure or selling pressure based on where price closed within the bar's range.
Methodology: Instead of just measuring volume size, VMDM calculates WHERE in the bar range the close occurred. A close near the high on high volume indicates strong buying absorption. A close near the low indicates selling pressure. The calculation accounts for wick size (wicks reduce pressure quality) and uses percentile ranking over a lookback period to normalize pressure strength on a 0-100 scale.
Formula Concept:
Buy Pressure = Volume × (Close - Low) / (High - Low) × Wick Quality Factor
Sell Pressure = Volume × (High - Close) / (High - Low) × Wick Quality Factor
Net Pressure = Buy Pressure - Sell Pressure
Pressure Strength = Percentile Rank of Net Pressure over lookback period
Why Percentile Ranking: Absolute volume varies by asset and session. Percentile ranking makes 85th percentile pressure on low-volume crypto comparable to 85th percentile pressure on high-volume forex.
How It Contributes: When a bullish divergence occurs at a pivot low AND pressure strength is above 60 (strong buying), this adds 25 confluence points. It confirms that the divergence is occurring during actual accumulation, not just weak selling.
Limitation If Used Alone: Pressure analysis shows current bar intensity but cannot identify trend exhaustion or reversal timing. High buying pressure can exist during a strong uptrend with no reversal imminent.
LAYER 3 - BEHAVIORAL FOOTPRINT PATTERNS (Volume Anomaly Detection)
CRITICAL DISCLAIMER: The terms "institutional footprint," "absorption," "stop hunt," and "exhaustion" used in this indicator are EDUCATIONAL LABELS for specific price and volume behavioral patterns. These patterns are detected through technical analysis of publicly available price, volume, and bar structure data. This indicator does NOT have access to actual institutional order flow, market maker data, broker stop-loss locations, or any non-public data source. These pattern names are used because they are common terminology in trading education to describe these technical behaviors. The analysis is interpretive and based on observable price action, not privileged information.
Purpose: Detect volume anomalies and price patterns that historically correlate with potential reversal zones or trend continuation failure.
Pattern Type 1 - Absorption (Labeled as "ACCUMULATION" or "DISTRIBUTION")
Detection Criteria: Volume is more than 2x the moving average AND bar range is less than 50 percent of the average bar range.
Interpretation: High volume compressed into a tight range suggests large participants are absorbing supply (accumulation) or distribution (distribution) without allowing price to move significantly. This often precedes directional moves once absorption completes.
Visual: Colored box zone highlighting the absorption area.
Pattern Type 2 - Stop Hunt (Labeled as "BULL HUNT" or "BEAR HUNT")
Detection Criteria: Price penetrates a recent 10-bar high or low by a small margin (0.2 percent), then closes back inside the range on above-average volume (1.5x+).
Interpretation: Price briefly spikes beyond recent structure (likely triggering stop losses placed just beyond obvious levels) then reverses. This is a classic false breakout pattern often seen before reversals.
Visual: Label at the wick extreme showing hunt direction.
Pattern Type 3 - Exhaustion (Labeled as "SELL EXHAUST" or "BUY EXHAUST")
Detection Criteria: Lower wick is more than 2.5x the body size with volume above 1.8x average and RSI below 35 (sell exhaustion), OR upper wick more than 2.5x body size with volume above 1.8x average and RSI above 65 (buy exhaustion).
Interpretation: Large wicks with high volume and extreme RSI suggest aggressive buying or selling was met with equally aggressive rejection. This exhaustion often marks short-term extremes.
Visual: Label showing exhaustion type.
How These Contribute: When a divergence forms at a pivot AND one of these behavioral patterns is active, the confluence score increases by 20 points. This confirms the divergence is occurring during structural anomaly activity, not just normal price flow.
Limitation If Used Alone: These patterns can occur mid-trend and do not indicate direction without momentum context. Absorption in a strong uptrend may just be continuation accumulation.
LAYER 4 - CONFLUENCE SCORING MATRIX (Quality Weighting System)
Purpose: Translate all detected conditions into a single 0-100 quality score so you can objectively compare setups.
Scoring Breakdown:
Divergence Present: +30 points (primary signal)
Pressure Confirmation: +25 points (volume supports direction)
Behavioral Footprint Active: +20 points (structural anomaly present)
RSI Extreme: +15 points (RSI below 30 or above 70 at pivot)
Volume Spike: +10 points (current volume above 1.5x average)
Maximum Possible Score: 100 points
Why These Weights: The weights reflect reliability hierarchy based on backtesting observation. Divergence is the core signal (30 points), but without volume confirmation (25 points) many fail. Behavioral patterns add meaningful context (20 points). RSI extremes and volume spikes are secondary confirmations (15 and 10 points).
Quality Tiers:
90-100: TEXTBOOK (all factors aligned)
75-89: HIGH QUALITY (strong confluence)
60-74: VALID (meets minimum threshold)
Below 60: DEVELOPING (not displayed unless threshold lowered)
How It Contributes: The confluence score allows you to filter noise. You can set your minimum quality threshold in settings. Higher thresholds (75+) show fewer but higher-quality patterns. Lower thresholds (50-60) show more patterns but include lower-confidence setups. This teaches you to distinguish strong setups from weak ones.
Limitation: Confluence scoring is historical observation-based, not predictive guarantee. A 95-point setup can still fail. The score represents technical alignment, not future certainty.
WHY THIS COMBINATION WORKS TOGETHER
Each layer addresses a limitation in the others:
RSI Divergence identifies WHEN momentum is exhausting (timing)
Volume Pressure confirms WHETHER the exhaustion is accompanied by opposite-side accumulation (confirmation)
Behavioral Footprint shows IF structural anomalies support the reversal hypothesis (context)
Confluence Scoring weights ALL factors into an objective quality metric (filtering)
Using only RSI divergence gives you timing without confirmation. Using only volume pressure gives you intensity without directional context. Using only pattern detection gives you anomalies without trend exhaustion context. Using all four together creates a complete analytical framework where each layer compensates for the others' weaknesses.
This is not a mashup for the sake of combining indicators. It is a structured analytical system where each component has a defined role in a multi-dimensional market assessment process.
HOW TO READ THE INDICATOR - VISUAL ELEMENTS GUIDE
VMDM displays up to five visual layer types. You can enable or disable each layer independently in settings under "Visual Layers."
VISUAL LAYER 1 - MARKET STRUCTURE (Pivot Points and Lines)
What You See:
Small labels at swing highs and lows marked "PH" (Pivot High) and "PL" (Pivot Low) with horizontal dashed lines extending right from each pivot.
What It Means:
These are CONFIRMED pivots, not real-time. A pivot low appears AFTER the required right-side confirmation bars pass (default 3 bars). This creates a delay but prevents repainting. The pivot only appears once it is mathematically confirmed.
The horizontal lines represent support (from pivot lows) and resistance (from pivot highs) levels where price previously found significant rejection.
Color Coding:
Green label and line: Pivot Low (potential support)
Red label and line: Pivot High (potential resistance)
How To Use:
These pivots are the foundation for divergence detection. Divergence is only calculated between confirmed pivots, ensuring all signals are non-repainting. The lines help you see historical structure levels.
VISUAL LAYER 2 - PRESSURE ZONES (Background Color)
What You See:
Subtle background color shading on bars - light green or light red tint.
What It Means:
This visualizes volume pressure strength in real-time.
Color Coding:
Light Green Background: Pressure Strength above 70 (strong buying pressure - price closing near highs on volume)
Light Red Background: Pressure Strength below 30 (strong selling pressure - price closing near lows on volume)
No Color: Neutral pressure (pressure between 30-70)
How To Use:
When a bullish divergence pattern appears during green pressure zones, it suggests the divergence is forming during accumulation. When a bearish divergence appears during red zones, distribution is occurring. Pressure zones help you filter divergences - those forming in supportive pressure environments have higher probability.
VISUAL LAYER 3 - DIVERGENCE LINES (Dotted Connectors)
What You See:
Dotted lines connecting two pivot points (either two pivot lows or two pivot highs).
What It Means:
A divergence has been detected between those two pivots. The line connects the price pivots where RSI showed opposite behavior.
Color Coding:
Bright Green Line: Bullish divergence (regular or hidden)
Bright Red Line: Bearish divergence (regular or hidden)
How To Use:
The divergence line appears ONLY after the second pivot is confirmed (delayed by right-side confirmation bars). This is intentional to prevent repainting. When you see the line appear, it means:
For Bullish Regular Divergence:
Price made a lower low (second pivot lower than first)
RSI made a higher low (RSI at second pivot higher than first)
Interpretation: Downtrend losing momentum
For Bullish Hidden Divergence:
Price made a higher low (second pivot higher than first)
RSI made a lower low (RSI at second pivot lower than first)
Interpretation: Uptrend continuation likely (pullback within uptrend)
For Bearish Regular Divergence:
Price made a higher high (second pivot higher than first)
RSI made a lower high (RSI at second pivot lower than first)
Interpretation: Uptrend losing momentum
For Bearish Hidden Divergence:
Price made a lower high (second pivot lower than first)
RSI made a higher high (RSI at second pivot higher than first)
Interpretation: Downtrend continuation likely (bounce within downtrend)
If "Show Consolidated Analysis Label" is disabled, a small label will appear on the divergence line showing the divergence type abbreviation.
VISUAL LAYER 4 - BEHAVIORAL FOOTPRINT MARKERS
What You See:
Boxes, labels, and markers at specific bars showing pattern detection.
ABSORPTION ZONES (Boxes):
Colored rectangular boxes spanning one or more bars.
Purple Box: Accumulation absorption zone (high volume, tight range, bullish close)
Red Box: Distribution absorption zone (high volume, tight range, bearish close)
If absorption continues for multiple consecutive bars, the box extends and a counter appears in the label showing how many bars the absorption lasted.
What It Means: Large volume is being absorbed without significant price movement. This often precedes directional breakouts once the absorption phase completes.
STOP HUNT MARKERS (Labels):
Small labels below or above wicks labeled "BULL HUNT" or "BEAR HUNT" (may show bar count if consecutive).
What It Means:
BULL HUNT : Price spiked below recent lows then reversed back up on volume - likely triggered sell stops before reversing
BEAR HUNT : Price spiked above recent highs then reversed back down on volume - likely triggered buy stops before reversing
EXHAUSTION MARKERS (Labels):
Labels showing "SELL EXHAUST" or "BUY EXHAUST."
What It Means:
SELL EXHAUST : Large lower wick with high volume and low RSI - aggressive selling met with strong rejection
BUY EXHAUST : Large upper wick with high volume and high RSI - aggressive buying met with strong rejection
How To Use:
These markers help you identify WHERE structural anomalies occurred. When a divergence signal appears AT THE SAME TIME as one of these patterns, the confluence score increases. You are looking for alignment - divergence + behavioral pattern + pressure confirmation = high-quality setup.
VISUAL LAYER 5 - CONSOLIDATED ANALYSIS LABEL (Main Pattern Signal)
What You See:
A large label appearing at pivot points (or in real-time mode, at current bar) containing full pattern analysis.
Label Appearance:
Depending on your "Use Compact Label Format" setting:
COMPACT MODE (Single Line):
Example: "BULLISH REGULAR | Q:HIGH QUALITY C:82"
Breakdown:
BULLISH REGULAR: Divergence type detected
Q:HIGH QUALITY: Pattern quality tier
C:82: Confluence score (82 out of 100)
FULL MODE (Multi-Line Detailed):
Example:
PATTERN DETECTED
-------------------
BULLISH REGULAR
Quality: HIGH QUALITY
Price: Lower Low
Momentum: Higher Low
Signal: Weakening Downtrend
CONFLUENCE: 82/100
-------------------
Divergence: 30
Pressure: 25
Institutional: 20
RSI Extreme: 0
Volume: 10
Breakdown:
Top section: Pattern type and quality
Middle section: Divergence explanation (what price did vs what RSI did)
Bottom section: Confluence score with itemized breakdown showing which factors contributed
Label Position:
In Confirmed modes: Label appears AT the pivot point (delayed by confirmation bars)
In Real-time mode: Label appears at current bar as conditions develop
Label Color:
Gold: Textbook quality (90+ confluence)
Green: High quality (75-89 confluence)
Blue: Valid quality (60-74 confluence)
How To Use:
This is your primary decision-making label. When it appears:
Check the divergence type (regular divergences are reversal signals, hidden divergences are continuation signals)
Review the quality tier (textbook and high quality have better historical win rates)
Examine the confluence breakdown to see which factors are present and which are missing
Look at the chart context (trend, support/resistance, timeframe)
Use this information to assess whether the setup aligns with your strategy
The label does NOT tell you to buy or sell. It tells you a technical pattern has formed and provides the quality assessment. Your trading decision must incorporate risk management, market context, and your strategy rules.
UNDERSTANDING THE THREE DETECTION MODES
VMDM offers three signal detection modes in settings to accommodate different trading styles and learning objectives.
MODE 1: "Confluence Only (Real-Time)"
How It Works: Displays signals AS THEY DEVELOP on the current bar without waiting for pivot confirmation. The system calculates confluence score from pressure, volume, RSI extremes, and behavioral patterns. Divergence signals are NOT required in this mode.
Delay: ZERO - signals appear immediately.
Use Case: Real-time scanning for high-confluence zones without divergence requirement. Useful for intraday traders who want immediate alerts when multiple factors align.
Tradeoff: More frequent signals but includes setups without confirmed divergence. Higher false signal rate. Signals can change as the bar develops (not repainting in historical bars, but current bar updates).
Visual Behavior: Labels appear at the current bar. No divergence lines unless divergence happens to be present.
MODE 2: "Divergence + Confluence (Confirmed)" - DEFAULT RECOMMENDED
How It Works: Full system engagement. Signals appear ONLY when:
A pivot is confirmed (requires right-side confirmation bars to pass)
Divergence is detected between current pivot and previous pivot
Total confluence score meets or exceeds your minimum threshold
Delay: Equal to your "Pivot Right Bars" setting (default 3 bars). This means signals appear 3 bars AFTER the actual pivot formed.
Use Case: Highest-quality, non-repainting signals for swing traders and learners who want to study confirmed pattern completion.
Tradeoff: Delayed signals. You will not receive the signal until confirmation occurs. In fast-moving markets, price may have already moved significantly by the time the signal appears.
Visual Behavior: Labels appear at the historical pivot location (in the past). Divergence lines connect the two pivots. This is the most educational mode because it shows completed, confirmed patterns.
Non-Repainting Guarantee: Yes. Once a signal appears, it never disappears or changes.
MODE 3: "Divergence + Confluence (Relaxed)"
How It Works: Same as Confirmed mode but with adaptive thresholds. If confluence is very high (10 points above threshold), the signal may appear even if some factors are weak. If divergence is present but confluence is slightly below threshold (within 10 points), it may still appear.
Delay: Same as Confirmed mode (right-side confirmation bars).
Use Case: Slightly more signals than Confirmed mode for traders willing to accept near-threshold setups.
Tradeoff: More signals but lower average quality than Confirmed mode.
Visual Behavior: Same as Confirmed mode.
DASHBOARD GUIDE - READING THE METRICS
The dashboard appears in the corner of your chart (position selectable in settings) and provides real-time market state analysis.
You can choose between four dashboard detail levels in settings: Off, Compact, Optimized (default), Full.
DASHBOARD ROW EXPLANATIONS
ROW 1 - Header Information
Left: Current symbol and timeframe
Center: "VMDM "
Right: Version number
ROW 2 - Mode and Delay
Shows which detection mode you are using and the signal delay.
Example: "CONFIRMED | Delay: 3 bars"
This reminds you that signals in confirmed mode appear 3 bars after the pivot forms.
ROW 3 - Market Regime
Format: "TREND UP HV" or "RANGING NV"
First Part - Trend State:
TREND UP: 20 EMA above 50 EMA with strong separation
TREND DOWN: 20 EMA below 50 EMA with strong separation
RANGING: EMAs close together, low trend strength
TRANSITION: Between trending and ranging states
Second Part - Volatility State:
HV: High Volatility (current ATR more than 1.3x the 50-bar average ATR)
NV: Normal Volatility (current ATR between 0.7x and 1.3x average)
LV: Low Volatility (current ATR less than 0.7x average)
Third Column: Volatility ratio (example: "1.45x" means current ATR is 1.45 times normal)
How To Use: Regime context helps you interpret signals. Reversal divergences are more reliable in ranging or transitional regimes. Continuation divergences (hidden) are more reliable in trending regimes. High volatility means wider stops may be needed.
ROW 4 - Pressure
Shows current volume pressure state.
Format: "BUYING | ██████████░░░░░░░░░"
States:
BUYING : Pressure strength above 60 (closes near highs)
SELLING : Pressure strength below 40 (closes near lows)
NEUTRAL : Pressure strength between 40-60
Bar Visualization: Each block represents 10 percentile points. A full bar (10 filled blocks) = 100th percentile pressure.
Color: Green for buying, red for selling, gray for neutral.
How To Use: When pressure aligns with divergence direction (bullish divergence during buying pressure), confluence is stronger.
ROW 5 - Volume and RSI
Format: "1.8x | RSI 68 | OB"
First Value: Current volume ratio (1.8x = volume is 1.8 times the moving average)
Second Value: Current RSI reading
Third Value: RSI state
OB: Overbought (RSI above 70)
OS: Oversold (RSI below 30)
Blank: Neutral RSI
How To Use: Volume spikes (above 1.5x) during divergence formation add confluence. RSI extremes at pivots add confluence.
ROW 6 - Behavioral Footprint
Format: "BULL HUNT | 2 bars"
Shows the most recent behavioral pattern detected and how long ago.
States:
ACCUMULATION / DISTRIBUTION: Absorption detected
BULL HUNT / BEAR HUNT: Stop hunt detected
SELL EXHAUST / BUY EXHAUST: Exhaustion detected
SCANNING: No recent pattern
NOW: Pattern is active on current bar
How To Use: When footprint activity is recent (within 50 bars) or active now, it adds context to divergence signals forming in that area.
ROW 7 - Current Pattern
Shows the divergence type currently detected (if any).
Examples: "BULLISH REGULAR", "BEARISH HIDDEN", "Scanning..."
Quality: Shows pattern quality (TEXTBOOK, HIGH QUALITY, VALID)
How To Use: This tells you what type of signal is active. Regular divergences are reversal setups. Hidden divergences are continuation setups.
ROW 8 - Session Summary
Format: "14 events | A3 H8 E3"
First Value: Total institutional events this session
Breakdown:
A: Absorption events
H: Stop hunt events
E: Exhaustion events
How To Use: High event counts suggest an active, volatile session with frequent structural anomalies. Low counts suggest quiet, orderly price action.
ROW 9 - Confluence Score (Optimized/Full mode only)
Format: "78/100 | ████████░░"
Shows current real-time confluence score even if no pattern is confirmed yet.
How To Use: Watch this in real-time to see how close you are to pattern formation. When it exceeds your threshold and divergence forms, a signal will appear (after confirmation delay).
ROW 10 - Patterns Studied (Optimized/Full mode only)
Format: "47 patterns | 12 bars ago"
First Value: Total confirmed patterns detected since chart loaded
Second Value: How many bars since the last confirmed pattern appeared
How To Use: Helps you understand pattern frequency on your selected symbol and timeframe. If many bars have passed since last pattern, market may be trending without reversal opportunities.
ROW 11 - Bull/Bear Ratio (Optimized/Full mode only)
Format: "28:19 | BULL"
Shows count of bullish vs bearish patterns detected.
Balance:
BULL: More bullish patterns detected (suggests market has had more bullish reversals/continuations)
BEAR: More bearish patterns detected
BAL: Equal counts
How To Use: Extreme imbalances can indicate directional bias in the studied period. A heavily bullish ratio in a downtrend might suggest frequent failed rallies (bearish continuation). Context matters.
ROW 12 - Volume Ratio Detail (Optimized/Full mode only)
Shows current volume vs average volume in absolute terms.
Example: "1.4x | 45230 / 32300"
How To Use: Confirms whether current activity is above or below normal.
ROW 13 - Last Institutional Event (Full mode only)
Shows the most recent institutional pattern type and how many bars ago it occurred.
Example: "DISTRIBUTION | 23 bars"
How To Use: Tracks recency of last anomaly for context.
SETTINGS GUIDE - EVERY PARAMETER EXPLAINED
PERFORMANCE SECTION
Enable All Visuals (Master Toggle)
Default: ON
What It Does: Master kill switch for ALL visual elements (labels, lines, boxes, background colors, dashboard). When OFF, only plot outputs remain (invisible unless you open data window).
When To Change: Turn OFF on mobile devices, 1-second charts, or slow computers to improve performance. You can still receive alerts even with visuals disabled.
Impact: Dramatic performance improvement when OFF, but you lose all visual feedback.
Maximum Object History
Default: 50 | Range: 10-100
What It Does: Limits how many of each object type (labels, lines, boxes) are kept in memory. Older objects beyond this limit are deleted.
When To Change: Lower to 20-30 on fast timeframes (1-minute charts) to prevent slowdown. Increase to 100 on daily charts if you want more historical pattern visibility.
Impact: Lower values = better performance but less historical visibility. Higher values = more history visible but potential slowdown on fast timeframes.
Alert Cooldown (Bars)
Default: 5 | Range: 1-50
What It Does: Minimum number of bars that must pass before another alert of the same type can fire. Prevents alert spam when multiple patterns form in quick succession.
When To Change: Increase to 20+ on 1-minute charts to reduce noise. Decrease to 1-2 on daily charts if you want every pattern alerted.
Impact: Higher cooldown = fewer alerts. Lower cooldown = more alerts.
USER EXPERIENCE SECTION
Show Enhanced Tooltips
Default: ON
What It Does: Enables detailed hover-over tooltips on labels and visual elements.
When To Change: Turn OFF if you encounter Pine Script compilation errors related to tooltip arguments (rare, platform-specific issue).
Impact: Minimal. Just adds helpful hover text.
MARKET STRUCTURE DETECTION SECTION
Pivot Left Bars
Default: 3 | Range: 2-10
What It Does: Number of bars to the LEFT of the center bar that must be higher (for pivot low) or lower (for pivot high) than the center bar for a pivot to be valid.
Example: With value 3, a pivot low requires the center bar's low to be lower than the 3 bars to its left.
When To Change:
Increase to 5-7 on noisy timeframes (1-minute charts) to filter insignificant pivots
Decrease to 2 on slow timeframes (daily charts) to catch more pivots
Impact: Higher values = fewer, more significant pivots = fewer signals. Lower values = more frequent pivots = more signals but more noise.
Pivot Right Bars
Default: 3 | Range: 2-10
What It Does: Number of bars to the RIGHT of the center bar that must pass for confirmation. This creates the non-repainting delay.
Example: With value 3, a pivot is confirmed 3 bars AFTER it forms.
When To Change:
Increase to 5-7 for slower, more confirmed signals (better for swing trading)
Decrease to 2 for faster signals (better for intraday, but still non-repainting)
Impact: Higher values = longer delay but more reliable confirmation. Lower values = faster signals but less confirmation. This setting directly controls your signal delay in Confirmed and Relaxed modes.
Minimum Confluence Score
Default: 60 | Range: 40-95
What It Does: The threshold score required for a pattern to be displayed. Patterns with confluence scores below this threshold are not shown.
When To Change:
Increase to 75+ if you only want high-quality textbook setups (fewer signals)
Decrease to 50-55 if you want to see more developing patterns (more signals, lower average quality)
Impact: This is your primary signal filter. Higher threshold = fewer, higher-quality signals. Lower threshold = more signals but includes weaker setups. Recommended starting point is 60-65.
TECHNICAL PERIODS SECTION
RSI Period
Default: 14 | Range: 5-50
What It Does: Lookback period for RSI calculation.
When To Change:
Decrease to 9-10 for faster, more sensitive RSI that detects shorter-term momentum changes
Increase to 21-28 for slower, smoother RSI that filters noise
Impact: Lower values make RSI more volatile (more frequent extremes and divergences). Higher values make RSI smoother (fewer but more significant divergences). 14 is industry standard.
Volume Moving Average Period
Default: 20 | Range: 10-200
What It Does: Lookback period for calculating average volume. Current volume is compared to this average to determine volume ratio.
When To Change:
Decrease to 10-14 for shorter-term volume comparison (more sensitive to recent volume changes)
Increase to 50-100 for longer-term volume comparison (smoother, less sensitive)
Impact: Lower values make volume ratio more volatile. Higher values make it more stable. 20 is standard.
ATR Period
Default: 14 | Range: 5-100
What It Does: Lookback period for Average True Range calculation used for volatility measurement and label positioning.
When To Change: Rarely needs adjustment. Use 7-10 for faster volatility response, 21-28 for slower.
Impact: Affects volatility ratio calculation and visual label spacing. Minimal impact on signals.
Pressure Percentile Lookback
Default: 50 | Range: 10-300
What It Does: Lookback period for calculating volume pressure percentile ranking. Your current pressure is ranked against the pressure of the last X bars.
When To Change:
Decrease to 20-30 for shorter-term pressure context (more responsive to recent changes)
Increase to 100-200 for longer-term pressure context (smoother rankings)
Impact: Lower values make pressure strength more sensitive to recent bars. Higher values provide more stable, long-term pressure assessment. Capped at 300 for performance reasons.
SIGNAL DETECTION SECTION
Signal Detection Mode
Default: "Divergence + Confluence (Confirmed)"
Options:
Confluence Only (Real-time)
Divergence + Confluence (Confirmed)
Divergence + Confluence (Relaxed)
What It Does: Selects which detection logic mode to use (see "Understanding The Three Detection Modes" section above).
When To Change: Use Confirmed for learning and non-repainting signals. Use Real-time for live scanning without divergence requirement. Use Relaxed for slightly more signals than Confirmed.
Impact: Fundamentally changes when and how signals appear.
VISUAL LAYERS SECTION
All toggles default to ON. Each controls visibility of one visual layer:
Show Market Structure: Pivot markers and support/resistance lines
Show Pressure Zones: Background color shading
Show Divergence Lines: Dotted lines connecting pivots
Show Institutional Footprint Markers: Absorption boxes, hunt labels, exhaustion labels
Show Consolidated Analysis Label: Main pattern detection label
Use Compact Label Format
Default: OFF
What It Does: Switches consolidated label between single-line compact format and multi-line detailed format.
When To Change: Turn ON if you find full labels too large or distracting.
Impact: Visual clarity vs. information density tradeoff.
DASHBOARD SECTION
Dashboard Mode
Default: "Optimized"
Options: Off, Compact, Optimized, Full
What It Does: Controls how much information the dashboard displays.
Off: No dashboard
Compact: 8 rows (essential metrics only)
Optimized: 12 rows (recommended balance)
Full: 13 rows (every available metric)
Dashboard Position
Default: "Top Right"
Options: Top Right, Top Left, Bottom Right, Bottom Left
What It Does: Screen corner where dashboard appears.
HOW TO USE VMDM - PRACTICAL WORKFLOW
STEP 1 - INITIAL SETUP
Add VMDM to your chart
Select your detection mode (Confirmed recommended for learning)
Set your minimum confluence score (start with 60-65)
Adjust pivot parameters if needed (default 3/3 is good for most timeframes)
Enable the visual layers you want to see
STEP 2 - CHART ANALYSIS
Let the indicator load and analyze historical data
Review the patterns that appear historically
Examine the confluence scores - notice which patterns had higher scores
Observe which patterns occurred during supportive pressure zones
Notice the divergence line connections - understand what price vs RSI did
STEP 3 - PATTERN RECOGNITION LEARNING
When a consolidated analysis label appears:
Read the divergence type (regular or hidden, bullish or bearish)
Check the quality tier (textbook, high quality, or valid)
Review the confluence breakdown - which factors contributed
Look at the chart context - where is price relative to structure, trend, etc.
Observe the behavioral footprint markers nearby - do they support the pattern
STEP 4 - REAL-TIME MONITORING
Watch the dashboard for real-time regime and pressure state
Monitor the current confluence score in the dashboard
When it approaches your threshold, be alert for potential pattern formation
When a new pattern appears (after confirmation delay), evaluate it using the workflow above
Use your trading strategy rules to decide if the setup aligns with your criteria
STEP 5 - POST-PATTERN OBSERVATION
After a pattern appears:
Mark the level on your chart
Observe what price does after the pattern completes
Did price respect the reversal/continuation signal
What was the confluence score of patterns that worked vs. those that failed
Learn which quality tiers and confluence levels produce better results on your specific symbol and timeframe
RECOMMENDED TIMEFRAMES AND ASSET CLASSES
VMDM is timeframe-agnostic and works on any asset with volume data. However, optimal performance varies:
BEST TIMEFRAMES
15-Minute to 1-Hour: Ideal balance of signal frequency and reliability. Pivot confirmation delay is acceptable. Sufficient volume data for pressure analysis.
4-Hour to Daily: Excellent for swing trading. Very high-quality signals. Lower frequency but higher significance. Recommended for learning because patterns are clearer.
1-Minute to 5-Minute: Works but requires adjustment. Increase pivot bars to 5-7 for filtering. Decrease max object history to 30 for performance. Expect more noise.
Weekly/Monthly: Works but very infrequent signals. Increase confluence threshold to 70+ to ensure only major patterns appear.
BEST ASSET CLASSES
Forex Majors: Excellent volume data and clear trends. Pressure analysis works well.
Crypto (Major Pairs): Good volume data. High volatility makes divergences more pronounced. Works very well.
Stock Indices (SPY, QQQ, etc.): Excellent. Clean price action and reliable volume.
Individual Stocks: Works well on high-volume stocks. Low-volume stocks may produce unreliable pressure readings.
Commodities (Gold, Oil, etc.): Works well. Clear trends and reactions.
WHAT THIS INDICATOR CANNOT DO - LIMITATIONS
LIMITATION 1 - It Does Not Predict The Future
VMDM identifies when technical conditions align historically associated with potential reversals or continuations. It does not predict what will happen next. A textbook 95-confluence pattern can still fail if fundamental events, news, or larger timeframe structure override the setup.
LIMITATION 2 - Confirmation Delay Means You Miss Early Entry
In Confirmed and Relaxed modes, the non-repainting design means you receive signals AFTER the pivot is confirmed. Price may have already moved significantly by the time you receive the signal. This is the tradeoff for non-repainting reliability. You can use Real-time mode for faster signals but sacrifice divergence confirmation.
LIMITATION 3 - It Does Not Tell You Position Sizing or Risk Management
VMDM provides technical pattern analysis. It does not calculate stop loss levels, take profit targets, or position sizing. You must apply your own risk management rules. Never risk more than you can afford to lose based on a technical signal.
LIMITATION 4 - Volume Pressure Analysis Requires Reliable Volume Data
On assets with thin volume or unreliable volume reporting, pressure analysis may be inaccurate. Stick to major liquid assets with consistent volume data.
LIMITATION 5 - It Cannot Detect Fundamental Events
VMDM is purely technical. It cannot predict earnings reports, central bank decisions, geopolitical events, or other fundamental catalysts that can override technical patterns.
LIMITATION 6 - Divergence Requires Two Pivots
The indicator cannot detect divergence until at least two pivots of the same type have formed. In strong trends without pullbacks, you may go long periods without signals.
LIMITATION 7 - Institutional Pattern Names Are Interpretive
The behavioral footprint patterns are named using common trading education terminology, but they are detected through technical analysis, not actual institutional data access. The patterns are interpretations based on price and volume behavior.
CONCEPT FOUNDATION - WHY THIS APPROACH WORKS
MARKET PRINCIPLE 1 - Momentum Divergence Precedes Price Reversal
Price is the final output of market forces, but momentum (the rate of change in those forces) shifts first. When price makes a new low but the momentum behind that move is weaker (higher RSI low), it signals that sellers are losing strength even though they temporarily pushed price lower. This precedes reversal. This is a fundamental principle in technical analysis taught by Charles Dow, widely observed in market behavior.
MARKET PRINCIPLE 2 - Volume Reveals Conviction
Price can move on low volume (low conviction) or high volume (high conviction). When price makes a new low on declining volume while RSI shows improving momentum, it suggests the new low is not confirmed by participant conviction. Adding volume pressure analysis to momentum divergence adds a confirmation layer that filters false divergences.
MARKET PRINCIPLE 3 - Anomalies Mark Structural Extremes
When volume spikes significantly but range contracts (absorption), or when price spikes beyond structure then reverses (stop hunt), or when aggressive moves are met with large-wick rejection (exhaustion), these anomalies often mark short-term extremes. Combining these structural observations with momentum analysis creates context.
MARKET PRINCIPLE 4 - Confluence Improves Probability
No single technical factor is reliable in isolation. RSI divergence alone fails frequently. Volume analysis alone cannot time entries. Combining multiple independent factors into a weighted system increases the probability that observed patterns have structural significance rather than random noise.
THE EDUCATIONAL VALUE
By visualizing all four layers simultaneously and breaking down the confluence scoring transparently, VMDM teaches you to think in terms of multi-dimensional analysis rather than single-indicator reliance. Over time, you will learn to recognize these patterns manually and understand which combinations produce better results on your traded assets.
INSTITUTIONAL TERMINOLOGY - IMPORTANT CLARIFICATION
This indicator uses the following terms that are common in trading education:
Institutional Footprint
Absorption (Accumulation / Distribution)
Stop Hunt
Exhaustion
CRITICAL DISCLAIMER:
These terms are EDUCATIONAL LABELS for specific price action and volume behavior patterns detected through technical analysis of publicly available chart data (open, high, low, close, volume). This indicator does NOT have access to:
Actual institutional order flow or order book data
Market maker positions or intentions
Broker stop-loss databases
Non-public trading data
Proprietary institutional information
The patterns labeled as "institutional footprint" are interpretations based on observable price and volume behavior that educational trading literature often associates with potential large-participant activity. The detection is algorithmic pattern recognition, not privileged data access.
When this indicator identifies "absorption," it means it detected high volume within a small range - a condition that MAY indicate large orders being filled but is not confirmation of actual institutional participation.
When it identifies a "stop hunt," it means price briefly penetrated a structural level then reversed - a pattern that MAY have triggered stop losses but is not confirmation that stops were specifically targeted.
When it identifies "exhaustion," it means high volume with large rejection wicks - a pattern that MAY indicate aggressive participation meeting strong opposition but is not confirmation of institutional involvement.
These are technical analysis interpretations, not factual statements about market participant identity or intent.
DISCLAIMER AND RISK WARNING
EDUCATIONAL PURPOSE ONLY
This indicator is designed as an educational tool to help traders learn to recognize technical patterns, understand multi-factor analysis, and practice systematic market observation. It is NOT a trading system, signal service, or financial advice.
NO PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
Past pattern behavior does not guarantee future results. A pattern that historically preceded price movement in one direction may fail in the future due to changing market conditions, fundamental events, or random variance. Confluence scores reflect historical technical alignment, not future certainty.
TRADING INVOLVES SUBSTANTIAL RISK
Trading financial instruments involves substantial risk of loss. You can lose more than your initial investment. Never trade with money you cannot afford to lose. Always use proper risk management including stop losses, position sizing, and portfolio diversification.
NO PREDICTIVE CLAIMS
This indicator does NOT predict future price movement. It identifies when technical conditions align in patterns that historically have been associated with potential reversals or continuations. Market behavior is probabilistic, not deterministic.
BACKTESTING LIMITATIONS
If you backtest trading strategies using this indicator, ensure you account for:
Realistic commission costs
Realistic slippage (difference between signal price and actual fill price)
Sufficient sample size (minimum 100 trades for statistical relevance)
Reasonable position sizing (risking no more than 1-2 percent of account per trade)
The confirmation delay inherent in the indicator (you cannot enter at the exact pivot in Confirmed mode)
Backtests that do not account for these factors will produce unrealistic results.
AUTHOR LIABILITY
The author (BullByte) is not responsible for any trading losses incurred using this indicator. By using this indicator, you acknowledge that all trading decisions are your sole responsibility and that you understand the risks involved.
NOT FINANCIAL ADVICE
Nothing in this indicator, its code, its description, or its visual outputs constitutes financial, investment, or trading advice. Consult a licensed financial advisor before making investment decisions.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q: Why do signals appear in the past, not at the current bar
A: In Confirmed and Relaxed modes, signals appear at confirmed pivots, which requires waiting for right-side confirmation bars (default 3). This creates a delay but prevents repainting. Use Real-time mode if you want current-bar signals without pivot confirmation.
Q: Can I use this for automated trading
A: You can create alert-based automation, but understand that Confirmed mode signals appear AFTER the pivot with delay, so your entry will not be at the pivot price. Real-time mode signals can change as the current bar develops. Automation requires careful consideration of these factors.
Q: How do I know which confluence score to use
A: Start with 60. Observe which patterns work on your symbol/timeframe. If too many false signals, increase to 70-75. If too few signals, decrease to 55. Quality vs. quantity tradeoff.
Q: Do regular divergences mean I should enter a reversal trade immediately
A: No. Regular divergences indicate momentum exhaustion, which is a WARNING sign that trend may reverse, not a confirmation that it will. Use confluence score, market context, support/resistance, and your strategy rules to make entry decisions. Many divergences fail.
Q: What's the difference between regular and hidden divergence
A: Regular divergence = price and momentum move in opposite directions at extremes = potential reversal signal. Hidden divergence = price and momentum move in opposite directions during pullbacks = potential continuation signal. Hidden divergence suggests the pullback is just a correction within the larger trend.
Q: Why does the pressure zone color sometimes conflict with the divergence direction
A: Pressure is real-time current bar analysis. Divergence is confirmed pivot analysis from the past. They measure different things at different times. A bullish divergence confirmed 3 bars ago might appear during current selling pressure. This is normal.
Q: Can I use this on stocks without volume data
A: No. Volume is required for pressure analysis and behavioral pattern detection. Use only on assets with reliable volume reporting.
Q: How often should I expect signals
A: Depends on timeframe and settings. Daily charts might produce 5-10 signals per month. 1-hour charts might produce 20-30. 15-minute charts might produce 50-100. Adjust confluence threshold to control frequency.
Q: Can I modify the code
A: Yes, this is open source. You can modify for personal use. If you publish a modified version, please credit the original and ensure your publication meets TradingView guidelines.
Q: What if I disagree with a pattern's confluence score
A: The scoring weights are based on general observations and may not suit your specific strategy or asset. You can modify the code to adjust weights if you have data-driven reasons to do so.
Final Notes
VMDM - Volume, Momentum and Divergence Master is an educational multi-layer market analysis system designed to teach systematic pattern recognition through transparent, confluence-weighted signal detection. By combining RSI momentum divergence, volume pressure quantification, behavioral footprint pattern recognition, and quality scoring into a unified framework, it provides a comprehensive learning environment for understanding market structure.
Use this tool to develop your analytical skills, understand how multiple technical factors interact, and learn to distinguish high-quality setups from noise. Remember that technical analysis is probabilistic, not predictive. No indicator replaces proper education, risk management, and trading discipline.
Trade responsibly. Learn continuously. Risk only what you can afford to lose.
-BullByte
Inside SwingsOverview
The Inside Swings indicator identifies and visualizes "inside swing" patterns in price action. These patterns occur when price creates a series of pivots that form overlapping ranges, indicating potential consolidation or reversal zones.
What are Inside Swings?
Inside swings are specific pivot patterns where:
- HLHL Pattern: High-Low-High-Low sequence where the first high is higher than the second high, and the first low is lower than the second low
- LHLH Pattern: Low-High-Low-High sequence where the first low is lower than the second low, and the first high is higher than the second high
Here an Example
These patterns create overlapping price ranges that often act as:
- Support/Resistance zones
- Consolidation areas
- Potential reversal points
- Breakout levels
Levels From the Created Range
Input Parameters
Core Settings
- Pivot Lookback Length (default: 5): Number of bars on each side to confirm a pivot high/low
- Max Boxes (default: 100): Maximum number of patterns to display on chart
Extension Settings
- Extend Lines: Enable/disable line extensions - this extends the Extremes of the Swings to where a new Swing Started or Extended Right for the Latest Inside Swings
- Show High 1 Line: Display first high/low extension line
- Show High 2 Line: Display second high/low extension line
- Show Low 1 Line: Display first low/high extension line
- Show Low 2 Line: Display second low/high extension line
Visual Customization
Box Colors
- HLHL Box Color: Color for HLHL pattern boxes (default: green)
- HLHL Border Color: Border color for HLHL boxes
- LHLH Box Color: Color for LHLH pattern boxes (default: red)
- LHLH Border Color: Border color for LHLH boxes
Line Colors
- HLHL Line Color: Extension line color for HLHL patterns
- LHLH Line Color: Extension line color for LHLH patterns
- Line Width: Thickness of extension lines (1-5)
Pattern Detection Logic
HLHL Pattern (Bullish Inside Swing)
Condition: High1 > High2 AND Low1 < Low2
Sequence: High → Low → High → Low
Visual: Two overlapping boxes with first range encompassing second
Detection Criteria:
1. Last 4 pivots form High-Low-High-Low sequence
2. Fourth pivot (first high) > Second pivot (second high)
3. Third pivot (first low) < Last pivot (second low)
LHLH Pattern (Bearish Inside Swing)
Condition: Low1 < Low2 AND High1 > High2
Sequence: Low → High → Low → High
Visual: Two overlapping boxes with first range encompassing second
Detection Criteria:
1. Last 4 pivots form Low-High-Low-High sequence
2. Fourth pivot (first low) < Second pivot (second low)
3. Third pivot (first high) > Last pivot (second high)
Visual Elements
Boxes
- Box 1: Spans from first pivot to last pivot (larger range)
- Box 2: Spans from third pivot to last pivot (smaller range)
- Overlap: The intersection of both boxes represents the inside swing zone
Extension Lines
- High 1 Line: Horizontal line at first high/low level
- High 2 Line: Horizontal line at second high/low level
- Low 1 Line: Horizontal line at first low/high level
- Low 2 Line: Horizontal line at second low/high level
Line Extension Behavior
- Historical Patterns: Lines extend until the next pattern starts
- Latest Pattern: Lines extend to the right edge of chart
- Dynamic Updates: All lines are redrawn on each bar for accuracy
Trading Applications
Support/Resistance Levels
Inside swing levels often act as:
- Dynamic support/resistance
- Breakout confirmation levels
- Reversal entry points
Pattern Interpretation
- HLHL Patterns: Potential bullish continuation or reversal
- LHLH Patterns: Potential bearish continuation or reversal
- Overlap Zone: Key area for price interaction
Entry Strategies
1. Breakout Strategy: Enter on break above/below inside swing levels
2. Reversal Strategy: Enter on bounce from inside swing levels
3. Range Trading: Trade between inside swing levels
Technical Implementation
Data Structures
type InsideSwing
int startBar // First pivot bar
int endBar // Last pivot bar
string patternType // "HLHL" or "LHLH"
float high1 // First high/low
float low1 // First low/high
float high2 // Second high/low
float low2 // Second low/high
box box1 // First box
box box2 // Second box
line high1Line // High 1 extension line
line high2Line // High 2 extension line
line low1Line // Low 1 extension line
line low2Line // Low 2 extension line
bool isLatest // Latest pattern flag
Memory Management
- Pattern Storage: Array-based storage with automatic cleanup
- Pivot Tracking: Maintains last 4 pivots for pattern detection
- Resource Cleanup: Automatically removes oldest patterns when limit exceeded
Performance Optimization
- Duplicate Prevention: Checks for existing patterns before creation
- Efficient Redraw: Only redraws lines when necessary
- Memory Limits: Configurable maximum pattern count
Usage Tips
Best Practices
1. Combine with Volume: Use volume confirmation for breakouts
2. Multiple Timeframes: Check higher timeframes for context
3. Risk Management: Set stops beyond inside swing levels
4. Pattern Validation: Wait for confirmation before entering
Common Scenarios
- Consolidation Breakouts: Inside swings often precede significant moves
- Reversal Zones: Failed breakouts at inside swing levels
- Trend Continuation: Inside swings in trending markets
Limitations
- Lagging Indicator: Patterns form after completion
- False Signals: Not all inside swings lead to significant moves
- Market Dependent: Effectiveness varies by market conditions
Customization Options
Visual Adjustments
- Modify colors for different market conditions
- Adjust line widths for visibility
- Enable/disable specific elements
Detection Sensitivity
- Increase pivot length for smoother patterns
- Decrease for more sensitive detection
- Balance between noise and signal
Display Management
- Control maximum pattern count
- Adjust cleanup frequency
- Manage memory usage
Conclusion
The Inside Swings indicator provides a systematic approach to identifying consolidation and potential reversal zones in price action. By visualizing overlapping pivot ranges
The indicator's strength lies in its ability to:
- Identify key price levels automatically
- Provide visual context for market structure
- Offer flexible customization options
- Maintain performance through efficient memory management
Smart Market Structure and Swing Points, version 1.0Smart Market Structure and Swing Points, Version 1.0
Overview
The Smart Market Structure and Swing Points script is designed to provide advanced insights into market structure and key swing points. This script helps identify important highs and lows, trend direction changes (structure breaks), and swing points, enhancing decision-making for both trend-following and reversal strategies. See below for detail presentation and why it has unique features.
Unique Features of the New Script
Market Structure Identification : Analyzes and marks key highs and lows to determine market structure, including higher highs, lower highs, higher lows, and lower lows.
Customizable Detection Length : Allows users to set the length for detecting highs and lows, providing flexibility to adapt to different market conditions and timeframes. Default value is 5 bars, but can be changed if needed.
Visual Signal Indicators (Labels) : Plots labels on the chart to indicate higher highs (HH), lower highs (LH), higher lows (HL), and lower lows (LL), along with corresponding RSI values, offering clear visual cues for market structure analysis. The indication of RSI values directly on high and low points enables to better judge whether the points are strong references (extreme RSI values) or weak references (middle RSI values)
Dynamic Trend Lines : Draws solid and dotted lines to connect significant highs and lows, visually representing the current trend direction and potential trend changes. Dashed lines indicates structure breaks.
Swing High and Swing Low Detection : Identifies and marks the most recent swing highs and swing lows, helping traders spot potential reversal points and key levels for setting stop losses or take profit targets .
Originality and Usefulness
This script combines market structure, trend breaks and RSI to provide a more robust view of market dynamic by indicating the strength or weakness of swing points , in that way the script is unique.
Signal Description
The script includes various signal features that highlight potential trading opportunities based on market structure:
Higher Highs (HH) and Higher Lows (HL) : These labels are plotted when new highs or lows are formed, indicating a continuation of an uptrend. The labels are positioned with consideration of the Average True Range (ATR) for better visibility.
Lower Highs (LH) and Lower Lows (LL) : These labels are plotted when new highs or lows are formed, indicating a continuation of a downtrend. The labels include RSI values to provide additional information on the strength or weakness of the points.
Trend Direction Change : Dotted lines are drawn to indicate potential trend direction changes when the script detects significant shifts in market structure.
Swing Highs and Swing Lows : These are identified based on a customizable swing length, marking recent significant highs and lows to highlight potential reversal points.
These signals help identify high-probability turning points and confirm trend direction by ensuring that the market structure aligns with the trading strategy.
Detailed Description
Input Variables
Length for High/Low Detection (`length`) : Defines the range to check for highs and lows. Default is 5.
RSI Length (`rsilength`) : The number of periods to calculate the RSI. Default is 14.
Functionality
Market Structure Calculation : The script determines the highest high and lowest low within the specified range to identify key points in market structure.
```pine
h = ta.highest(high, length * 2 + 1)
l = ta.lowest(low, length * 2 + 1)
```
Directional Logic : Variables and functions manage the state of the indicator, updating highs and lows based on the current trend direction.
```pine
var bool dirUp = false
var float lastLow = high * 100
var float lastHigh = 0.0
// Additional variables for tracking state
```
Drawing Lines and Labels : Functions draw lines and labels on the chart to visualize market structure and trend changes.
```pine
f_drawLine() =>
_li_color = dirUp ? color.red : color.lime
line.new(x1=timeHigh - length, y1=lastHigh, x2=timeLow - length, y2=lastLow, color=_li_color, width=3, style=line.style_solid, xloc=xloc.bar_index)
f_drawLastLine() =>
_li_color = dirUp ? color.blue : color.blue
if timeHigh > timeLow
line.new(x1=timeHigh - length, y1=lastHigh, x2=bar_index, y2=low, color=_li_color, width=2, style=line.style_dotted, xloc=xloc.bar_index)
else
line.new(x1=timeLow - length, y1=lastLow, x2=bar_index, y2=high, color=_li_color, width=2, style=line.style_dotted, xloc=xloc.bar_index)
```
Updating Highs and Lows : The main logic updates highs and lows based on the current trend direction, adding labels for new higher highs, lower highs, higher lows, and lower lows.
```pine
if dirUp
if f_isMin(length)
lastLow := low
// Additional logic for updating lows and labels
if f_isMax(length) and high > lastLow
lastHigh := high
// Additional logic for updating highs and labels
dirUp := false
li := f_drawLine()
```
Swing Highs and Lows : The script identifies recent swing highs and swing lows based on a customizable swing length, drawing lines to mark these points.
```pine
swingLength = 3 * length
isSwingHigh = ta.highestbars(high, swingLength) == 0
isSwingLow = ta.lowestbars(low, swingLength) == 0
if (isSwingHigh)
if (na(highLine))
highLine := line.new(bar_index, high, bar_index, high, color=color.green, style=line.style_solid, width=1)
else
line.set_xy1(highLine, bar_index, high)
line.set_xy2(highLine, bar_index + swingLength, high)
if (isSwingLow)
if (na(lowLine))
lowLine := line.new(bar_index, low, bar_index, low, color=color.red, style=line.style_solid, width=1)
else
line.set_xy1(lowLine, bar_index, low)
line.set_xy2(lowLine, bar_index + swingLength, low)
```
How to Use
Configuring Inputs : Adjust the detection length and RSI length as needed. Modify the lookback periods to suit your trading strategy. The indicator is adaptable and can be used on any timeframe.
Interpreting the Indicator : Use the labels and lines to gauge market structure and trend direction. Look for higher highs, lower highs, higher lows, and lower lows to confirm market structure.
Signal Confirmation : Pay attention to the labels and lines that provide signals for potential trend changes and swing points. Use these signals to better time entries and exits.
This script provides a detailed view of market structure and swing points, helping make more informed decisions by considering key highs and lows, trend direction changes, and the strength or weakness of swing points.
Adaptive Genesis Engine [AGE]ADAPTIVE GENESIS ENGINE (AGE)
Pure Signal Evolution Through Genetic Algorithms
Where Darwin Meets Technical Analysis
🧬 WHAT YOU'RE GETTING - THE PURE INDICATOR
This is a technical analysis indicator - it generates signals, visualizes probability, and shows you the evolutionary process in real-time. This is NOT a strategy with automatic execution - it's a sophisticated signal generation system that you control .
What This Indicator Does:
Generates Long/Short entry signals with probability scores (35-88% range)
Evolves a population of up to 12 competing strategies using genetic algorithms
Validates strategies through walk-forward optimization (train/test cycles)
Visualizes signal quality through premium gradient clouds and confidence halos
Displays comprehensive metrics via enhanced dashboard
Provides alerts for entries and exits
Works on any timeframe, any instrument, any broker
What This Indicator Does NOT Do:
Execute trades automatically
Manage positions or calculate position sizes
Place orders on your behalf
Make trading decisions for you
This is pure signal intelligence. AGE tells you when and how confident it is. You decide whether and how much to trade.
🔬 THE SCIENCE: GENETIC ALGORITHMS MEET TECHNICAL ANALYSIS
What Makes This Different - The Evolutionary Foundation
Most indicators are static - they use the same parameters forever, regardless of market conditions. AGE is alive . It maintains a population of competing strategies that evolve, adapt, and improve through natural selection principles:
Birth: New strategies spawn through crossover breeding (combining DNA from fit parents) plus random mutation for exploration
Life: Each strategy trades virtually via shadow portfolios, accumulating wins/losses, tracking drawdown, and building performance history
Selection: Strategies are ranked by comprehensive fitness scoring (win rate, expectancy, drawdown control, signal efficiency)
Death: Weak strategies are culled periodically, with elite performers (top 2 by default) protected from removal
Evolution: The gene pool continuously improves as successful traits propagate and unsuccessful ones die out
This is not curve-fitting. Each new strategy must prove itself on out-of-sample data through walk-forward validation before being trusted for live signals.
🧪 THE DNA: WHAT EVOLVES
Every strategy carries a 10-gene chromosome controlling how it interprets market data:
Signal Sensitivity Genes
Entropy Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to market order/disorder calculations. Low values = conservative, require strong directional clarity. High values = aggressive, act on weaker order signals.
Momentum Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to RSI/ROC/MACD composite. Controls responsiveness to momentum shifts vs. mean-reversion setups.
Structure Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to support/resistance positioning. Determines how much price location within swing range matters.
Probability Adjustment Genes
Probability Boost (-0.10 to +0.10): Inherent bias toward aggressive (+) or conservative (-) entries. Acts as personality trait - some strategies naturally optimistic, others pessimistic.
Trend Strength Requirement (0.3-0.8): Minimum trend conviction needed before signaling. Higher values = only trades strong trends, lower values = acts in weak/sideways markets.
Volume Filter (0.5-1.5): Strictness of volume confirmation. Higher values = requires strong volume, lower values = volume less important.
Risk Management Genes
ATR Multiplier (1.5-4.0): Base volatility scaling for all price levels. Controls whether strategy uses tight or wide stops/targets relative to ATR.
Stop Multiplier (1.0-2.5): Stop loss tightness. Lower values = aggressive profit protection, higher values = more breathing room.
Target Multiplier (1.5-4.0): Profit target ambition. Lower values = quick scalping exits, higher values = swing trading holds.
Adaptation Gene
Regime Adaptation (0.0-1.0): How much strategy adjusts behavior based on detected market regime (trending/volatile/choppy). Higher values = more reactive to regime changes.
The Magic: AGE doesn't just try random combinations. Through tournament selection and fitness-weighted crossover, successful gene combinations spread through the population while unsuccessful ones fade away. Over 50-100 bars, you'll see the population converge toward genes that work for YOUR instrument and timeframe.
📊 THE SIGNAL ENGINE: THREE-LAYER SYNTHESIS
Before any strategy generates a signal, AGE calculates probability through multi-indicator confluence:
Layer 1 - Market Entropy (Information Theory)
Measures whether price movements exhibit directional order or random walk characteristics:
The Math:
Shannon Entropy = -Σ(p × log(p))
Market Order = 1 - (Entropy / 0.693)
What It Means:
High entropy = choppy, random market → low confidence signals
Low entropy = directional market → high confidence signals
Direction determined by up-move vs down-move dominance over lookback period (default: 20 bars)
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (bearish order to bullish order)
Layer 2 - Momentum Synthesis
Combines three momentum indicators into single composite score:
Components:
RSI (40% weight): Normalized to -1/+1 scale using (RSI-50)/50
Rate of Change (30% weight): Percentage change over lookback (default: 14 bars), clamped to ±1
MACD Histogram (30% weight): Fast(12) - Slow(26), normalized by ATR
Why This Matters: RSI catches mean-reversion opportunities, ROC catches raw momentum, MACD catches momentum divergence. Weighting favors RSI for reliability while keeping other perspectives.
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (strong bearish to strong bullish)
Layer 3 - Structure Analysis
Evaluates price position within swing range (default: 50-bar lookback):
Position Classification:
Bottom 20% of range = Support Zone → bullish bounce potential
Top 20% of range = Resistance Zone → bearish rejection potential
Middle 60% = Neutral Zone → breakout/breakdown monitoring
Signal Logic:
At support + bullish candle = +0.7 (strong buy setup)
At resistance + bearish candle = -0.7 (strong sell setup)
Breaking above range highs = +0.5 (breakout confirmation)
Breaking below range lows = -0.5 (breakdown confirmation)
Consolidation within range = ±0.3 (weak directional bias)
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (bearish structure to bullish structure)
Confluence Voting System
Each layer casts a vote (Long/Short/Neutral). The system requires minimum 2-of-3 agreement (configurable 1-3) before generating a signal:
Examples:
Entropy: Bullish, Momentum: Bullish, Structure: Neutral → Signal generated (2 long votes)
Entropy: Bearish, Momentum: Neutral, Structure: Neutral → No signal (only 1 short vote)
All three bullish → Signal generated with +5% probability bonus
This is the key to quality. Single indicators give too many false signals. Triple confirmation dramatically improves accuracy.
📈 PROBABILITY CALCULATION: HOW CONFIDENCE IS MEASURED
Base Probability:
Raw_Prob = 50% + (Average_Signal_Strength × 25%)
Then AGE applies strategic adjustments:
Trend Alignment:
Signal with trend: +4%
Signal against strong trend: -8%
Weak/no trend: no adjustment
Regime Adaptation:
Trending market (efficiency >50%, moderate vol): +3%
Volatile market (vol ratio >1.5x): -5%
Choppy market (low efficiency): -2%
Volume Confirmation:
Volume > 70% of 20-bar SMA: no change
Volume below threshold: -3%
Volatility State (DVS Ratio):
High vol (>1.8x baseline): -4% (reduce confidence in chaos)
Low vol (<0.7x baseline): -2% (markets can whipsaw in compression)
Moderate elevated vol (1.0-1.3x): +2% (trending conditions emerging)
Confluence Bonus:
All 3 indicators agree: +5%
2 of 3 agree: +2%
Strategy Gene Adjustment:
Probability Boost gene: -10% to +10%
Regime Adaptation gene: scales regime adjustments by 0-100%
Final Probability: Clamped between 35% (minimum) and 88% (maximum)
Why These Ranges?
Below 35% = too uncertain, better not to signal
Above 88% = unrealistic, creates overconfidence
Sweet spot: 65-80% for quality entries
🔄 THE SHADOW PORTFOLIO SYSTEM: HOW STRATEGIES COMPETE
Each active strategy maintains a virtual trading account that executes in parallel with real-time data:
Shadow Trading Mechanics
Entry Logic:
Calculate signal direction, probability, and confluence using strategy's unique DNA
Check if signal meets quality gate:
Probability ≥ configured minimum threshold (default: 65%)
Confluence ≥ configured minimum (default: 2 of 3)
Direction is not zero (must be long or short, not neutral)
Verify signal persistence:
Base requirement: 2 bars (configurable 1-5)
Adapts based on probability: high-prob signals (75%+) enter 1 bar faster, low-prob signals need 1 bar more
Adjusts for regime: trending markets reduce persistence by 1, volatile markets add 1
Apply additional filters:
Trend strength must exceed strategy's requirement gene
Regime filter: if volatile market detected, probability must be 72%+ to override
Volume confirmation required (volume > 70% of average)
If all conditions met for required persistence bars, enter shadow position at current close price
Position Management:
Entry Price: Recorded at close of entry bar
Stop Loss: ATR-based distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Stop_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Take Profit: ATR-based distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Target_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Position: +1 (long) or -1 (short), only one at a time per strategy
Exit Logic:
Check if price hit stop (on low) or target (on high) on current bar
Record trade outcome in R-multiples (profit/loss normalized by ATR)
Update performance metrics:
Total trades counter incremented
Wins counter (if profit > 0)
Cumulative P&L updated
Peak equity tracked (for drawdown calculation)
Maximum drawdown from peak recorded
Enter cooldown period (default: 8 bars, configurable 3-20) before next entry allowed
Reset signal age counter to zero
Walk-Forward Tracking:
During position lifecycle, trades are categorized:
Training Phase (first 250 bars): Trade counted toward training metrics
Testing Phase (next 75 bars): Trade counted toward testing metrics (out-of-sample)
Live Phase (after WFO period): Trade counted toward overall metrics
Why Shadow Portfolios?
No lookahead bias (uses only data available at the bar)
Realistic execution simulation (entry on close, stop/target checks on high/low)
Independent performance tracking for true fitness comparison
Allows safe experimentation without risking capital
Each strategy learns from its own experience
🏆 FITNESS SCORING: HOW STRATEGIES ARE RANKED
Fitness is not just win rate. AGE uses a comprehensive multi-factor scoring system:
Core Metrics (Minimum 3 trades required)
Win Rate (30% of fitness):
WinRate = Wins / TotalTrades
Normalized directly (0.0-1.0 scale)
Total P&L (30% of fitness):
Normalized_PnL = (PnL + 300) / 600
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Assumes P&L range of -300R to +300R for normalization scale.
Expectancy (25% of fitness):
Expectancy = Total_PnL / Total_Trades
Normalized_Expectancy = (Expectancy + 30) / 60
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Rewards consistency of profit per trade.
Drawdown Control (15% of fitness):
Normalized_DD = 1 - (Max_Drawdown / 15)
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Penalizes strategies that suffer large equity retracements from peak.
Sample Size Adjustment
Quality Factor:
<50 trades: 1.0 (full weight, small sample)
50-100 trades: 0.95 (slight penalty for medium sample)
100 trades: 0.85 (larger penalty for large sample)
Why penalize more trades? Prevents strategies from gaming the system by taking hundreds of tiny trades to inflate statistics. Favors quality over quantity.
Bonus Adjustments
Walk-Forward Validation Bonus:
if (WFO_Validated):
Fitness += (WFO_Efficiency - 0.5) × 0.1
Strategies proven on out-of-sample data receive up to +10% fitness boost based on test/train efficiency ratio.
Signal Efficiency Bonus (if diagnostics enabled):
if (Signals_Evaluated > 10):
Pass_Rate = Signals_Passed / Signals_Evaluated
Fitness += (Pass_Rate - 0.1) × 0.05
Rewards strategies that generate high-quality signals passing the quality gate, not just profitable trades.
Final Fitness: Clamped at 0.0 minimum (prevents negative fitness values)
Result: Elite strategies typically achieve 0.50-0.75 fitness. Anything above 0.60 is excellent. Below 0.30 is prime candidate for culling.
🔬 WALK-FORWARD OPTIMIZATION: ANTI-OVERFITTING PROTECTION
This is what separates AGE from curve-fitted garbage indicators.
The Three-Phase Process
Every new strategy undergoes a rigorous validation lifecycle:
Phase 1 - Training Window (First 250 bars, configurable 100-500):
Strategy trades normally via shadow portfolio
All trades count toward training performance metrics
System learns which gene combinations produce profitable patterns
Tracks independently: Training_Trades, Training_Wins, Training_PnL
Phase 2 - Testing Window (Next 75 bars, configurable 30-200):
Strategy continues trading without any parameter changes
Trades now count toward testing performance metrics (separate tracking)
This is out-of-sample data - strategy has never seen these bars during "optimization"
Tracks independently: Testing_Trades, Testing_Wins, Testing_PnL
Phase 3 - Validation Check:
Minimum_Trades = 5 (configurable 3-15)
IF (Train_Trades >= Minimum AND Test_Trades >= Minimum):
WR_Efficiency = Test_WinRate / Train_WinRate
Expectancy_Efficiency = Test_Expectancy / Train_Expectancy
WFO_Efficiency = (WR_Efficiency + Expectancy_Efficiency) / 2
IF (WFO_Efficiency >= 0.55): // configurable 0.3-0.9
Strategy.Validated = TRUE
Strategy receives fitness bonus
ELSE:
Strategy receives 30% fitness penalty
ELSE:
Validation deferred (insufficient trades in one or both periods)
What Validation Means
Validated Strategy (Green "✓ VAL" in dashboard):
Performed at least 55% as well on unseen data compared to training data
Gets fitness bonus: +(efficiency - 0.5) × 0.1
Receives priority during tournament selection for breeding
More likely to be chosen as active trading strategy
Unvalidated Strategy (Orange "○ TRAIN" in dashboard):
Failed to maintain performance on test data (likely curve-fitted to training period)
Receives 30% fitness penalty (0.7x multiplier)
Makes strategy prime candidate for culling
Can still trade but with lower selection probability
Insufficient Data (continues collecting):
Hasn't completed both training and testing periods yet
OR hasn't achieved minimum trade count in both periods
Validation check deferred until requirements met
Why 55% Efficiency Threshold?
If a strategy earned 10R during training but only 5.5R during testing, it still proved an edge exists beyond random luck. Requiring 100% efficiency would be unrealistic - market conditions change between periods. But requiring >50% ensures the strategy didn't completely degrade on fresh data.
The Protection: Strategies that work great on historical data but fail on new data are automatically identified and penalized. This prevents the population from being polluted by overfitted strategies that would fail in live trading.
🌊 DYNAMIC VOLATILITY SCALING (DVS): ADAPTIVE STOP/TARGET PLACEMENT
AGE doesn't use fixed stop distances. It adapts to current volatility conditions in real-time.
Four Volatility Measurement Methods
1. ATR Ratio (Simple Method):
Current_Vol = ATR(14) / Close
Baseline_Vol = SMA(Current_Vol, 100)
Ratio = Current_Vol / Baseline_Vol
Basic comparison of current ATR to 100-bar moving average baseline.
2. Parkinson (High-Low Range Based):
For each bar: HL = log(High / Low)
Parkinson_Vol = sqrt(Σ(HL²) / (4 × Period × log(2)))
More stable than close-to-close volatility. Captures intraday range expansion without overnight gap noise.
3. Garman-Klass (OHLC Based):
HL_Term = 0.5 × ²
CO_Term = (2×log(2) - 1) × ²
GK_Vol = sqrt(Σ(HL_Term - CO_Term) / Period)
Most sophisticated estimator. Incorporates all four price points (open, high, low, close) plus gap information.
4. Ensemble Method (Default - Median of All Three):
Ratio_1 = ATR_Current / ATR_Baseline
Ratio_2 = Parkinson_Current / Parkinson_Baseline
Ratio_3 = GK_Current / GK_Baseline
DVS_Ratio = Median(Ratio_1, Ratio_2, Ratio_3)
Why Ensemble?
Takes median to avoid outliers and false spikes
If ATR jumps but range-based methods stay calm, median prevents overreaction
If one method fails, other two compensate
Most robust approach across different market conditions
Sensitivity Scaling
Scaled_Ratio = (Raw_Ratio) ^ Sensitivity
Sensitivity 0.3: Cube root - heavily dampens volatility impact
Sensitivity 0.5: Square root - moderate dampening
Sensitivity 0.7 (Default): Balanced response to volatility changes
Sensitivity 1.0: Linear - full 1:1 volatility impact
Sensitivity 1.5: Exponential - amplified response to volatility spikes
Safety Clamps: Final DVS Ratio always clamped between 0.5x and 2.5x baseline to prevent extreme position sizing or stop placement errors.
How DVS Affects Shadow Trading
Every strategy's stop and target distances are multiplied by the current DVS ratio:
Stop Loss Distance:
Stop_Distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Stop_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Take Profit Distance:
Target_Distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Target_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Example Scenario:
ATR = 10 points
Strategy's ATR_Mult gene = 2.5
Strategy's Stop_Mult gene = 1.5
Strategy's Target_Mult gene = 2.5
DVS_Ratio = 1.4 (40% above baseline volatility - market heating up)
Stop = 10 × 2.5 × 1.5 × 1.4 = 52.5 points (vs. 37.5 in normal vol)
Target = 10 × 2.5 × 2.5 × 1.4 = 87.5 points (vs. 62.5 in normal vol)
Result:
During volatility spikes: Stops automatically widen to avoid noise-based exits, targets extend for bigger moves
During calm periods: Stops tighten for better risk/reward, targets compress for realistic profit-taking
Strategies adapt risk management to match current market behavior
🧬 THE EVOLUTIONARY CYCLE: SPAWN, COMPETE, CULL
Initialization (Bar 1)
AGE begins with 4 seed strategies (if evolution enabled):
Seed Strategy #0 (Balanced):
All sensitivities at 1.0 (neutral)
Zero probability boost
Moderate trend requirement (0.4)
Standard ATR/stop/target multiples (2.5/1.5/2.5)
Mid-level regime adaptation (0.5)
Seed Strategy #1 (Momentum-Focused):
Lower entropy sensitivity (0.7), higher momentum (1.5)
Slight probability boost (+0.03)
Higher trend requirement (0.5)
Tighter stops (1.3), wider targets (3.0)
Seed Strategy #2 (Entropy-Driven):
Higher entropy sensitivity (1.5), lower momentum (0.8)
Slight probability penalty (-0.02)
More trend tolerant (0.6)
Wider stops (1.8), standard targets (2.5)
Seed Strategy #3 (Structure-Based):
Balanced entropy/momentum (0.8/0.9), high structure (1.4)
Slight probability boost (+0.02)
Lower trend requirement (0.35)
Moderate risk parameters (1.6/2.8)
All seeds start with WFO validation bypassed if WFO is disabled, or must validate if enabled.
Spawning New Strategies
Timing (Adaptive):
Historical phase: Every 30 bars (configurable 10-100)
Live phase: Every 200 bars (configurable 100-500)
Automatically switches to live timing when barstate.isrealtime triggers
Conditions:
Current population < max population limit (default: 8, configurable 4-12)
At least 2 active strategies exist (need parents)
Available slot in population array
Selection Process:
Run tournament selection 3 times with different seeds
Each tournament: randomly sample active strategies, pick highest fitness
Best from 3 tournaments becomes Parent 1
Repeat independently for Parent 2
Ensures fit parents but maintains diversity
Crossover Breeding:
For each of 10 genes:
Parent1_Fitness = fitness
Parent2_Fitness = fitness
Weight1 = Parent1_Fitness / (Parent1_Fitness + Parent2_Fitness)
Gene1 = parent1's value
Gene2 = parent2's value
Child_Gene = Weight1 × Gene1 + (1 - Weight1) × Gene2
Fitness-weighted crossover ensures fitter parent contributes more genetic material.
Mutation:
For each gene in child:
IF (random < mutation_rate):
Gene_Range = GENE_MAX - GENE_MIN
Noise = (random - 0.5) × 2 × mutation_strength × Gene_Range
Mutated_Gene = Clamp(Child_Gene + Noise, GENE_MIN, GENE_MAX)
Historical mutation rate: 20% (aggressive exploration)
Live mutation rate: 8% (conservative stability)
Mutation strength: 12% of gene range (configurable 5-25%)
Initialization of New Strategy:
Unique ID assigned (total_spawned counter)
Parent ID recorded
Generation = max(parent generations) + 1
Birth bar recorded (for age tracking)
All performance metrics zeroed
Shadow portfolio reset
WFO validation flag set to false (must prove itself)
Result: New strategy with hybrid DNA enters population, begins trading in next bar.
Competition (Every Bar)
All active strategies:
Calculate their signal based on unique DNA
Check quality gate with their thresholds
Manage shadow positions (entries/exits)
Update performance metrics
Recalculate fitness score
Track WFO validation progress
Strategies compete indirectly through fitness ranking - no direct interaction.
Culling Weak Strategies
Timing (Adaptive):
Historical phase: Every 60 bars (configurable 20-200, should be 2x spawn interval)
Live phase: Every 400 bars (configurable 200-1000, should be 2x spawn interval)
Minimum Adaptation Score (MAS):
Initial MAS = 0.10
MAS decays: MAS × 0.995 every cull cycle
Minimum MAS = 0.03 (floor)
MAS represents the "survival threshold" - strategies below this fitness level are vulnerable.
Culling Conditions (ALL must be true):
Population > minimum population (default: 3, configurable 2-4)
At least one strategy has fitness < MAS
Strategy's age > culling interval (prevents premature culling of new strategies)
Strategy is not in top N elite (default: 2, configurable 1-3)
Culling Process:
Find worst strategy:
For each active strategy:
IF (age > cull_interval):
Fitness = base_fitness
IF (not WFO_validated AND WFO_enabled):
Fitness × 0.7 // 30% penalty for unvalidated
IF (Fitness < MAS AND Fitness < worst_fitness_found):
worst_strategy = this_strategy
worst_fitness = Fitness
IF (worst_strategy found):
Count elite strategies with fitness > worst_fitness
IF (elite_count >= elite_preservation_count):
Deactivate worst_strategy (set active flag = false)
Increment total_culled counter
Elite Protection:
Even if a strategy's fitness falls below MAS, it survives if fewer than N strategies are better. This prevents culling when population is generally weak.
Result: Weak strategies removed from population, freeing slots for new spawns. Gene pool improves over time.
Selection for Display (Every Bar)
AGE chooses one strategy to display signals:
Best fitness = -1
Selected = none
For each active strategy:
Fitness = base_fitness
IF (WFO_validated):
Fitness × 1.3 // 30% bonus for validated strategies
IF (Fitness > best_fitness):
best_fitness = Fitness
selected_strategy = this_strategy
Display selected strategy's signals on chart
Result: Only the highest-fitness (optionally validated-boosted) strategy's signals appear as chart markers. Other strategies trade invisibly in shadow portfolios.
🎨 PREMIUM VISUALIZATION SYSTEM
AGE includes sophisticated visual feedback that standard indicators lack:
1. Gradient Probability Cloud (Optional, Default: ON)
Multi-layer gradient showing signal buildup 2-3 bars before entry:
Activation Conditions:
Signal persistence > 0 (same directional signal held for multiple bars)
Signal probability ≥ minimum threshold (65% by default)
Signal hasn't yet executed (still in "forming" state)
Visual Construction:
7 gradient layers by default (configurable 3-15)
Each layer is a line-fill pair (top line, bottom line, filled between)
Layer spacing: 0.3 to 1.0 × ATR above/below price
Outer layers = faint, inner layers = bright
Color transitions from base to intense based on layer position
Transparency scales with probability (high prob = more opaque)
Color Selection:
Long signals: Gradient from theme.gradient_bull_mid to theme.gradient_bull_strong
Short signals: Gradient from theme.gradient_bear_mid to theme.gradient_bear_strong
Base transparency: 92%, reduces by up to 8% for high-probability setups
Dynamic Behavior:
Cloud grows/shrinks as signal persistence increases/decreases
Redraws every bar while signal is forming
Disappears when signal executes or invalidates
Performance Note: Computationally expensive due to linefill objects. Disable or reduce layers if chart performance degrades.
2. Population Fitness Ribbon (Optional, Default: ON)
Histogram showing fitness distribution across active strategies:
Activation: Only draws on last bar (barstate.islast) to avoid historical clutter
Visual Construction:
10 histogram layers by default (configurable 5-20)
Plots 50 bars back from current bar
Positioned below price at: lowest_low(100) - 1.5×ATR (doesn't interfere with price action)
Each layer represents a fitness threshold (evenly spaced min to max fitness)
Layer Logic:
For layer_num from 0 to ribbon_layers:
Fitness_threshold = min_fitness + (max_fitness - min_fitness) × (layer / layers)
Count strategies with fitness ≥ threshold
Height = ATR × 0.15 × (count / total_active)
Y_position = base_level + ATR × 0.2 × layer
Color = Gradient from weak to strong based on layer position
Line_width = Scaled by height (taller = thicker)
Visual Feedback:
Tall, bright ribbon = healthy population, many fit strategies at high fitness levels
Short, dim ribbon = weak population, few strategies achieving good fitness
Ribbon compression (layers close together) = population converging to similar fitness
Ribbon spread = diverse fitness range, active selection pressure
Use Case: Quick visual health check without opening dashboard. Ribbon growing upward over time = population improving.
3. Confidence Halo (Optional, Default: ON)
Circular polyline around entry signals showing probability strength:
Activation: Draws when new position opens (shadow_position changes from 0 to ±1)
Visual Construction:
20-segment polyline forming approximate circle
Center: Low - 0.5×ATR (long) or High + 0.5×ATR (short)
Radius: 0.3×ATR (low confidence) to 1.0×ATR (elite confidence)
Scales with: (probability - min_probability) / (1.0 - min_probability)
Color Coding:
Elite (85%+): Cyan (theme.conf_elite), large radius, minimal transparency (40%)
Strong (75-85%): Strong green (theme.conf_strong), medium radius, moderate transparency (50%)
Good (65-75%): Good green (theme.conf_good), smaller radius, more transparent (60%)
Moderate (<65%): Moderate green (theme.conf_moderate), tiny radius, very transparent (70%)
Technical Detail:
Uses chart.point array with index-based positioning
5-bar horizontal spread for circular appearance (±5 bars from entry)
Curved=false (Pine Script polyline limitation)
Fill color matches line color but more transparent (88% vs line's transparency)
Purpose: Instant visual probability assessment. No need to check dashboard - halo size/brightness tells the story.
4. Evolution Event Markers (Optional, Default: ON)
Visual indicators of genetic algorithm activity:
Spawn Markers (Diamond, Cyan):
Plots when total_spawned increases on current bar
Location: bottom of chart (location.bottom)
Color: theme.spawn_marker (cyan/bright blue)
Size: tiny
Indicates new strategy just entered population
Cull Markers (X-Cross, Red):
Plots when total_culled increases on current bar
Location: bottom of chart (location.bottom)
Color: theme.cull_marker (red/pink)
Size: tiny
Indicates weak strategy just removed from population
What It Tells You:
Frequent spawning early = population building, active exploration
Frequent culling early = high selection pressure, weak strategies dying fast
Balanced spawn/cull = healthy evolutionary churn
No markers for long periods = stable population (evolution plateaued or optimal genes found)
5. Entry/Exit Markers
Clear visual signals for selected strategy's trades:
Long Entry (Triangle Up, Green):
Plots when selected strategy opens long position (position changes 0 → +1)
Location: below bar (location.belowbar)
Color: theme.long_primary (green/cyan depending on theme)
Transparency: Scales with probability:
Elite (85%+): 0% (fully opaque)
Strong (75-85%): 10%
Good (65-75%): 20%
Acceptable (55-65%): 35%
Size: small
Short Entry (Triangle Down, Red):
Plots when selected strategy opens short position (position changes 0 → -1)
Location: above bar (location.abovebar)
Color: theme.short_primary (red/pink depending on theme)
Transparency: Same scaling as long entries
Size: small
Exit (X-Cross, Orange):
Plots when selected strategy closes position (position changes ±1 → 0)
Location: absolute (at actual exit price if stop/target lines enabled)
Color: theme.exit_color (orange/yellow depending on theme)
Transparency: 0% (fully opaque)
Size: tiny
Result: Clean, probability-scaled markers that don't clutter chart but convey essential information.
6. Stop Loss & Take Profit Lines (Optional, Default: ON)
Visual representation of shadow portfolio risk levels:
Stop Loss Line:
Plots when selected strategy has active position
Level: shadow_stop value from selected strategy
Color: theme.short_primary with 60% transparency (red/pink, subtle)
Width: 2
Style: plot.style_linebr (breaks when no position)
Take Profit Line:
Plots when selected strategy has active position
Level: shadow_target value from selected strategy
Color: theme.long_primary with 60% transparency (green, subtle)
Width: 2
Style: plot.style_linebr (breaks when no position)
Purpose:
Shows where shadow portfolio would exit for stop/target
Helps visualize strategy's risk/reward ratio
Useful for manual traders to set similar levels
Disable for cleaner chart (recommended for presentations)
7. Dynamic Trend EMA
Gradient-colored trend line that visualizes trend strength:
Calculation:
EMA(close, trend_length) - default 50 period (configurable 20-100)
Slope calculated over 10 bars: (current_ema - ema ) / ema × 100
Color Logic:
Trend_direction:
Slope > 0.1% = Bullish (1)
Slope < -0.1% = Bearish (-1)
Otherwise = Neutral (0)
Trend_strength = abs(slope)
Color = Gradient between:
- Neutral color (gray/purple)
- Strong bullish (bright green) if direction = 1
- Strong bearish (bright red) if direction = -1
Gradient factor = trend_strength (0 to 1+ scale)
Visual Behavior:
Faint gray/purple = weak/no trend (choppy conditions)
Light green/red = emerging trend (low strength)
Bright green/red = strong trend (high conviction)
Color intensity = trend strength magnitude
Transparency: 50% (subtle, doesn't overpower price action)
Purpose: Subconscious awareness of trend state without checking dashboard or indicators.
8. Regime Background Tinting (Subtle)
Ultra-low opacity background color indicating detected market regime:
Regime Detection:
Efficiency = directional_movement / total_range (over trend_length bars)
Vol_ratio = current_volatility / average_volatility
IF (efficiency > 0.5 AND vol_ratio < 1.3):
Regime = Trending (1)
ELSE IF (vol_ratio > 1.5):
Regime = Volatile (2)
ELSE:
Regime = Choppy (0)
Background Colors:
Trending: theme.regime_trending (dark green, 92-93% transparency)
Volatile: theme.regime_volatile (dark red, 93% transparency)
Choppy: No tint (normal background)
Purpose:
Subliminal regime awareness
Helps explain why signals are/aren't generating
Trending = ideal conditions for AGE
Volatile = fewer signals, higher thresholds applied
Choppy = mixed signals, lower confidence
Important: Extremely subtle by design. Not meant to be obvious, just subconscious context.
📊 ENHANCED DASHBOARD
Comprehensive real-time metrics in single organized panel (top-right position):
Dashboard Structure (5 columns × 14 rows)
Header Row:
Column 0: "🧬 AGE PRO" + phase indicator (🔴 LIVE or ⏪ HIST)
Column 1: "POPULATION"
Column 2: "PERFORMANCE"
Column 3: "CURRENT SIGNAL"
Column 4: "ACTIVE STRATEGY"
Column 0: Market State
Regime (📈 TREND / 🌊 CHAOS / ➖ CHOP)
DVS Ratio (current volatility scaling factor, format: #.##)
Trend Direction (▲ BULL / ▼ BEAR / ➖ FLAT with color coding)
Trend Strength (0-100 scale, format: #.##)
Column 1: Population Metrics
Active strategies (count / max_population)
Validated strategies (WFO passed / active total)
Current generation number
Total spawned (all-time strategy births)
Total culled (all-time strategy deaths)
Column 2: Aggregate Performance
Total trades across all active strategies
Aggregate win rate (%) - color-coded:
Green (>55%)
Orange (45-55%)
Red (<45%)
Total P&L in R-multiples - color-coded by positive/negative
Best fitness score in population (format: #.###)
MAS - Minimum Adaptation Score (cull threshold, format: #.###)
Column 3: Current Signal Status
Status indicator:
"▲ LONG" (green) if selected strategy in long position
"▼ SHORT" (red) if selected strategy in short position
"⏳ FORMING" (orange) if signal persisting but not yet executed
"○ WAITING" (gray) if no active signal
Confidence percentage (0-100%, format: #.#%)
Quality assessment:
"🔥 ELITE" (cyan) for 85%+ probability
"✓ STRONG" (bright green) for 75-85%
"○ GOOD" (green) for 65-75%
"- LOW" (dim) for <65%
Confluence score (X/3 format)
Signal age:
"X bars" if signal forming
"IN TRADE" if position active
"---" if no signal
Column 4: Selected Strategy Details
Strategy ID number (#X format)
Validation status:
"✓ VAL" (green) if WFO validated
"○ TRAIN" (orange) if still in training/testing phase
Generation number (GX format)
Personal fitness score (format: #.### with color coding)
Trade count
P&L and win rate (format: #.#R (##%) with color coding)
Color Scheme:
Panel background: theme.panel_bg (dark, low opacity)
Panel headers: theme.panel_header (slightly lighter)
Primary text: theme.text_primary (bright, high contrast)
Secondary text: theme.text_secondary (dim, lower contrast)
Positive metrics: theme.metric_positive (green)
Warning metrics: theme.metric_warning (orange)
Negative metrics: theme.metric_negative (red)
Special markers: theme.validated_marker, theme.spawn_marker
Update Frequency: Only on barstate.islast (current bar) to minimize CPU usage
Purpose:
Quick overview of entire system state
No need to check multiple indicators
Trading decisions informed by population health, regime state, and signal quality
Transparency into what AGE is thinking
🔍 DIAGNOSTICS PANEL (Optional, Default: OFF)
Detailed signal quality tracking for optimization and debugging:
Panel Structure (3 columns × 8 rows)
Position: Bottom-right corner (doesn't interfere with main dashboard)
Header Row:
Column 0: "🔍 DIAGNOSTICS"
Column 1: "COUNT"
Column 2: "%"
Metrics Tracked (for selected strategy only):
Total Evaluated:
Every signal that passed initial calculation (direction ≠ 0)
Represents total opportunities considered
✓ Passed:
Signals that passed quality gate and executed
Green color coding
Percentage of evaluated signals
Rejection Breakdown:
⨯ Probability:
Rejected because probability < minimum threshold
Most common rejection reason typically
⨯ Confluence:
Rejected because confluence < minimum required (e.g., only 1 of 3 indicators agreed)
⨯ Trend:
Rejected because signal opposed strong trend
Indicates counter-trend protection working
⨯ Regime:
Rejected because volatile regime detected and probability wasn't high enough to override
Shows regime filter in action
⨯ Volume:
Rejected because volume < 70% of 20-bar average
Indicates volume confirmation requirement
Color Coding:
Passed count: Green (success metric)
Rejection counts: Red (failure metrics)
Percentages: Gray (neutral, informational)
Performance Cost: Slight CPU overhead for tracking counters. Disable when not actively optimizing settings.
How to Use Diagnostics
Scenario 1: Too Few Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 10 (5%)
⨯ Probability: 120 (60%)
⨯ Confluence: 40 (20%)
⨯ Others: 30 (15%)
Diagnosis: Probability threshold too high for this strategy's DNA.
Solution: Lower min probability from 65% to 60%, or allow strategy more time to evolve better DNA.
Scenario 2: Too Many False Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 80 (40%)
Strategy win rate: 45%
Diagnosis: Quality gate too loose, letting low-quality signals through.
Solution: Raise min probability to 70%, or increase min confluence to 3 (all indicators must agree).
Scenario 3: Regime-Specific Issues
⨯ Regime: 90 (45% of rejections)
Diagnosis: Frequent volatile regime detection blocking otherwise good signals.
Solution: Either accept fewer trades during chaos (recommended), or disable regime filter if you want signals regardless of market state.
Optimization Workflow:
Enable diagnostics
Run 200+ bars
Analyze rejection patterns
Adjust settings based on data
Re-run and compare pass rate
Disable diagnostics when satisfied
⚙️ CONFIGURATION GUIDE
🧬 Evolution Engine Settings
Enable AGE Evolution (Default: ON):
ON: Full genetic algorithm (recommended for best results)
OFF: Uses only 4 seed strategies, no spawning/culling (static population for comparison testing)
Max Population (4-12, Default: 8):
Higher = more diversity, more exploration, slower performance
Lower = faster computation, less exploration, risk of premature convergence
Sweet spot: 6-8 for most use cases
4 = minimum for meaningful evolution
12 = maximum before diminishing returns
Min Population (2-4, Default: 3):
Safety floor - system never culls below this count
Prevents population extinction during harsh selection
Should be at least half of max population
Elite Preservation (1-3, Default: 2):
Top N performers completely immune to culling
Ensures best genes always survive
1 = minimal protection, aggressive selection
2 = balanced (recommended)
3 = conservative, slower gene pool turnover
Historical: Spawn Interval (10-100, Default: 30):
Bars between spawning new strategies during historical data
Lower = faster evolution, more exploration
Higher = slower evolution, more evaluation time per strategy
30 bars = ~1-2 hours on 15min chart
Historical: Cull Interval (20-200, Default: 60):
Bars between culling weak strategies during historical data
Should be 2x spawn interval for balanced churn
Lower = aggressive selection pressure
Higher = patient evaluation
Live: Spawn Interval (100-500, Default: 200):
Bars between spawning during live trading
Much slower than historical for stability
Prevents population chaos during live trading
200 bars = ~1.5 trading days on 15min chart
Live: Cull Interval (200-1000, Default: 400):
Bars between culling during live trading
Should be 2x live spawn interval
Conservative removal during live trading
Historical: Mutation Rate (0.05-0.40, Default: 0.20):
Probability each gene mutates during breeding (20% = 2 out of 10 genes on average)
Higher = more exploration, slower convergence
Lower = more exploitation, faster convergence but risk of local optima
20% balances exploration vs exploitation
Live: Mutation Rate (0.02-0.20, Default: 0.08):
Mutation rate during live trading
Much lower for stability (don't want population to suddenly degrade)
8% = mostly inherits parent genes with small tweaks
Mutation Strength (0.05-0.25, Default: 0.12):
How much genes change when mutated (% of gene's total range)
0.05 = tiny nudges (fine-tuning)
0.12 = moderate jumps (recommended)
0.25 = large leaps (aggressive exploration)
Example: If gene range is 0.5-2.0, 12% strength = ±0.18 possible change
📈 Signal Quality Settings
Min Signal Probability (0.55-0.80, Default: 0.65):
Quality gate threshold - signals below this never generate
0.55-0.60 = More signals, accept lower confidence (higher risk)
0.65 = Institutional-grade balance (recommended)
0.70-0.75 = Fewer but higher-quality signals (conservative)
0.80+ = Very selective, very few signals (ultra-conservative)
Min Confluence Score (1-3, Default: 2):
Required indicator agreement before signal generates
1 = Any single indicator can trigger (not recommended - too many false signals)
2 = Requires 2 of 3 indicators agree (RECOMMENDED for balance)
3 = All 3 must agree (very selective, few signals, high quality)
Base Persistence Bars (1-5, Default: 2):
Base bars signal must persist before entry
System adapts automatically:
High probability signals (75%+) enter 1 bar faster
Low probability signals (<68%) need 1 bar more
Trending regime: -1 bar (faster entries)
Volatile regime: +1 bar (more confirmation)
1 = Immediate entry after quality gate (responsive but prone to whipsaw)
2 = Balanced confirmation (recommended)
3-5 = Patient confirmation (slower but more reliable)
Cooldown After Trade (3-20, Default: 8):
Bars to wait after exit before next entry allowed
Prevents overtrading and revenge trading
3 = Minimal cooldown (active trading)
8 = Balanced (recommended)
15-20 = Conservative (position trading)
Entropy Length (10-50, Default: 20):
Lookback period for market order/disorder calculation
Lower = more responsive to regime changes (noisy)
Higher = more stable regime detection (laggy)
20 = works across most timeframes
Momentum Length (5-30, Default: 14):
Period for RSI/ROC calculations
14 = standard (RSI default)
Lower = more signals, less reliable
Higher = fewer signals, more reliable
Structure Length (20-100, Default: 50):
Lookback for support/resistance swing range
20 = short-term swings (day trading)
50 = medium-term structure (recommended)
100 = major structure (position trading)
Trend EMA Length (20-100, Default: 50):
EMA period for trend detection and direction bias
20 = short-term trend (responsive)
50 = medium-term trend (recommended)
100 = long-term trend (position trading)
ATR Period (5-30, Default: 14):
Period for volatility measurement
14 = standard ATR
Lower = more responsive to vol changes
Higher = smoother vol calculation
📊 Volatility Scaling (DVS) Settings
Enable DVS (Default: ON):
Dynamic volatility scaling for adaptive stop/target placement
Highly recommended to leave ON
OFF only for testing fixed-distance stops
DVS Method (Default: Ensemble):
ATR Ratio: Simple, fast, single-method (good for beginners)
Parkinson: High-low range based (good for intraday)
Garman-Klass: OHLC based (sophisticated, considers gaps)
Ensemble: Median of all three (RECOMMENDED - most robust)
DVS Memory (20-200, Default: 100):
Lookback for baseline volatility comparison
20 = very responsive to vol changes (can overreact)
100 = balanced adaptation (recommended)
200 = slow, stable baseline (minimizes false vol signals)
DVS Sensitivity (0.3-1.5, Default: 0.7):
How much volatility affects scaling (power-law exponent)
0.3 = Conservative, heavily dampens vol impact (cube root)
0.5 = Moderate dampening (square root)
0.7 = Balanced response (recommended)
1.0 = Linear, full 1:1 vol response
1.5 = Aggressive, amplified response (exponential)
🔬 Walk-Forward Optimization Settings
Enable WFO (Default: ON):
Out-of-sample validation to prevent overfitting
Highly recommended to leave ON
OFF only for testing or if you want unvalidated strategies
Training Window (100-500, Default: 250):
Bars for in-sample optimization
100 = fast validation, less data (risky)
250 = balanced (recommended) - about 1-2 months on daily, 1-2 weeks on 15min
500 = patient validation, more data (conservative)
Testing Window (30-200, Default: 75):
Bars for out-of-sample validation
Should be ~30% of training window
30 = minimal test (fast validation)
75 = balanced (recommended)
200 = extensive test (very conservative)
Min Trades for Validation (3-15, Default: 5):
Required trades in BOTH training AND testing periods
3 = minimal sample (risky, fast validation)
5 = balanced (recommended)
10+ = conservative (slow validation, high confidence)
WFO Efficiency Threshold (0.3-0.9, Default: 0.55):
Minimum test/train performance ratio required
0.30 = Very loose (test must be 30% as good as training)
0.55 = Balanced (recommended) - test must be 55% as good
0.70+ = Strict (test must closely match training)
Higher = fewer validated strategies, lower risk of overfitting
🎨 Premium Visuals Settings
Visual Theme:
Neon Genesis: Cyberpunk aesthetic (cyan/magenta/purple)
Carbon Fiber: Industrial look (blue/red/gray)
Quantum Blue: Quantum computing (blue/purple/pink)
Aurora: Northern lights (teal/orange/purple)
⚡ Gradient Probability Cloud (Default: ON):
Multi-layer gradient showing signal buildup
Turn OFF if chart lags or for cleaner look
Cloud Gradient Layers (3-15, Default: 7):
More layers = smoother gradient, more CPU intensive
Fewer layers = faster, blockier appearance
🎗️ Population Fitness Ribbon (Default: ON):
Histogram showing fitness distribution
Turn OFF for cleaner chart
Ribbon Layers (5-20, Default: 10):
More layers = finer fitness detail
Fewer layers = simpler histogram
⭕ Signal Confidence Halo (Default: ON):
Circular indicator around entry signals
Size/brightness scales with probability
Minimal performance cost
🔬 Evolution Event Markers (Default: ON):
Diamond (spawn) and X (cull) markers
Shows genetic algorithm activity
Minimal performance cost
🎯 Stop/Target Lines (Default: ON):
Shows shadow portfolio stop/target levels
Turn OFF for cleaner chart (recommended for screenshots/presentations)
📊 Enhanced Dashboard (Default: ON):
Comprehensive metrics panel
Should stay ON unless you want zero overlays
🔍 Diagnostics Panel (Default: OFF):
Detailed signal rejection tracking
Turn ON when optimizing settings
Turn OFF during normal use (slight performance cost)
📈 USAGE WORKFLOW - HOW TO USE THIS INDICATOR
Phase 1: Initial Setup & Learning
Add AGE to your chart
Recommended timeframes: 15min, 30min, 1H (best signal-to-noise ratio)
Works on: 5min (day trading), 4H (swing trading), Daily (position trading)
Load 1000+ bars for sufficient evolution history
Let the population evolve (100+ bars minimum)
First 50 bars: Random exploration, poor results expected
Bars 50-150: Population converging, fitness improving
Bars 150+: Stable performance, validated strategies emerging
Watch the dashboard metrics
Population should grow toward max capacity
Generation number should advance regularly
Validated strategies counter should increase
Best fitness should trend upward toward 0.50-0.70 range
Observe evolution markers
Diamond markers (cyan) = new strategies spawning
X markers (red) = weak strategies being culled
Frequent early activity = healthy evolution
Activity slowing = population stabilizing
Be patient. Evolution takes time. Don't judge performance before 150+ bars.
Phase 2: Signal Observation
Watch signals form
Gradient cloud builds up 2-3 bars before entry
Cloud brightness = probability strength
Cloud thickness = signal persistence
Check signal quality
Look at confidence halo size when entry marker appears
Large bright halo = elite setup (85%+)
Medium halo = strong setup (75-85%)
Small halo = good setup (65-75%)
Verify market conditions
Check trend EMA color (green = uptrend, red = downtrend, gray = choppy)
Check background tint (green = trending, red = volatile, clear = choppy)
Trending background + aligned signal = ideal conditions
Review dashboard signal status
Current Signal column shows:
Status (Long/Short/Forming/Waiting)
Confidence % (actual probability value)
Quality assessment (Elite/Strong/Good)
Confluence score (2/3 or 3/3 preferred)
Only signals meeting ALL quality gates appear on chart. If you're not seeing signals, population is either still learning or market conditions aren't suitable.
Phase 3: Manual Trading Execution
When Long Signal Fires:
Verify confidence level (dashboard or halo size)
Confirm trend alignment (EMA sloping up, green color)
Check regime (preferably trending or choppy, avoid volatile)
Enter long manually on your broker platform
Set stop loss at displayed stop line level (if lines enabled), or use your own risk management
Set take profit at displayed target line level, or trail manually
Monitor position - exit if X marker appears (signal reversal)
When Short Signal Fires:
Same verification process
Confirm downtrend (EMA sloping down, red color)
Enter short manually
Use displayed stop/target levels or your own
AGE tells you WHEN and HOW CONFIDENT. You decide WHETHER and HOW MUCH.
Phase 4: Set Up Alerts (Never Miss a Signal)
Right-click on indicator name in legend
Select "Add Alert"
Choose condition:
"AGE Long" = Long entry signal fired
"AGE Short" = Short entry signal fired
"AGE Exit" = Position reversal/exit signal
Set notification method:
Sound alert (popup on chart)
Email notification
Webhook to phone/trading platform
Mobile app push notification
Name the alert (e.g., "AGE BTCUSD 15min Long")
Save alert
Recommended: Set alerts for both long and short, enable mobile push notifications. You'll get alerted in real-time even if not watching charts.
Phase 5: Monitor Population Health
Weekly Review:
Check dashboard Population column:
Active count should be near max (6-8 of 8)
Validated count should be >50% of active
Generation should be advancing (1-2 per week typical)
Check dashboard Performance column:
Aggregate win rate should be >50% (target: 55-65%)
Total P&L should be positive (may fluctuate)
Best fitness should be >0.50 (target: 0.55-0.70)
MAS should be declining slowly (normal adaptation)
Check Active Strategy column:
Selected strategy should be validated (✓ VAL)
Personal fitness should match best fitness
Trade count should be accumulating
Win rate should be >50%
Warning Signs:
Zero validated strategies after 300+ bars = settings too strict or market unsuitable
Best fitness stuck <0.30 = population struggling, consider parameter adjustment
No spawning/culling for 200+ bars = evolution stalled (may be optimal or need reset)
Aggregate win rate <45% sustained = system not working on this instrument/timeframe
Health Check Pass:
50%+ strategies validated
Best fitness >0.50
Aggregate win rate >52%
Regular spawn/cull activity
Selected strategy validated
Phase 6: Optimization (If Needed)
Enable Diagnostics Panel (bottom-right) for data-driven tuning:
Problem: Too Few Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 8 (4%)
⨯ Probability: 140 (70%)
Solutions:
Lower min probability: 65% → 60% or 55%
Reduce min confluence: 2 → 1
Lower base persistence: 2 → 1
Increase mutation rate temporarily to explore new genes
Check if regime filter is blocking signals (⨯ Regime high?)
Problem: Too Many False Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 90 (45%)
Win rate: 42%
Solutions:
Raise min probability: 65% → 70% or 75%
Increase min confluence: 2 → 3
Raise base persistence: 2 → 3
Enable WFO if disabled (validates strategies before use)
Check if volume filter is being ignored (⨯ Volume low?)
Problem: Counter-Trend Losses
⨯ Trend: 5 (only 5% rejected)
Losses often occur against trend
Solutions:
System should already filter trend opposition
May need stronger trend requirement
Consider only taking signals aligned with higher timeframe trend
Use longer trend EMA (50 → 100)
Problem: Volatile Market Whipsaws
⨯ Regime: 100 (50% rejected by volatile regime)
Still getting stopped out frequently
Solutions:
System is correctly blocking volatile signals
Losses happening because vol filter isn't strict enough
Consider not trading during volatile periods (respect the regime)
Or disable regime filter and accept higher risk
Optimization Workflow:
Enable diagnostics
Run 200+ bars with current settings
Analyze rejection patterns and win rate
Make ONE change at a time (scientific method)
Re-run 200+ bars and compare results
Keep change if improvement, revert if worse
Disable diagnostics when satisfied
Never change multiple parameters at once - you won't know what worked.
Phase 7: Multi-Instrument Deployment
AGE learns independently on each chart:
Recommended Strategy:
Deploy AGE on 3-5 different instruments
Different asset classes ideal (e.g., ES futures, EURUSD, BTCUSD, SPY, Gold)
Each learns optimal strategies for that instrument's personality
Take signals from all 5 charts
Natural diversification reduces overall risk
Why This Works:
When one market is choppy, others may be trending
Different instruments respond to different news/catalysts
Portfolio-level win rate more stable than single-instrument
Evolution explores different parameter spaces on each chart
Setup:
Same settings across all charts (or customize if preferred)
Set alerts for all
Take every validated signal across all instruments
Position size based on total account (don't overleverage any single signal)
⚠️ REALISTIC EXPECTATIONS - CRITICAL READING
What AGE Can Do
✅ Generate probability-weighted signals using genetic algorithms
✅ Evolve strategies in real-time through natural selection
✅ Validate strategies on out-of-sample data (walk-forward optimization)
✅ Adapt to changing market conditions automatically over time
✅ Provide comprehensive metrics on population health and signal quality
✅ Work on any instrument, any timeframe, any broker
✅ Improve over time as weak strategies are culled and fit strategies breed
What AGE Cannot Do
❌ Win every trade (typical win rate: 55-65% at best)
❌ Predict the future with certainty (markets are probabilistic, not deterministic)
❌ Work perfectly from bar 1 (needs 100-150 bars to learn and stabilize)
❌ Guarantee profits under all market conditions
❌ Replace your trading discipline and risk management
❌ Execute trades automatically (this is an indicator, not a strategy)
❌ Prevent all losses (drawdowns are normal and expected)
❌ Adapt instantly to regime changes (re-learning takes 50-100 bars)
Performance Realities
Typical Performance After Evolution Stabilizes (150+ bars):
Win Rate: 55-65% (excellent for trend-following systems)
Profit Factor: 1.5-2.5 (realistic for validated strategies)
Signal Frequency: 5-15 signals per 100 bars (quality over quantity)
Drawdown Periods: 20-40% of time in equity retracement (normal trading reality)
Max Consecutive Losses: 5-8 losses possible even with 60% win rate (probability says this is normal)
Evolution Timeline:
Bars 0-50: Random exploration, learning phase - poor results expected, don't judge yet
Bars 50-150: Population converging, fitness climbing - results improving
Bars 150-300: Stable performance, most strategies validated - consistent results
Bars 300+: Mature population, optimal genes dominant - best results
Market Condition Dependency:
Trending Markets: AGE excels - clear directional moves, high-probability setups
Choppy Markets: AGE struggles - fewer signals generated, lower win rate
Volatile Markets: AGE cautious - higher rejection rate, wider stops, fewer trades
Market Regime Changes:
When market shifts from trending to choppy overnight
Validated strategies can become temporarily invalidated
AGE will adapt through evolution, but not instantly
Expect 50-100 bar re-learning period after major regime shifts
Fitness may temporarily drop then recover
This is NOT a holy grail. It's a sophisticated signal generator that learns and adapts using genetic algorithms. Your success depends on:
Patience during learning periods (don't abandon after 3 losses)
Proper position sizing (risk 0.5-2% per trade, not 10%)
Following signals consistently (cherry-picking defeats statistical edge)
Not abandoning system prematurely (give it 200+ bars minimum)
Understanding probability (60% win rate means 40% of trades WILL lose)
Respecting market conditions (trending = trade more, choppy = trade less)
Managing emotions (AGE is emotionless, you need to be too)
Expected Drawdowns:
Single-strategy max DD: 10-20% of equity (normal)
Portfolio across multiple instruments: 5-15% (diversification helps)
Losing streaks: 3-5 consecutive losses expected periodically
No indicator eliminates risk. AGE manages risk through:
Quality gates (rejecting low-probability signals)
Confluence requirements (multi-indicator confirmation)
Persistence requirements (no knee-jerk reactions)
Regime awareness (reduced trading in chaos)
Walk-forward validation (preventing overfitting)
But it cannot prevent all losses. That's inherent to trading.
🔧 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Platform: TradingView Pine Script v5
Indicator Type: Overlay indicator (plots on price chart)
Execution Type: Signals only - no automatic order placement
Computational Load:
Moderate to High (genetic algorithms + shadow portfolios)
8 strategies × shadow portfolio simulation = significant computation
Premium visuals add additional load (gradient cloud, fitness ribbon)
TradingView Resource Limits (Built-in Caps):
Max Bars Back: 500 (sufficient for WFO and evolution)
Max Labels: 100 (plenty for entry/exit markers)
Max Lines: 150 (adequate for stop/target lines)
Max Boxes: 50 (not heavily used)
Max Polylines: 100 (confidence halos)
Recommended Chart Settings:
Timeframe: 15min to 1H (optimal signal/noise balance)
5min: Works but noisier, more signals
4H/Daily: Works but fewer signals
Bars Loaded: 1000+ (ensures sufficient evolution history)
Replay Mode: Excellent for testing without risk
Performance Optimization Tips:
Disable gradient cloud if chart lags (most CPU intensive visual)
Disable fitness ribbon if still laggy
Reduce cloud layers from 7 to 3
Reduce ribbon layers from 10 to 5
Turn off diagnostics panel unless actively tuning
Close other heavy indicators to free resources
Browser/Platform Compatibility:
Works on all modern browsers (Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Edge)
Mobile app supported (full functionality on phone/tablet)
Desktop app supported (best performance)
Web version supported (may be slower on older computers)
Data Requirements:
Real-time or delayed data both work
No special data feeds required
Works with TradingView's standard data
Historical + live data seamlessly integrated
🎓 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS
AGE synthesizes advanced concepts from multiple disciplines:
Evolutionary Computation
Genetic Algorithms (Holland, 1975): Population-based optimization through natural selection metaphor
Tournament Selection: Fitness-based parent selection with diversity preservation
Crossover Operators: Fitness-weighted gene recombination from two parents
Mutation Operators: Random gene perturbation for exploration of new parameter space
Elitism: Preservation of top N performers to prevent loss of best solutions
Adaptive Parameters: Different mutation rates for historical vs. live phases
Technical Analysis
Support/Resistance: Price structure within swing ranges
Trend Following: EMA-based directional bias
Momentum Analysis: RSI, ROC, MACD composite indicators
Volatility Analysis: ATR-based risk scaling
Volume Confirmation: Trade activity validation
Information Theory
Shannon Entropy (1948): Quantification of market order vs. disorder
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Directional information vs. random walk
Information Content: How much "information" a price move contains
Statistics & Probability
Walk-Forward Analysis: Rolling in-sample/out-of-sample optimization
Out-of-Sample Validation: Testing on unseen data to prevent overfitting
Monte Carlo Principles: Shadow portfolio simulation with realistic execution
Expectancy Theory: Win rate × avg win - loss rate × avg loss
Probability Distributions: Signal confidence quantification
Risk Management
ATR-Based Stops: Volatility-normalized risk per trade
Volatility Regime Detection: Market state classification (trending/choppy/volatile)
Drawdown Control: Peak-to-trough equity measurement
R-Multiple Normalization: Performance measurement in risk units
Machine Learning Concepts
Online Learning: Continuous adaptation as new data arrives
Fitness Functions: Multi-objective optimization (win rate + expectancy + drawdown)
Exploration vs. Exploitation: Balance between trying new strategies and using proven ones
Overfitting Prevention: Walk-forward validation as regularization
Novel Contribution:
AGE is the first TradingView indicator to apply genetic algorithms to real-time indicator parameter optimization while maintaining strict anti-overfitting controls through walk-forward validation.
Most "adaptive" indicators simply recalibrate lookback periods or thresholds. AGE evolves entirely new strategies through competitive selection - it's not parameter tuning, it's Darwinian evolution of trading logic itself.
The combination of:
Genetic algorithm population management
Shadow portfolio simulation for realistic fitness evaluation
Walk-forward validation to prevent overfitting
Multi-indicator confluence for signal quality
Dynamic volatility scaling for adaptive risk
...creates a system that genuinely learns and improves over time while avoiding the curse of curve-fitting that plagues most optimization approaches.
🏗️ DEVELOPMENT NOTES
This project represents months of intensive development, facing significant technical challenges:
Challenge 1: Making Genetics Actually Work
Early versions spawned garbage strategies that polluted the gene pool:
Random gene combinations produced nonsensical parameter sets
Weak strategies survived too long, dragging down population
No clear convergence toward optimal solutions
Solution:
Comprehensive fitness scoring (4 factors: win rate, P&L, expectancy, drawdown)
Elite preservation (top 2 always protected)
Walk-forward validation (unproven strategies penalized 30%)
Tournament selection (fitness-weighted breeding)
Adaptive culling (MAS decay creates increasing selection pressure)
Challenge 2: Balancing Evolution Speed vs. Stability
Too fast = population chaos, no convergence. Too slow = can't adapt to regime changes.
Solution:
Dual-phase timing: Fast evolution during historical (30/60 bar intervals), slow during live (200/400 bar intervals)
Adaptive mutation rates: 20% historical, 8% live
Spawn/cull ratio: Always 2:1 to prevent population collapse
Challenge 3: Shadow Portfolio Accuracy
Needed realistic trade simulation without lookahead bias:
Can't peek at future bars for exits
Must track multiple portfolios simultaneously
Stop/target checks must use bar's high/low correctly
Solution:
Entry on close (realistic)
Exit checks on current bar's high/low (realistic)
Independent position tracking per strategy
Cooldown periods to prevent unrealistic rapid re-entry
ATR-normalized P&L (R-multiples) for fair comparison across volatility regimes
Challenge 4: Pine Script Compilation Limits
Hit TradingView's execution limits multiple times:
Too many array operations
Too many variables
Too complex conditional logic
Solution:
Optimized data structures (single DNA array instead of 8 separate arrays)
Minimal visual overlays (only essential plots)
Efficient fitness calculations (vectorized where possible)
Strategic use of barstate.islast to minimize dashboard updates
Challenge 5: Walk-Forward Implementation
Standard WFO is difficult in Pine Script:
Can't easily "roll forward" through historical data
Can't re-optimize strategies mid-stream
Must work in real-time streaming environment
Solution:
Age-based phase detection (first 250 bars = training, next 75 = testing)
Separate metric tracking for train vs. test
Efficiency calculation at fixed interval (after test period completes)
Validation flag persists for strategy lifetime
Challenge 6: Signal Quality Control
Early versions generated too many signals with poor win rates:
Single indicators produced excessive noise
No trend alignment
No regime awareness
Instant entries on single-bar spikes
Solution:
Three-layer confluence system (entropy + momentum + structure)
Minimum 2-of-3 agreement requirement
Trend alignment checks (penalty for counter-trend)
Regime-based probability adjustments
Persistence requirements (signals must hold multiple bars)
Volume confirmation
Quality gate (probability + confluence thresholds)
The Result
A system that:
Truly evolves (not just parameter sweeps)
Truly validates (out-of-sample testing)
Truly adapts (ongoing competition and breeding)
Stays within TradingView's platform constraints
Provides institutional-quality signals
Maintains transparency (full metrics dashboard)
Development time: 3+ months of iterative refinement
Lines of code: ~1500 (highly optimized)
Test instruments: ES, NQ, EURUSD, BTCUSD, SPY, AAPL
Test timeframes: 5min, 15min, 1H, Daily
🎯 FINAL WORDS
The Adaptive Genesis Engine is not just another indicator - it's a living system that learns, adapts, and improves through the same principles that drive biological evolution. Every bar it observes adds to its experience. Every strategy it spawns explores new parameter combinations. Every strategy it culls removes weakness from the gene pool.
This is evolution in action on your charts.
You're not getting a static formula locked in time. You're getting a system that thinks , that competes , that survives through natural selection. The strongest strategies rise to the top. The weakest die. The gene pool improves generation after generation.
AGE doesn't claim to predict the future - it adapts to whatever the future brings. When markets shift from trending to choppy, from calm to volatile, from bullish to bearish - AGE evolves new strategies suited to the new regime.
Use it on any instrument. Any timeframe. Any market condition. AGE will adapt.
This indicator gives you the pure signal intelligence. How you choose to act on it - position sizing, risk management, execution discipline - that's your responsibility. AGE tells you when and how confident . You decide whether and how much .
Trust the process. Respect the evolution. Let Darwin work.
"In markets, as in nature, it is not the strongest strategies that survive, nor the most intelligent - but those most responsive to change."
Taking you to school. — Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
— Happy Holiday's
Mars Signals - Ultimate Institutional Suite v3.0(Joker)Comprehensive Trading Manual
Mars Signals – Ultimate Institutional Suite v3.0 (Joker)
## Chapter 1 – Philosophy & System Architecture
This script is not a simple “buy/sell” indicator.
Mars Signals – UIS v3.0 (Joker) is designed as an institutional-style analytical assistant that layers several methodologies into a single, coherent framework.
The system is built on four core pillars:
1. Smart Money Concepts (SMC)
- Detection of Order Blocks (professional demand/supply zones).
- Detection of Fair Value Gaps (FVGs) (price imbalances).
2. Smart DCA Strategy
- Combination of RSI and Bollinger Bands
- Identifies statistically discounted zones for scaling into spot positions or exiting shorts.
3. Volume Profile (Visible Range Simulation)
- Distribution of volume by price, not by time.
- Identification of POC (Point of Control) and high-/low-volume areas.
4. Wyckoff Helper – Spring
- Detection of bear traps, liquidity grabs, and sharp bullish reversals.
All four pillars feed into a Confluence Engine (Scoring System).
The final output is presented in the Dashboard, with a clear, human-readable signal:
- STRONG LONG 🚀
- WEAK LONG ↗
- NEUTRAL / WAIT
- WEAK SHORT ↘
- STRONG SHORT 🩸
This allows the trader to see *how many* and *which* layers of the system support a bullish or bearish bias at any given time.
## Chapter 2 – Settings Overview
### 2.1 General & Dashboard Group
- Show Dashboard Panel (`show_dash`)
Turns the dashboard table in the corner of the chart ON/OFF.
- Show Signal Recommendation (`show_rec`)
- If enabled, the textual signal (STRONG LONG, WEAK SHORT, etc.) is displayed.
- If disabled, you only see feature status (ON/OFF) and the current price.
- Dashboard Position (`dash_pos`)
Determines where the dashboard appears on the chart:
- `Top Right`
- `Bottom Right`
- `Top Left`
### 2.2 Smart Money (SMC) Group
- Enable SMC Strategy (`show_smc`)
Globally enables or disables the Order Block and FVG logic.
- Order Block Pivot Lookback (`ob_period`)
Main parameter for detecting key pivot highs/lows (swing points).
- Default value: 5
- Concept:
A bar is considered a pivot low if its low is lower than the lows of the previous 5 and the next 5 bars.
Similarly, a pivot high has a high higher than the previous 5 and the next 5 bars.
These pivots are used as anchors for Order Blocks.
- Increasing `ob_period`:
- Fewer levels.
- But levels tend to be more significant and reliable.
- In highly volatile markets (major news, war events, FOMC, etc.),
using values 7–10 is recommended to filter out weak levels.
- Show Fair Value Gaps (`show_fvg`)
Enables/disables the drawing of FVG zones (imbalances).
- Bullish OB Color (`c_ob_bull`)
- Color of Bullish Order Blocks (Demand Zones).
- Default: semi-transparent green (transparency ≈ 80).
- Bearish OB Color (`c_ob_bear`)
- Color of Bearish Order Blocks (Supply Zones).
- Default: semi-transparent red.
- Bullish FVG Color (`c_fvg_bull`)
- Color of Bullish FVG (upward imbalance), typically yellow.
- Bearish FVG Color (`c_fvg_bear`)
- Color of Bearish FVG (downward imbalance), typically purple.
### 2.3 Smart DCA Strategy Group
- Enable DCA Zones (`show_dca`)
Enables the Smart DCA logic and visual labels.
- RSI Length (`rsi_len`)
Lookback period for RSI (default: 14).
- Shorter → more sensitive, more noise.
- Longer → fewer signals, higher reliability.
- Bollinger Bands Length (`bb_len`)
Moving average period for Bollinger Bands (default: 20).
- BB Multiplier (`bb_mult`)
Standard deviation multiplier for Bollinger Bands (default: 2.0).
- For extremely volatile markets, values like 2.5–3.0 can be used so that only extreme deviations trigger a DCA signal.
### 2.4 Volume Profile (Visible Range Sim) Group
- Show Volume Profile (`show_vp`)
Enables the simulated Volume Profile bars on the right side of the chart.
- Volume Lookback Bars (`vp_lookback`)
Number of bars used to compute the Volume Profile (default: 150).
- Higher values → broader historical context, heavier computation.
- Row Count (`vp_rows`)
Number of vertical price segments (rows) to divide the total price range into (default: 30).
- Width (%) (`vp_width`)
Relative width of each volume bar as a percentage.
In the code, bar widths are scaled relative to the row with the maximum volume.
> Technical note: Volume Profile calculations are executed only on the last bar (`barstate.islast`) to keep the script performant even on higher timeframes.
### 2.5 Wyckoff Helper Group
- Show Wyckoff Events (`show_wyc`)
Enables detection and plotting of Wyckoff Spring events.
- Volume MA Length (`vol_ma_len`)
Length of the moving average on volume.
A bar is considered to have Ultra Volume if its volume is more than 2× the volume MA.
## Chapter 3 – Smart Money Strategy (Order Blocks & FVG)
### 3.1 What Is an Order Block?
An Order Block (OB) represents the footprint of large institutional orders:
- Bullish Order Block (Demand Zone)
The last selling region (bearish candle/cluster) before a strong upward move.
- Bearish Order Block (Supply Zone)
The last buying region (bullish candle/cluster) before a strong downward move.
Institutions and large players place heavy orders in these regions. Typical price behavior:
- Price moves away from the zone.
- Later returns to the same zone to fill unfilled orders.
- Then continues the larger trend.
In the script:
- If `pl` (pivot low) forms → a Bullish OB is created.
- If `ph` (pivot high) forms → a Bearish OB is created.
The box is drawn:
- From `bar_index ` to `bar_index`.
- Between `low ` and `high `.
- `extend=extend.right` extends the OB into the future, so it acts as a dynamic support/resistance zone.
- Only the last 4 OB boxes are kept to avoid clutter.
### 3.2 Order Block Color Guide
- Semi-transparent Green (`c_ob_bull`)
- Represents a Bullish Order Block (Demand Zone).
- Interpretation: a price region with a high probability of bullish reaction.
- Semi-transparent Red (`c_ob_bear`)
- Represents a Bearish Order Block (Supply Zone).
- Interpretation: a price region with a high probability of bearish reaction.
Overlap (Multiple OBs in the Same Area)
When two or more Order Blocks overlap:
- The shared area appears visually denser/stronger.
- This suggests higher order density.
- Such zones can be treated as high-priority levels for entries, exits, and stop-loss placement.
### 3.3 Demand/Supply Logic in the Scoring Engine
is_in_demand = low <= ta.lowest(low, 20)
is_in_supply = high >= ta.highest(high, 20)
- If current price is near the lowest lows of the last 20 bars, it is considered in a Demand Zone → positive impact on score.
- If current price is near the highest highs of the last 20 bars, it is considered in a Supply Zone → negative impact on score.
This logic complements Order Blocks and helps the Dashboard distinguish whether:
- Market is currently in a statistically cheap (long-friendly) area, or
- In a statistically expensive (short-friendly) area.
### 3.4 Fair Value Gaps (FVG)
#### Concept
When the market moves aggressively:
- Some price levels are skipped and never traded.
- A gap between wicks/shadows of consecutive candles appears.
- These regions are called Fair Value Gaps (FVGs) or Imbalances.
The market generally “dislikes” imbalance and often:
- Returns to these zones in the future.
- Fills the gap (rebalance).
- Then resumes its dominant direction.
#### Implementation in the Code
Bullish FVG (Yellow)
fvg_bull_cond = show_smc and show_fvg and low > high and close > high
if fvg_bull_cond
box.new(bar_index , high , bar_index, low, ...)
Core condition:
`low > high ` → the current low is above the high of two bars ago; the space between them is an untraded gap.
Bearish FVG (Purple)
fvg_bear_cond = show_smc and show_fvg and high < low and close < low
if fvg_bear_cond
box.new(bar_index , low , bar_index, high, ...)
Core condition:
`high < low ` → the current high is below the low of two bars ago; again a price gap exists.
#### FVG Color Guide
- Transparent Yellow (`c_fvg_bull`) – Bullish FVG
Often acts like a magnet for price:
- Price tends to retrace into this zone,
- Fill the imbalance,
- And then continue higher.
- Transparent Purple (`c_fvg_bear`) – Bearish FVG
Price tends to:
- Retrace upward into the purple area,
- Fill the imbalance,
- And then resume downward movement.
#### Trading with FVGs
- FVGs are *not* standalone entry signals.
They are best used as:
- Targets (take-profit zones), or
- Reaction areas where you expect a pause or reversal.
Examples:
- If you are long, a bearish FVG above is often an excellent take-profit zone.
- If you are short, a bullish FVG below is often a good cover/exit zone.
### 3.5 Core SMC Trading Templates
#### Reversal Long
1. Price trades down into a green Order Block (Demand Zone).
2. A bullish confirmation candle (Close > Open) forms inside or just above the OB.
3. If this zone is close to or aligned with a bullish FVG (yellow), the signal is reinforced.
4. Entry:
- At the close of the confirmation candle, or
- Using a limit order near the upper boundary of the OB.
5. Stop-loss:
- Slightly below the OB.
- If the OB is broken decisively and price consolidates below it, the zone loses validity.
6. Targets:
- The next FVG,
- Or the next red Order Block (Supply Zone) above.
#### Reversal Short
The mirror scenario:
- Price rallies into a red Order Block (Supply).
- A bearish confirmation candle forms (Close < Open).
- FVG/premium structure above can act as a confluence.
- Stop-loss goes above the OB.
- Targets: lower FVGs or subsequent green OBs below.
## Chapter 4 – Smart DCA Strategy (RSI + Bollinger Bands)
### 4.1 Smart DCA Concept
- Classic DCA = buying at fixed time intervals regardless of price.
- Smart DCA = scaling in only when:
- Price is statistically cheaper than usual, and
- The market is in a clear oversold condition.
Code logic:
rsi_val = ta.rsi(close, rsi_len)
= ta.bb(close, bb_len, bb_mult)
dca_buy = show_dca and rsi_val < 30 and close < bb_lower
dca_sell = show_dca and rsi_val > 70 and close > bb_upper
Conditions:
- DCA Buy – Smart Scale-In Zone
- RSI < 30 → oversold.
- Close < lower Bollinger Band → price has broken below its typical volatility envelope.
- DCA Sell – Overbought/Distribution Zone
- RSI > 70 → overbought.
- Close > upper Bollinger Band → price is extended far above the mean.
### 4.2 Visual Representation on the Chart
- Green “DCA” Label Below Candle
- Shape: `labelup`.
- Color: lime background, white text.
- Meaning: statistically attractive level for laddered spot entries or short exits.
- Red “SELL” Label Above Candle
- Warning that the market is in an extended, overbought condition.
- Suitable for profit-taking on longs or considering short entries (with proper confluence and risk management).
- Light Green Background (`bgcolor`)
- When `dca_buy` is true, the candle background turns very light green (high transparency).
- This helps visually identify DCA Zones across the chart at a glance.
### 4.3 Practical Use in Trading
#### Spot Trading
Used to build a better average entry price:
- Every time a DCA label appears, allocate a fixed portion of capital (e.g., 2–5%).
- Combining DCA signals with:
- Green OBs (Demand Zones), and/or
- The Volume Profile POC
makes the zone structurally more important.
#### Futures Trading
- Longs
- Use DCA Buy signals as low-risk zones for opening or adding to longs when:
- Price is inside a green OB, or
- The Dashboard already leans LONG.
- Shorts
- Use DCA Sell signals as:
- Exit zones for longs, or
- Areas to initiate shorts with stops above structural highs.
## Chapter 5 – Volume Profile (Visible Range Simulation)
### 5.1 Concept
Traditional volume (histogram under the chart) shows volume over time.
Volume Profile shows volume by price level:
- At which prices has the highest trading activity occurred?
- Where did buyers and sellers agree the most (High Volume Nodes – HVNs)?
- Where did price move quickly due to low participation (Low Volume Nodes – LVNs)?
### 5.2 Implementation in the Script
Executed only when `show_vp` is enabled and on the last bar:
1. The last `vp_lookback` bars (default 150) are processed.
2. The minimum low and maximum high over this window define the price range.
3. This price range is divided into `vp_rows` segments (e.g., 30 rows).
4. For each row:
- All bars are scanned.
- If the mid-price `(high + low ) / 2` falls inside a row, that bar’s volume is added to the row total.
5. The row with the greatest volume is stored as `max_vol_idx` (the POC row).
6. For each row, a volume box is drawn on the right side of the chart.
### 5.3 Color Scheme
- Semi-transparent Orange
- The row with the maximum volume – the Point of Control (POC).
- Represents the strongest support/resistance level from a volume perspective.
- Semi-transparent Blue
- Other volume rows.
- The taller the bar → the higher the volume → the stronger the interest at that price band.
### 5.4 Trading Applications
- If price is above POC and retraces back into it:
→ POC often acts as support, suitable for long setups.
- If price is below POC and rallies into it:
→ POC often acts as resistance, suitable for short setups or profit-taking.
HVNs (Tall Blue Bars)
- Represent areas of equilibrium where the market has spent time and traded heavily.
- Price tends to consolidate here before choosing a direction.
LVNs (Short or Nearly Empty Bars)
- Represent low participation zones.
- Price often moves quickly through these areas – useful for targeting fast moves.
## Chapter 6 – Wyckoff Helper – Spring
### 6.1 Spring Concept
In the Wyckoff framework:
- A Spring is a false break of support.
- The market briefly trades below a well-defined support level, triggers stop losses,
then sharply reverses upward as institutional buyers absorb liquidity.
This movement:
- Clears out weak hands (retail sellers).
- Provides large players with liquidity to enter long positions.
- Often initiates a new uptrend.
### 6.2 Code Logic
Conditions for a Spring:
1. The current low is lower than the lowest low of the previous 50 bars
→ apparent break of a long-standing support.
2. The bar closes bullish (Close > Open)
→ the breakdown was rejected.
3. Volume is significantly elevated:
→ `volume > 2 × volume_MA` (Ultra Volume).
When all conditions are met and `show_wyc` is enabled:
- A pink diamond is plotted below the bar,
- With the label “Spring” – one of the strongest long signals in this system.
### 6.3 Trading Use
- After a valid Spring, markets frequently enter a meaningful bullish phase.
- The highest quality setups occur when:
- The Spring forms inside a green Order Block, and
- Near or on the Volume Profile POC.
Entries:
- At the close of the Spring bar, or
- On the first pullback into the mid-range of the Spring candle.
Stop-loss:
- Slightly below the Spring’s lowest point (wick low plus a small buffer).
## Chapter 7 – Confluence Engine & Dashboard
### 7.1 Scoring Logic
For each bar, the script:
1. Resets `score` to 0.
2. Adjusts the score based on different signals.
SMC Contribution
if show_smc
if is_in_demand
score += 1
if is_in_supply
score -= 1
- Being in Demand → `+1`
- Being in Supply → `-1`
DCA Contribution
if show_dca
if dca_buy
score += 2
if dca_sell
score -= 2
- DCA Buy → `+2` (strong, statistically driven long signal)
- DCA Sell → `-2`
Wyckoff Spring Contribution
if show_wyc
if wyc_spring
score += 2
- Spring → `+2` (entry of strong money)
### 7.2 Mapping Score to Dashboard Signal
- score ≥ 2 → STRONG LONG 🚀
Multiple bullish conditions aligned.
- score = 1 → WEAK LONG ↗
Some bullish bias, but only one layer clearly positive.
- score = 0 → NEUTRAL / WAIT
Rough balance between buying and selling forces; staying flat is usually preferable.
- score = -1 → WEAK SHORT ↘
Mild bearish bias, suited for cautious or short-term plays.
- score ≤ -2 → STRONG SHORT 🩸
Convergence of several bearish signals.
### 7.3 Dashboard Structure
The dashboard is a two-column table:
- Row 0
- Column 0: `"Mars Signals"` – black background, white text.
- Column 1: `"UIS v3.0"` – black background, yellow text.
- Row 1
- Column 0: `"Price:"` (light grey background).
- Column 1: current closing price (`close`) with a semi-transparent blue background.
- Row 2
- Column 0: `"SMC:"`
- Column 1:
- `"ON"` (green) if `show_smc = true`
- `"OFF"` (grey) otherwise.
- Row 3
- Column 0: `"DCA:"`
- Column 1:
- `"ON"` (green) if `show_dca = true`
- `"OFF"` (grey) otherwise.
- Row 4
- Column 0: `"Signal:"`
- Column 1: signal text (`status_txt`) with background color `status_col`
(green, red, teal, maroon, etc.)
- If `show_rec = false`, these cells are cleared.
## Chapter 8 – Visual Legend (Colors, Shapes & Actions)
For quick reading inside TradingView, the visual elements are described line by line instead of a table.
Chart Element: Green Box
Color / Shape: Transparent green rectangle
Core Meaning: Bullish Order Block (Demand Zone)
Suggested Trader Response: Look for longs, Smart DCA adds, closing or reducing shorts.
Chart Element: Red Box
Color / Shape: Transparent red rectangle
Core Meaning: Bearish Order Block (Supply Zone)
Suggested Trader Response: Look for shorts, or take profit on existing longs.
Chart Element: Yellow Area
Color / Shape: Transparent yellow zone
Core Meaning: Bullish FVG / upside imbalance
Suggested Trader Response: Short take-profit zone or expected rebalance area.
Chart Element: Purple Area
Color / Shape: Transparent purple zone
Core Meaning: Bearish FVG / downside imbalance
Suggested Trader Response: Long take-profit zone or temporary supply region.
Chart Element: Green "DCA" Label
Color / Shape: Green label with white text, plotted below the candle
Core Meaning: Smart ladder-in buy zone, DCA buy opportunity
Suggested Trader Response: Spot DCA entry, partial short exit.
Chart Element: Red "SELL" Label
Color / Shape: Red label with white text, plotted above the candle
Core Meaning: Overbought / distribution zone
Suggested Trader Response: Take profit on longs, consider initiating shorts.
Chart Element: Light Green Background (bgcolor)
Color / Shape: Very transparent light-green background behind bars
Core Meaning: Active DCA Buy zone
Suggested Trader Response: Treat as a discount zone on the chart.
Chart Element: Orange Bar on Right
Color / Shape: Transparent orange horizontal bar in the volume profile
Core Meaning: POC – price with highest traded volume
Suggested Trader Response: Strong support or resistance; key reference level.
Chart Element: Blue Bars on Right
Color / Shape: Transparent blue horizontal bars in the volume profile
Core Meaning: Other volume levels, showing high-volume and low-volume nodes
Suggested Trader Response: Use to identify balance zones (HVN) and fast-move corridors (LVN).
Chart Element: Pink "Spring" Diamond
Color / Shape: Pink diamond with white text below the candle
Core Meaning: Wyckoff Spring – liquidity grab and potential major bullish reversal
Suggested Trader Response: One of the strongest long signals in the suite; look for high-quality long setups with tight risk.
Chart Element: STRONG LONG in Dashboard
Color / Shape: Green background, white text in the Signal row
Core Meaning: Multiple bullish layers in confluence
Suggested Trader Response: Consider initiating or increasing longs with strict risk management.
Chart Element: STRONG SHORT in Dashboard
Color / Shape: Red background, white text in the Signal row
Core Meaning: Multiple bearish layers in confluence
Suggested Trader Response: Consider initiating or increasing shorts with a logical, well-placed stop.
## Chapter 9 – Timeframe-Based Trading Playbook
### 9.1 Timeframe Selection
- Scalping
- Timeframes: 1M, 5M, 15M
- Objective: fast intraday moves (minutes to a few hours).
- Recommendation: focus on SMC + Wyckoff.
Smart DCA on very low timeframes may introduce excessive noise.
- Day Trading
- Timeframes: 15M, 1H, 4H
- Provides a good balance between signal quality and frequency.
- Recommendation: use the full stack – SMC + DCA + Volume Profile + Wyckoff + Dashboard.
- Swing Trading & Position Investing
- Timeframes: Daily, Weekly
- Emphasis on Smart DCA + Volume Profile.
- SMC and Wyckoff are used mainly to fine-tune swing entries within larger trends.
### 9.2 Scenario A – Scalping Long
Example: 5-Minute Chart
1. Price is declining into a green OB (Bullish Demand).
2. A candle with a long lower wick and bullish close (Pin Bar / Rejection) forms inside the OB.
3. A Spring diamond appears below the same candle → very strong confluence.
4. The Dashboard shows at least WEAK LONG ↗, ideally STRONG LONG 🚀.
5. Entry:
- On the close of the confirmation candle, or
- On the first pullback into the mid-range of that candle.
6. Stop-loss:
- Slightly below the OB.
7. Targets:
- Nearby bearish FVG above, and/or
- The next red OB.
### 9.3 Scenario B – Day-Trading Short
Recommended Timeframes: 1H or 4H
1. The market completes a strong impulsive move upward.
2. Price enters a red Order Block (Supply).
3. In the same zone, a purple FVG appears or remains unfilled.
4. On a lower timeframe (e.g., 15M), RSI enters overbought territory and a DCA Sell signal appears.
5. The main timeframe Dashboard (1H) shows WEAK SHORT ↘ or STRONG SHORT 🩸.
Trade Plan
- Open a short near the upper boundary of the red OB.
- Place the stop above the OB or above the last swing high.
- Targets:
- A yellow FVG lower on the chart, and/or
- The next green OB (Demand) below.
### 9.4 Scenario C – Swing / Investment with Smart DCA
Timeframes: Daily / Weekly
1. On the daily or weekly chart, each time a green “DCA” label appears:
- Allocate a fixed fraction of your capital (e.g., 3–5%) to that asset.
2. Check whether this DCA zone aligns with the orange POC of the Volume Profile:
- If yes → the quality of the entry zone is significantly higher.
3. If the DCA signal sits inside a daily green OB, the probability of a medium-term bottom increases.
4. Always build the position laddered, never all-in at a single price.
Exits for investors:
- Near weekly red OBs or large purple FVG zones.
- Ideally via partial profit-taking rather than closing 100% at once.
### 9.5 Case Study 1 – BTCUSDT (15-Minute)
- Context: Price has sold off down towards 65,000 USD.
- A green OB had previously formed at that level.
- Near the lower boundary of this OB, a partially filled yellow FVG is present.
- As price returns to this region, a Spring appears.
- The Dashboard shifts from NEUTRAL / WAIT to WEAK LONG ↗.
Plan
- Enter a long near the OB low.
- Place stop below the Spring low.
- First target: a purple FVG around 66,200.
- Second (optional) target: the first red OB above that level.
### 9.6 Case Study 2 – Meme Coin (PEPE – 4H)
- After a strong pump, price enters a corrective phase.
- On the 4H chart, RSI drops below 30; price breaks below the lower Bollinger Band → a DCA label prints.
- The Volume Profile shows the POC at approximately the same level.
- The Dashboard displays STRONG LONG 🚀.
Plan
- Execute laddered buys in the combined DCA + POC zone.
- Place a protective stop below the last significant swing low.
- Target: an expected 20–30% upside move towards the next red OB or purple FVG.
## Chapter 10 – Risk Management, Psychology & Advanced Tuning
### 10.1 Risk Management
No signal, regardless of its strength, replaces risk control.
Recommendations:
- In futures, do not expose more than 1–3% of account equity to risk per trade.
- Adjust leverage to the volatility of the instrument (lower leverage for highly volatile altcoins).
- Place stop-losses in zones where the idea is clearly invalidated:
- Below/above the relevant Order Block or Spring, not randomly in the middle of the structure.
### 10.2 Market-Specific Parameter Tuning
- Calmer Markets (e.g., major FX pairs)
- `ob_period`: 3–5.
- `bb_mult`: 2.0 is usually sufficient.
- Highly Volatile Markets (Crypto, news-driven assets)
- `ob_period`: 7–10 to highlight only the most robust OBs.
- `bb_mult`: 2.5–3.0 so that only extreme deviations trigger DCA.
- `vol_ma_len`: increase (e.g., to ~30) so that Spring triggers only on truly exceptional
volume spikes.
### 10.3 Trading Psychology
- STRONG LONG 🚀 does not mean “risk-free”.
It means the probability of a successful long, given the model’s logic, is higher than average.
- Treat Mars Signals as a confirmation and context system, not a full replacement for your own decision-making.
- Example of disciplined thinking:
- The Dashboard prints STRONG LONG,
- But price is simultaneously testing a multi-month macro resistance or a major negative news event is imminent,
- In such cases, trade smaller, widen stops appropriately, or skip the trade.
## Chapter 11 – Technical Notes & FAQ
### 11.1 Does the Script Repaint?
- Order Blocks and Springs are based on completed pivot structures and confirmed candles.
- Until a pivot is confirmed, an OB does not exist; after confirmation, behavior is stable under classic SMC assumptions.
- The script is designed to be structurally consistent rather than repainting signals arbitrarily.
### 11.2 Computational Load of Volume Profile
- On the last bar, the script processes up to `vp_lookback` bars × `vp_rows` rows.
- On very low timeframes with heavy zooming, this can become demanding.
- If you experience performance issues:
- Reduce `vp_lookback` or `vp_rows`, or
- Temporarily disable Volume Profile (`show_vp = false`).
### 11.3 Multi-Timeframe Behavior
- This version of the script is not internally multi-timeframe.
All logic (OB, DCA, Spring, Volume Profile) is computed on the active timeframe only.
- Practical workflow:
- Analyze overall structure and key zones on higher timeframes (4H / Daily).
- Use lower timeframes (15M / 1H) with the same tool for timing entries and exits.
## Conclusion
Mars Signals – Ultimate Institutional Suite v3.0 (Joker) is a multi-layer trading framework that unifies:
- Price structure (Order Blocks & FVG),
- Statistical behavior (Smart DCA via RSI + Bollinger),
- Volume distribution by price (Volume Profile with POC, HVN, LVN),
- Liquidity events (Wyckoff Spring),
into a single, coherent system driven by a transparent Confluence Scoring Engine.
The final output is presented in clear, actionable language:
> STRONG LONG / WEAK LONG / NEUTRAL / WEAK SHORT / STRONG SHORT
The system is designed to support professional decision-making, not to replace it.
Used together with strict risk management and disciplined execution,
Mars Signals – UIS v3.0 (Joker) can serve as a central reference manual and operational guide
for your trading workflow, from scalping to swing and investment positioning.
ATAI Volume analysis with price action V 1.00ATAI Volume Analysis with Price Action
1. Introduction
1.1 Overview
ATAI Volume Analysis with Price Action is a composite indicator designed for TradingView. It combines per‑side volume data —that is, how much buying and selling occurs during each bar—with standard price‑structure elements such as swings, trend lines and support/resistance. By blending these elements the script aims to help a trader understand which side is in control, whether a breakout is genuine, when markets are potentially exhausted and where liquidity providers might be active.
The indicator is built around TradingView’s up/down volume feed accessed via the TradingView/ta/10 library. The following excerpt from the script illustrates how this feed is configured:
import TradingView/ta/10 as tvta
// Determine lower timeframe string based on user choice and chart resolution
string lower_tf_breakout = use_custom_tf_input ? custom_tf_input :
timeframe.isseconds ? "1S" :
timeframe.isintraday ? "1" :
timeframe.isdaily ? "5" : "60"
// Request up/down volume (both positive)
= tvta.requestUpAndDownVolume(lower_tf_breakout)
Lower‑timeframe selection. If you do not specify a custom lower timeframe, the script chooses a default based on your chart resolution: 1 second for second charts, 1 minute for intraday charts, 5 minutes for daily charts and 60 minutes for anything longer. Smaller intervals provide a more precise view of buyer and seller flow but cover fewer bars. Larger intervals cover more history at the cost of granularity.
Tick vs. time bars. Many trading platforms offer a tick / intrabar calculation mode that updates an indicator on every trade rather than only on bar close. Turning on one‑tick calculation will give the most accurate split between buy and sell volume on the current bar, but it typically reduces the amount of historical data available. For the highest fidelity in live trading you can enable this mode; for studying longer histories you might prefer to disable it. When volume data is completely unavailable (some instruments and crypto pairs), all modules that rely on it will remain silent and only the price‑structure backbone will operate.
Figure caption, Each panel shows the indicator’s info table for a different volume sampling interval. In the left chart, the parentheses “(5)” beside the buy‑volume figure denote that the script is aggregating volume over five‑minute bars; the center chart uses “(1)” for one‑minute bars; and the right chart uses “(1T)” for a one‑tick interval. These notations tell you which lower timeframe is driving the volume calculations. Shorter intervals such as 1 minute or 1 tick provide finer detail on buyer and seller flow, but they cover fewer bars; longer intervals like five‑minute bars smooth the data and give more history.
Figure caption, The values in parentheses inside the info table come directly from the Breakout — Settings. The first row shows the custom lower-timeframe used for volume calculations (e.g., “(1)”, “(5)”, or “(1T)”)
2. Price‑Structure Backbone
Even without volume, the indicator draws structural features that underpin all other modules. These features are always on and serve as the reference levels for subsequent calculations.
2.1 What it draws
• Pivots: Swing highs and lows are detected using the pivot_left_input and pivot_right_input settings. A pivot high is identified when the high recorded pivot_right_input bars ago exceeds the highs of the preceding pivot_left_input bars and is also higher than (or equal to) the highs of the subsequent pivot_right_input bars; pivot lows follow the inverse logic. The indicator retains only a fixed number of such pivot points per side, as defined by point_count_input, discarding the oldest ones when the limit is exceeded.
• Trend lines: For each side, the indicator connects the earliest stored pivot and the most recent pivot (oldest high to newest high, and oldest low to newest low). When a new pivot is added or an old one drops out of the lookback window, the line’s endpoints—and therefore its slope—are recalculated accordingly.
• Horizontal support/resistance: The highest high and lowest low within the lookback window defined by length_input are plotted as horizontal dashed lines. These serve as short‑term support and resistance levels.
• Ranked labels: If showPivotLabels is enabled the indicator prints labels such as “HH1”, “HH2”, “LL1” and “LL2” near each pivot. The ranking is determined by comparing the price of each stored pivot: HH1 is the highest high, HH2 is the second highest, and so on; LL1 is the lowest low, LL2 is the second lowest. In the case of equal prices the newer pivot gets the better rank. Labels are offset from price using ½ × ATR × label_atr_multiplier, with the ATR length defined by label_atr_len_input. A dotted connector links each label to the candle’s wick.
2.2 Key settings
• length_input: Window length for finding the highest and lowest values and for determining trend line endpoints. A larger value considers more history and will generate longer trend lines and S/R levels.
• pivot_left_input, pivot_right_input: Strictness of swing confirmation. Higher values require more bars on either side to form a pivot; lower values create more pivots but may include minor swings.
• point_count_input: How many pivots are kept in memory on each side. When new pivots exceed this number the oldest ones are discarded.
• label_atr_len_input and label_atr_multiplier: Determine how far pivot labels are offset from the bar using ATR. Increasing the multiplier moves labels further away from price.
• Styling inputs for trend lines, horizontal lines and labels (color, width and line style).
Figure caption, The chart illustrates how the indicator’s price‑structure backbone operates. In this daily example, the script scans for bars where the high (or low) pivot_right_input bars back is higher (or lower) than the preceding pivot_left_input bars and higher or lower than the subsequent pivot_right_input bars; only those bars are marked as pivots.
These pivot points are stored and ranked: the highest high is labelled “HH1”, the second‑highest “HH2”, and so on, while lows are marked “LL1”, “LL2”, etc. Each label is offset from the price by half of an ATR‑based distance to keep the chart clear, and a dotted connector links the label to the actual candle.
The red diagonal line connects the earliest and latest stored high pivots, and the green line does the same for low pivots; when a new pivot is added or an old one drops out of the lookback window, the end‑points and slopes adjust accordingly. Dashed horizontal lines mark the highest high and lowest low within the current lookback window, providing visual support and resistance levels. Together, these elements form the structural backbone that other modules reference, even when volume data is unavailable.
3. Breakout Module
3.1 Concept
This module confirms that a price break beyond a recent high or low is supported by a genuine shift in buying or selling pressure. It requires price to clear the highest high (“HH1”) or lowest low (“LL1”) and, simultaneously, that the winning side shows a significant volume spike, dominance and ranking. Only when all volume and price conditions pass is a breakout labelled.
3.2 Inputs
• lookback_break_input : This controls the number of bars used to compute moving averages and percentiles for volume. A larger value smooths the averages and percentiles but makes the indicator respond more slowly.
• vol_mult_input : The “spike” multiplier; the current buy or sell volume must be at least this multiple of its moving average over the lookback window to qualify as a breakout.
• rank_threshold_input (0–100) : Defines a volume percentile cutoff: the current buyer/seller volume must be in the top (100−threshold)%(100−threshold)% of all volumes within the lookback window. For example, if set to 80, the current volume must be in the top 20 % of the lookback distribution.
• ratio_threshold_input (0–1) : Specifies the minimum share of total volume that the buyer (for a bullish breakout) or seller (for bearish) must hold on the current bar; the code also requires that the cumulative buyer volume over the lookback window exceeds the seller volume (and vice versa for bearish cases).
• use_custom_tf_input / custom_tf_input : When enabled, these inputs override the automatic choice of lower timeframe for up/down volume; otherwise the script selects a sensible default based on the chart’s timeframe.
• Label appearance settings : Separate options control the ATR-based offset length, offset multiplier, label size and colors for bullish and bearish breakout labels, as well as the connector style and width.
3.3 Detection logic
1. Data preparation : Retrieve per‑side volume from the lower timeframe and take absolute values. Build rolling arrays of the last lookback_break_input values to compute simple moving averages (SMAs), cumulative sums and percentile ranks for buy and sell volume.
2. Volume spike: A spike is flagged when the current buy (or, in the bearish case, sell) volume is at least vol_mult_input times its SMA over the lookback window.
3. Dominance test: The buyer’s (or seller’s) share of total volume on the current bar must meet or exceed ratio_threshold_input. In addition, the cumulative sum of buyer volume over the window must exceed the cumulative sum of seller volume for a bullish breakout (and vice versa for bearish). A separate requirement checks the sign of delta: for bullish breakouts delta_breakout must be non‑negative; for bearish breakouts it must be non‑positive.
4. Percentile rank: The current volume must fall within the top (100 – rank_threshold_input) percent of the lookback distribution—ensuring that the spike is unusually large relative to recent history.
5. Price test: For a bullish signal, the closing price must close above the highest pivot (HH1); for a bearish signal, the close must be below the lowest pivot (LL1).
6. Labeling: When all conditions above are satisfied, the indicator prints “Breakout ↑” above the bar (bullish) or “Breakout ↓” below the bar (bearish). Labels are offset using half of an ATR‑based distance and linked to the candle with a dotted connector.
Figure caption, (Breakout ↑ example) , On this daily chart, price pushes above the red trendline and the highest prior pivot (HH1). The indicator recognizes this as a valid breakout because the buyer‑side volume on the lower timeframe spikes above its recent moving average and buyers dominate the volume statistics over the lookback period; when combined with a close above HH1, this satisfies the breakout conditions. The “Breakout ↑” label appears above the candle, and the info table highlights that up‑volume is elevated relative to its 11‑bar average, buyer share exceeds the dominance threshold and money‑flow metrics support the move.
Figure caption, In this daily example, price breaks below the lowest pivot (LL1) and the lower green trendline. The indicator identifies this as a bearish breakout because sell‑side volume is sharply elevated—about twice its 11‑bar average—and sellers dominate both the bar and the lookback window. With the close falling below LL1, the script triggers a Breakout ↓ label and marks the corresponding row in the info table, which shows strong down volume, negative delta and a seller share comfortably above the dominance threshold.
4. Market Phase Module (Volume Only)
4.1 Concept
Not all markets trend; many cycle between periods of accumulation (buying pressure building up), distribution (selling pressure dominating) and neutral behavior. This module classifies the current bar into one of these phases without using ATR , relying solely on buyer and seller volume statistics. It looks at net flows, ratio changes and an OBV‑like cumulative line with dual‑reference (1‑ and 2‑bar) trends. The result is displayed both as on‑chart labels and in a dedicated row of the info table.
4.2 Inputs
• phase_period_len: Number of bars over which to compute sums and ratios for phase detection.
• phase_ratio_thresh : Minimum buyer share (for accumulation) or minimum seller share (for distribution, derived as 1 − phase_ratio_thresh) of the total volume.
• strict_mode: When enabled, both the 1‑bar and 2‑bar changes in each statistic must agree on the direction (strict confirmation); when disabled, only one of the two references needs to agree (looser confirmation).
• Color customisation for info table cells and label styling for accumulation and distribution phases, including ATR length, multiplier, label size, colors and connector styles.
• show_phase_module: Toggles the entire phase detection subsystem.
• show_phase_labels: Controls whether on‑chart labels are drawn when accumulation or distribution is detected.
4.3 Detection logic
The module computes three families of statistics over the volume window defined by phase_period_len:
1. Net sum (buyers minus sellers): net_sum_phase = Σ(buy) − Σ(sell). A positive value indicates a predominance of buyers. The code also computes the differences between the current value and the values 1 and 2 bars ago (d_net_1, d_net_2) to derive up/down trends.
2. Buyer ratio: The instantaneous ratio TF_buy_breakout / TF_tot_breakout and the window ratio Σ(buy) / Σ(total). The current ratio must exceed phase_ratio_thresh for accumulation or fall below 1 − phase_ratio_thresh for distribution. The first and second differences of the window ratio (d_ratio_1, d_ratio_2) determine trend direction.
3. OBV‑like cumulative net flow: An on‑balance volume analogue obv_net_phase increments by TF_buy_breakout − TF_sell_breakout each bar. Its differences over the last 1 and 2 bars (d_obv_1, d_obv_2) provide trend clues.
The algorithm then combines these signals:
• For strict mode , accumulation requires: (a) current ratio ≥ threshold, (b) cumulative ratio ≥ threshold, (c) both ratio differences ≥ 0, (d) net sum differences ≥ 0, and (e) OBV differences ≥ 0. Distribution is the mirror case.
• For loose mode , it relaxes the directional tests: either the 1‑ or the 2‑bar difference needs to agree in each category.
If all conditions for accumulation are satisfied, the phase is labelled “Accumulation” ; if all conditions for distribution are satisfied, it’s labelled “Distribution” ; otherwise the phase is “Neutral” .
4.4 Outputs
• Info table row : Row 8 displays “Market Phase (Vol)” on the left and the detected phase (Accumulation, Distribution or Neutral) on the right. The text colour of both cells matches a user‑selectable palette (typically green for accumulation, red for distribution and grey for neutral).
• On‑chart labels : When show_phase_labels is enabled and a phase persists for at least one bar, the module prints a label above the bar ( “Accum” ) or below the bar ( “Dist” ) with a dashed or dotted connector. The label is offset using ATR based on phase_label_atr_len_input and phase_label_multiplier and is styled according to user preferences.
Figure caption, The chart displays a red “Dist” label above a particular bar, indicating that the accumulation/distribution module identified a distribution phase at that point. The detection is based on seller dominance: during that bar, the net buyer-minus-seller flow and the OBV‑style cumulative flow were trending down, and the buyer ratio had dropped below the preset threshold. These conditions satisfy the distribution criteria in strict mode. The label is placed above the bar using an ATR‑based offset and a dashed connector. By the time of the current bar in the screenshot, the phase indicator shows “Neutral” in the info table—signaling that neither accumulation nor distribution conditions are currently met—yet the historical “Dist” label remains to mark where the prior distribution phase began.
Figure caption, In this example the market phase module has signaled an Accumulation phase. Three bars before the current candle, the algorithm detected a shift toward buyers: up‑volume exceeded its moving average, down‑volume was below average, and the buyer share of total volume climbed above the threshold while the on‑balance net flow and cumulative ratios were trending upwards. The blue “Accum” label anchored below that bar marks the start of the phase; it remains on the chart because successive bars continue to satisfy the accumulation conditions. The info table confirms this: the “Market Phase (Vol)” row still reads Accumulation, and the ratio and sum rows show buyers dominating both on the current bar and across the lookback window.
5. OB/OS Spike Module
5.1 What overbought/oversold means here
In many markets, a rapid extension up or down is often followed by a period of consolidation or reversal. The indicator interprets overbought (OB) conditions as abnormally strong selling risk at or after a price rally and oversold (OS) conditions as unusually strong buying risk after a decline. Importantly, these are not direct trade signals; rather they flag areas where caution or contrarian setups may be appropriate.
5.2 Inputs
• minHits_obos (1–7): Minimum number of oscillators that must agree on an overbought or oversold condition for a label to print.
• syncWin_obos: Length of a small sliding window over which oscillator votes are smoothed by taking the maximum count observed. This helps filter out choppy signals.
• Volume spike criteria: kVolRatio_obos (ratio of current volume to its SMA) and zVolThr_obos (Z‑score threshold) across volLen_obos. Either threshold can trigger a spike.
• Oscillator toggles and periods: Each of RSI, Stochastic (K and D), Williams %R, CCI, MFI, DeMarker and Stochastic RSI can be independently enabled; their periods are adjustable.
• Label appearance: ATR‑based offset, size, colors for OB and OS labels, plus connector style and width.
5.3 Detection logic
1. Directional volume spikes: Volume spikes are computed separately for buyer and seller volumes. A sell volume spike (sellVolSpike) flags a potential OverBought bar, while a buy volume spike (buyVolSpike) flags a potential OverSold bar. A spike occurs when the respective volume exceeds kVolRatio_obos times its simple moving average over the window or when its Z‑score exceeds zVolThr_obos.
2. Oscillator votes: For each enabled oscillator, calculate its overbought and oversold state using standard thresholds (e.g., RSI ≥ 70 for OB and ≤ 30 for OS; Stochastic %K/%D ≥ 80 for OB and ≤ 20 for OS; etc.). Count how many oscillators vote for OB and how many vote for OS.
3. Minimum hits: Apply the smoothing window syncWin_obos to the vote counts using a maximum‑of‑last‑N approach. A candidate bar is only considered if the smoothed OB hit count ≥ minHits_obos (for OverBought) or the smoothed OS hit count ≥ minHits_obos (for OverSold).
4. Tie‑breaking: If both OverBought and OverSold spike conditions are present on the same bar, compare the smoothed hit counts: the side with the higher count is selected; ties default to OverBought.
5. Label printing: When conditions are met, the bar is labelled as “OverBought X/7” above the candle or “OverSold X/7” below it. “X” is the number of oscillators confirming, and the bracket lists the abbreviations of contributing oscillators. Labels are offset from price using half of an ATR‑scaled distance and can optionally include a dotted or dashed connector line.
Figure caption, In this chart the overbought/oversold module has flagged an OverSold signal. A sell‑off from the prior highs brought price down to the lower trend‑line, where the bar marked “OverSold 3/7 DeM” appears. This label indicates that on that bar the module detected a buy‑side volume spike and that at least three of the seven enabled oscillators—in this case including the DeMarker—were in oversold territory. The label is printed below the candle with a dotted connector, signaling that the market may be temporarily exhausted on the downside. After this oversold print, price begins to rebound towards the upper red trend‑line and higher pivot levels.
Figure caption, This example shows the overbought/oversold module in action. In the left‑hand panel you can see the OB/OS settings where each oscillator (RSI, Stochastic, Williams %R, CCI, MFI, DeMarker and Stochastic RSI) can be enabled or disabled, and the ATR length and label offset multiplier adjusted. On the chart itself, price has pushed up to the descending red trendline and triggered an “OverBought 3/7” label. That means the sell‑side volume spiked relative to its average and three out of the seven enabled oscillators were in overbought territory. The label is offset above the candle by half of an ATR and connected with a dashed line, signaling that upside momentum may be overextended and a pause or pullback could follow.
6. Buyer/Seller Trap Module
6.1 Concept
A bull trap occurs when price appears to break above resistance, attracting buyers, but fails to sustain the move and quickly reverses, leaving a long upper wick and trapping late entrants. A bear trap is the opposite: price breaks below support, lures in sellers, then snaps back, leaving a long lower wick and trapping shorts. This module detects such traps by looking for price structure sweeps, order‑flow mismatches and dominance reversals. It uses a scoring system to differentiate risk from confirmed traps.
6.2 Inputs
• trap_lookback_len: Window length used to rank extremes and detect sweeps.
• trap_wick_threshold: Minimum proportion of a bar’s range that must be wick (upper for bull traps, lower for bear traps) to qualify as a sweep.
• trap_score_risk: Minimum aggregated score required to flag a trap risk. (The code defines a trap_score_confirm input, but confirmation is actually based on price reversal rather than a separate score threshold.)
• trap_confirm_bars: Maximum number of bars allowed for price to reverse and confirm the trap. If price does not reverse in this window, the risk label will expire or remain unconfirmed.
• Label settings: ATR length and multiplier for offsetting, size, colours for risk and confirmed labels, and connector style and width. Separate settings exist for bull and bear traps.
• Toggle inputs: show_trap_module and show_trap_labels enable the module and control whether labels are drawn on the chart.
6.3 Scoring logic
The module assigns points to several conditions and sums them to determine whether a trap risk is present. For bull traps, the score is built from the following (bear traps mirror the logic with highs and lows swapped):
1. Sweep (2 points): Price trades above the high pivot (HH1) but fails to close above it and leaves a long upper wick at least trap_wick_threshold × range. For bear traps, price dips below the low pivot (LL1), fails to close below and leaves a long lower wick.
2. Close break (1 point): Price closes beyond HH1 or LL1 without leaving a long wick.
3. Candle/delta mismatch (2 points): The candle closes bullish yet the order flow delta is negative or the seller ratio exceeds 50%, indicating hidden supply. Conversely, a bearish close with positive delta or buyer dominance suggests hidden demand.
4. Dominance inversion (2 points): The current bar’s buyer volume has the highest rank in the lookback window while cumulative sums favor sellers, or vice versa.
5. Low‑volume break (1 point): Price crosses the pivot but total volume is below its moving average.
The total score for each side is compared to trap_score_risk. If the score is high enough, a “Bull Trap Risk” or “Bear Trap Risk” label is drawn, offset from the candle by half of an ATR‑scaled distance using a dashed outline. If, within trap_confirm_bars, price reverses beyond the opposite level—drops back below the high pivot for bull traps or rises above the low pivot for bear traps—the label is upgraded to a solid “Bull Trap” or “Bear Trap” . In this version of the code, there is no separate score threshold for confirmation: the variable trap_score_confirm is unused; confirmation depends solely on a successful price reversal within the specified number of bars.
Figure caption, In this example the trap module has flagged a Bear Trap Risk. Price initially breaks below the most recent low pivot (LL1), but the bar closes back above that level and leaves a long lower wick, suggesting a failed push lower. Combined with a mismatch between the candle direction and the order flow (buyers regain control) and a reversal in volume dominance, the aggregate score exceeds the risk threshold, so a dashed “Bear Trap Risk” label prints beneath the bar. The green and red trend lines mark the current low and high pivot trajectories, while the horizontal dashed lines show the highest and lowest values in the lookback window. If, within the next few bars, price closes decisively above the support, the risk label would upgrade to a solid “Bear Trap” label.
Figure caption, In this example the trap module has identified both ends of a price range. Near the highs, price briefly pushes above the descending red trendline and the recent pivot high, but fails to close there and leaves a noticeable upper wick. That combination of a sweep above resistance and order‑flow mismatch generates a Bull Trap Risk label with a dashed outline, warning that the upside break may not hold. At the opposite extreme, price later dips below the green trendline and the labelled low pivot, then quickly snaps back and closes higher. The long lower wick and subsequent price reversal upgrade the previous bear‑trap risk into a confirmed Bear Trap (solid label), indicating that sellers were caught on a false breakdown. Horizontal dashed lines mark the highest high and lowest low of the lookback window, while the red and green diagonals connect the earliest and latest pivot highs and lows to visualize the range.
7. Sharp Move Module
7.1 Concept
Markets sometimes display absorption or climax behavior—periods when one side steadily gains the upper hand before price breaks out with a sharp move. This module evaluates several order‑flow and volume conditions to anticipate such moves. Users can choose how many conditions must be met to flag a risk and how many (plus a price break) are required for confirmation.
7.2 Inputs
• sharp Lookback: Number of bars in the window used to compute moving averages, sums, percentile ranks and reference levels.
• sharpPercentile: Minimum percentile rank for the current side’s volume; the current buy (or sell) volume must be greater than or equal to this percentile of historical volumes over the lookback window.
• sharpVolMult: Multiplier used in the volume climax check. The current side’s volume must exceed this multiple of its average to count as a climax.
• sharpRatioThr: Minimum dominance ratio (current side’s volume relative to the opposite side) used in both the instant and cumulative dominance checks.
• sharpChurnThr: Maximum ratio of a bar’s range to its ATR for absorption/churn detection; lower values indicate more absorption (large volume in a small range).
• sharpScoreRisk: Minimum number of conditions that must be true to print a risk label.
• sharpScoreConfirm: Minimum number of conditions plus a price break required for confirmation.
• sharpCvdThr: Threshold for cumulative delta divergence versus price change (positive for bullish accumulation, negative for bearish distribution).
• Label settings: ATR length (sharpATRlen) and multiplier (sharpLabelMult) for positioning labels, label size, colors and connector styles for bullish and bearish sharp moves.
• Toggles: enableSharp activates the module; show_sharp_labels controls whether labels are drawn.
7.3 Conditions (six per side)
For each side, the indicator computes six boolean conditions and sums them to form a score:
1. Dominance (instant and cumulative):
– Instant dominance: current buy volume ≥ sharpRatioThr × current sell volume.
– Cumulative dominance: sum of buy volumes over the window ≥ sharpRatioThr × sum of sell volumes (and vice versa for bearish checks).
2. Accumulation/Distribution divergence: Over the lookback window, cumulative delta rises by at least sharpCvdThr while price fails to rise (bullish), or cumulative delta falls by at least sharpCvdThr while price fails to fall (bearish).
3. Volume climax: The current side’s volume is ≥ sharpVolMult × its average and the product of volume and bar range is the highest in the lookback window.
4. Absorption/Churn: The current side’s volume divided by the bar’s range equals the highest value in the window and the bar’s range divided by ATR ≤ sharpChurnThr (indicating large volume within a small range).
5. Percentile rank: The current side’s volume percentile rank is ≥ sharp Percentile.
6. Mirror logic for sellers: The above checks are repeated with buyer and seller roles swapped and the price break levels reversed.
Each condition that passes contributes one point to the corresponding side’s score (0 or 1). Risk and confirmation thresholds are then applied to these scores.
7.4 Scoring and labels
• Risk: If scoreBull ≥ sharpScoreRisk, a “Sharp ↑ Risk” label is drawn above the bar. If scoreBear ≥ sharpScoreRisk, a “Sharp ↓ Risk” label is drawn below the bar.
• Confirmation: A risk label is upgraded to “Sharp ↑” when scoreBull ≥ sharpScoreConfirm and the bar closes above the highest recent pivot (HH1); for bearish cases, confirmation requires scoreBear ≥ sharpScoreConfirm and a close below the lowest pivot (LL1).
• Label positioning: Labels are offset from the candle by ATR × sharpLabelMult (full ATR times multiplier), not half, and may include a dashed or dotted connector line if enabled.
Figure caption, In this chart both bullish and bearish sharp‑move setups have been flagged. Earlier in the range, a “Sharp ↓ Risk” label appears beneath a candle: the sell‑side score met the risk threshold, signaling that the combination of strong sell volume, dominance and absorption within a narrow range suggested a potential sharp decline. The price did not close below the lower pivot, so this label remains a “risk” and no confirmation occurred. Later, as the market recovered and volume shifted back to the buy side, a “Sharp ↑ Risk” label prints above a candle near the top of the channel. Here, buy‑side dominance, cumulative delta divergence and a volume climax aligned, but price has not yet closed above the upper pivot (HH1), so the alert is still a risk rather than a confirmed sharp‑up move.
Figure caption, In this chart a Sharp ↑ label is displayed above a candle, indicating that the sharp move module has confirmed a bullish breakout. Prior bars satisfied the risk threshold — showing buy‑side dominance, positive cumulative delta divergence, a volume climax and strong absorption in a narrow range — and this candle closes above the highest recent pivot, upgrading the earlier “Sharp ↑ Risk” alert to a full Sharp ↑ signal. The green label is offset from the candle with a dashed connector, while the red and green trend lines trace the high and low pivot trajectories and the dashed horizontals mark the highest and lowest values of the lookback window.
8. Market‑Maker / Spread‑Capture Module
8.1 Concept
Liquidity providers often “capture the spread” by buying and selling in almost equal amounts within a very narrow price range. These bars can signal temporary congestion before a move or reflect algorithmic activity. This module flags bars where both buyer and seller volumes are high, the price range is only a few ticks and the buy/sell split remains close to 50%. It helps traders spot potential liquidity pockets.
8.2 Inputs
• scalpLookback: Window length used to compute volume averages.
• scalpVolMult: Multiplier applied to each side’s average volume; both buy and sell volumes must exceed this multiple.
• scalpTickCount: Maximum allowed number of ticks in a bar’s range (calculated as (high − low) / minTick). A value of 1 or 2 captures ultra‑small bars; increasing it relaxes the range requirement.
• scalpDeltaRatio: Maximum deviation from a perfect 50/50 split. For example, 0.05 means the buyer share must be between 45% and 55%.
• Label settings: ATR length, multiplier, size, colors, connector style and width.
• Toggles : show_scalp_module and show_scalp_labels to enable the module and its labels.
8.3 Signal
When, on the current bar, both TF_buy_breakout and TF_sell_breakout exceed scalpVolMult times their respective averages and (high − low)/minTick ≤ scalpTickCount and the buyer share is within scalpDeltaRatio of 50%, the module prints a “Spread ↔” label above the bar. The label uses the same ATR offset logic as other modules and draws a connector if enabled.
Figure caption, In this chart the spread‑capture module has identified a potential liquidity pocket. Buyer and seller volumes both spiked above their recent averages, yet the candle’s range measured only a couple of ticks and the buy/sell split stayed close to 50 %. This combination met the module’s criteria, so it printed a grey “Spread ↔” label above the bar. The red and green trend lines link the earliest and latest high and low pivots, and the dashed horizontals mark the highest high and lowest low within the current lookback window.
9. Money Flow Module
9.1 Concept
To translate volume into a monetary measure, this module multiplies each side’s volume by the closing price. It tracks buying and selling system money default currency on a per-bar basis and sums them over a chosen period. The difference between buy and sell currencies (Δ$) shows net inflow or outflow.
9.2 Inputs
• mf_period_len_mf: Number of bars used for summing buy and sell dollars.
• Label appearance settings: ATR length, multiplier, size, colors for up/down labels, and connector style and width.
• Toggles: Use enableMoneyFlowLabel_mf and showMFLabels to control whether the module and its labels are displayed.
9.3 Calculations
• Per-bar money: Buy $ = TF_buy_breakout × close; Sell $ = TF_sell_breakout × close. Their difference is Δ$ = Buy $ − Sell $.
• Summations: Over mf_period_len_mf bars, compute Σ Buy $, Σ Sell $ and ΣΔ$ using math.sum().
• Info table entries: Rows 9–13 display these values as texts like “↑ USD 1234 (1M)” or “ΣΔ USD −5678 (14)”, with colors reflecting whether buyers or sellers dominate.
• Money flow status: If Δ$ is positive the bar is marked “Money flow in” ; if negative, “Money flow out” ; if zero, “Neutral”. The cumulative status is similarly derived from ΣΔ.Labels print at the bar that changes the sign of ΣΔ, offset using ATR × label multiplier and styled per user preferences.
Figure caption, The chart illustrates a steady rise toward the highest recent pivot (HH1) with price riding between a rising green trend‑line and a red trend‑line drawn through earlier pivot highs. A green Money flow in label appears above the bar near the top of the channel, signaling that net dollar flow turned positive on this bar: buy‑side dollar volume exceeded sell‑side dollar volume, pushing the cumulative sum ΣΔ$ above zero. In the info table, the “Money flow (bar)” and “Money flow Σ” rows both read In, confirming that the indicator’s money‑flow module has detected an inflow at both bar and aggregate levels, while other modules (pivots, trend lines and support/resistance) remain active to provide structural context.
In this example the Money Flow module signals a net outflow. Price has been trending downward: successive high pivots form a falling red trend‑line and the low pivots form a descending green support line. When the latest bar broke below the previous low pivot (LL1), both the bar‑level and cumulative net dollar flow turned negative—selling volume at the close exceeded buying volume and pushed the cumulative Δ$ below zero. The module reacts by printing a red “Money flow out” label beneath the candle; the info table confirms that the “Money flow (bar)” and “Money flow Σ” rows both show Out, indicating sustained dominance of sellers in this period.
10. Info Table
10.1 Purpose
When enabled, the Info Table appears in the lower right of your chart. It summarises key values computed by the indicator—such as buy and sell volume, delta, total volume, breakout status, market phase, and money flow—so you can see at a glance which side is dominant and which signals are active.
10.2 Symbols
• ↑ / ↓ — Up (↑) denotes buy volume or money; down (↓) denotes sell volume or money.
• MA — Moving average. In the table it shows the average value of a series over the lookback period.
• Σ (Sigma) — Cumulative sum over the chosen lookback period.
• Δ (Delta) — Difference between buy and sell values.
• B / S — Buyer and seller share of total volume, expressed as percentages.
• Ref. Price — Reference price for breakout calculations, based on the latest pivot.
• Status — Indicates whether a breakout condition is currently active (True) or has failed.
10.3 Row definitions
1. Up volume / MA up volume – Displays current buy volume on the lower timeframe and its moving average over the lookback period.
2. Down volume / MA down volume – Shows current sell volume and its moving average; sell values are formatted in red for clarity.
3. Δ / ΣΔ – Lists the difference between buy and sell volume for the current bar and the cumulative delta volume over the lookback period.
4. Σ / MA Σ (Vol/MA) – Total volume (buy + sell) for the bar, with the ratio of this volume to its moving average; the right cell shows the average total volume.
5. B/S ratio – Buy and sell share of the total volume: current bar percentages and the average percentages across the lookback period.
6. Buyer Rank / Seller Rank – Ranks the bar’s buy and sell volumes among the last (n) bars; lower rank numbers indicate higher relative volume.
7. Σ Buy / Σ Sell – Sum of buy and sell volumes over the lookback window, indicating which side has traded more.
8. Breakout UP / DOWN – Shows the breakout thresholds (Ref. Price) and whether the breakout condition is active (True) or has failed.
9. Market Phase (Vol) – Reports the current volume‑only phase: Accumulation, Distribution or Neutral.
10. Money Flow – The final rows display dollar amounts and status:
– ↑ USD / Σ↑ USD – Buy dollars for the current bar and the cumulative sum over the money‑flow period.
– ↓ USD / Σ↓ USD – Sell dollars and their cumulative sum.
– Δ USD / ΣΔ USD – Net dollar difference (buy minus sell) for the bar and cumulatively.
– Money flow (bar) – Indicates whether the bar’s net dollar flow is positive (In), negative (Out) or neutral.
– Money flow Σ – Shows whether the cumulative net dollar flow across the chosen period is positive, negative or neutral.
The chart above shows a sequence of different signals from the indicator. A Bull Trap Risk appears after price briefly pushes above resistance but fails to hold, then a green Accum label identifies an accumulation phase. An upward breakout follows, confirmed by a Money flow in print. Later, a Sharp ↓ Risk warns of a possible sharp downturn; after price dips below support but quickly recovers, a Bear Trap label marks a false breakdown. The highlighted info table in the center summarizes key metrics at that moment, including current and average buy/sell volumes, net delta, total volume versus its moving average, breakout status (up and down), market phase (volume), and bar‑level and cumulative money flow (In/Out).
11. Conclusion & Final Remarks
This indicator was developed as a holistic study of market structure and order flow. It brings together several well‑known concepts from technical analysis—breakouts, accumulation and distribution phases, overbought and oversold extremes, bull and bear traps, sharp directional moves, market‑maker spread bars and money flow—into a single Pine Script tool. Each module is based on widely recognized trading ideas and was implemented after consulting reference materials and example strategies, so you can see in real time how these concepts interact on your chart.
A distinctive feature of this indicator is its reliance on per‑side volume: instead of tallying only total volume, it separately measures buy and sell transactions on a lower time frame. This approach gives a clearer view of who is in control—buyers or sellers—and helps filter breakouts, detect phases of accumulation or distribution, recognize potential traps, anticipate sharp moves and gauge whether liquidity providers are active. The money‑flow module extends this analysis by converting volume into currency values and tracking net inflow or outflow across a chosen window.
Although comprehensive, this indicator is intended solely as a guide. It highlights conditions and statistics that many traders find useful, but it does not generate trading signals or guarantee results. Ultimately, you remain responsible for your positions. Use the information presented here to inform your analysis, combine it with other tools and risk‑management techniques, and always make your own decisions when trading.
SMC Structures and FVGสวัสดีครับ! ผมจะอธิบายอินดิเคเตอร์ "SMC Structures and FVG + MACD" ที่คุณให้มาอย่างละเอียดในแต่ละส่วน เพื่อให้คุณเข้าใจการทำงานของมันอย่างถ่องแท้ครับ
อินดิเคเตอร์นี้เป็นการผสมผสานแนวคิดของ Smart Money Concept (SMC) ซึ่งเน้นการวิเคราะห์โครงสร้างตลาด (Market Structure) และ Fair Value Gap (FVG) เข้ากับอินดิเคเตอร์ MACD เพื่อใช้เป็นตัวกรองหรือตัวยืนยันสัญญาณ Choch/BoS (Change of Character / Break of Structure)
1. ภาพรวมอินดิเคเตอร์ (Overall Purpose)
อินดิเคเตอร์นี้มีจุดประสงค์หลักคือ:
ระบุโครงสร้างตลาด: ตีเส้นและป้ายกำกับ Choch (Change of Character) และ BoS (Break of Structure) บนกราฟโดยอัตโนมัติ
ผสานการยืนยันด้วย MACD: สัญญาณ Choch/BoS จะถูกพิจารณาก็ต่อเมื่อ MACD Histogram เกิดการตัดขึ้นหรือลง (Zero Cross) ในทิศทางที่สอดคล้องกัน
แสดง Fair Value Gap (FVG): หากเปิดใช้งาน จะมีการตีกล่อง FVG บนกราฟ
แสดงระดับ Fibonacci: คำนวณและแสดงระดับ Fibonacci ที่สำคัญตามโครงสร้างตลาดปัจจุบัน
ปรับตาม Timeframe: การคำนวณและการแสดงผลทั้งหมดจะปรับตาม Timeframe ที่คุณกำลังใช้งานอยู่โดยอัตโนมัติ
2. ส่วนประกอบหลักของโค้ด (Code Breakdown)
โค้ดนี้สามารถแบ่งออกเป็นส่วนหลัก ๆ ได้ดังนี้:
2.1 Inputs (การตั้งค่า)
ส่วนนี้คือตัวแปรที่คุณสามารถปรับแต่งได้ในหน้าต่างการตั้งค่าของอินดิเคเตอร์ (คลิกที่รูปฟันเฟืองข้างชื่ออินดิเคเตอร์บนกราฟ)
MACD Settings (ตั้งค่า MACD):
fast_len: ความยาวของ Fast EMA สำหรับ MACD (ค่าเริ่มต้น 12)
slow_len: ความยาวของ Slow EMA สำหรับ MACD (ค่าเริ่มต้น 26)
signal_len: ความยาวของ Signal Line สำหรับ MACD (ค่าเริ่มต้น 9)
= ta.macd(close, fast_len, slow_len, signal_len): คำนวณค่า MACD Line, Signal Line และ Histogram โดยใช้ราคาปิด (close) และค่าความยาวที่กำหนด
is_bullish_macd_cross: ตรวจสอบว่า MACD Histogram ตัดขึ้นเหนือเส้น 0 (จากค่าลบเป็นบวก)
is_bearish_macd_cross: ตรวจสอบว่า MACD Histogram ตัดลงใต้เส้น 0 (จากค่าบวกเป็นลบ)
Fear Value Gap (FVG) Settings:
isFvgToShow: (Boolean) เปิด/ปิดการแสดง FVG บนกราฟ
bullishFvgColor: สีสำหรับ Bullish FVG
bearishFvgColor: สีสำหรับ Bearish FVG
mitigatedFvgColor: สีสำหรับ FVG ที่ถูก Mitigate (ลดทอน) แล้ว
fvgHistoryNbr: จำนวน FVG ย้อนหลังที่จะแสดง
isMitigatedFvgToReduce: (Boolean) เปิด/ปิดการลดขนาด FVG เมื่อถูก Mitigate
Structures (โครงสร้างตลาด) Settings:
isStructBodyCandleBreak: (Boolean) หากเป็น true การ Break จะต้องเกิดขึ้นด้วย เนื้อเทียน ที่ปิดเหนือ/ใต้ Swing High/Low หากเป็น false แค่ไส้เทียนทะลุก็ถือว่า Break
isCurrentStructToShow: (Boolean) เปิด/ปิดการแสดงเส้นโครงสร้างตลาดปัจจุบัน (เส้นสีน้ำเงินในภาพตัวอย่าง)
pivot_len: ความยาวของแท่งเทียนที่ใช้ในการมองหาจุด Pivot (Swing High/Low) ยิ่งค่าน้อยยิ่งจับ Swing เล็กๆ ได้, ยิ่งค่ามากยิ่งจับ Swing ใหญ่ๆ ได้
bullishBosColor, bearishBosColor: สีสำหรับเส้นและป้าย BOS ขาขึ้น/ขาลง
bosLineStyleOption, bosLineWidth: สไตล์ (Solid, Dotted, Dashed) และความหนาของเส้น BOS
bullishChochColor, bearishChochColor: สีสำหรับเส้นและป้าย CHoCH ขาขึ้น/ขาลง
chochLineStyleOption, chochLineWidth: สไตล์ (Solid, Dotted, Dashed) และความหนาของเส้น CHoCH
currentStructColor, currentStructLineStyleOption, currentStructLineWidth: สี, สไตล์ และความหนาของเส้นโครงสร้างตลาดปัจจุบัน
structHistoryNbr: จำนวนการ Break (Choch/BoS) ย้อนหลังที่จะแสดง
Structure Fibonacci (จากโค้ดต้นฉบับ):
เป็นชุด Input สำหรับเปิด/ปิด, กำหนดค่า, สี, สไตล์ และความหนาของเส้น Fibonacci Levels ต่างๆ (0.786, 0.705, 0.618, 0.5, 0.382) ที่จะถูกคำนวณจากโครงสร้างตลาดปัจจุบัน
2.2 Helper Functions (ฟังก์ชันช่วยทำงาน)
getLineStyle(lineOption): ฟังก์ชันนี้ใช้แปลงค่า String ที่เลือกจาก Input (เช่น "─", "┈", "╌") ให้เป็นรูปแบบ line.style_ ที่ Pine Script เข้าใจ
get_structure_highest_bar(lookback): ฟังก์ชันนี้พยายามหา Bar Index ของแท่งเทียนที่ทำ Swing High ภายในช่วง lookback ที่กำหนด
get_structure_lowest_bar(lookback): ฟังก์ชันนี้พยายามหา Bar Index ของแท่งเทียนที่ทำ Swing Low ภายในช่วง lookback ที่กำหนด
is_structure_high_broken(...): ฟังก์ชันนี้ตรวจสอบว่าราคาปัจจุบันได้ Break เหนือ _structureHigh (Swing High) หรือไม่ โดยพิจารณาจาก _highStructBreakPrice (ราคาปิดหรือราคา High ขึ้นอยู่กับการตั้งค่า isStructBodyCandleBreak)
FVGDraw(...): ฟังก์ชันนี้รับ Arrays ของ FVG Boxes, Types, Mitigation Status และ Labels มาประมวลผล เพื่ออัปเดตสถานะของ FVG (เช่น ถูก Mitigate หรือไม่) และปรับขนาด/ตำแหน่งของ FVG Box และ Label บนกราฟ
2.3 Global Variables (ตัวแปรทั่วทั้งอินดิเคเตอร์)
เป็นตัวแปรที่ประกาศด้วย var ซึ่งหมายความว่าค่าของมันจะถูกเก็บไว้และอัปเดตในแต่ละแท่งเทียน (persists across bars)
structureLines, structureLabels: Arrays สำหรับเก็บอ็อบเจกต์ line และ label ของเส้น Choch/BoS ที่วาดบนกราฟ
fvgBoxes, fvgTypes, fvgLabels, isFvgMitigated: Arrays สำหรับเก็บข้อมูลของ FVG Boxes และสถานะต่างๆ
structureHigh, structureLow: เก็บราคาของ Swing High/Low ที่สำคัญของโครงสร้างตลาดปัจจุบัน
structureHighStartIndex, structureLowStartIndex: เก็บ Bar Index ของจุดเริ่มต้นของ Swing High/Low ที่สำคัญ
structureDirection: เก็บสถานะของทิศทางโครงสร้างตลาด (1 = Bullish, 2 = Bearish, 0 = Undefined)
fiboXPrice, fiboXStartIndex, fiboXLine, fiboXLabel: ตัวแปรสำหรับเก็บข้อมูลและอ็อบเจกต์ของเส้น Fibonacci Levels
isBOSAlert, isCHOCHAlert: (Boolean) ใช้สำหรับส่งสัญญาณ Alert (หากมีการตั้งค่า Alert ไว้)
2.4 FVG Processing (การประมวลผล FVG)
ส่วนนี้จะตรวจสอบเงื่อนไขการเกิด FVG (Bullish FVG: high < low , Bearish FVG: low > high )
หากเกิด FVG และ isFvgToShow เป็น true จะมีการสร้าง box และ label ใหม่เพื่อแสดง FVG บนกราฟ
มีการจัดการ fvgBoxes และ fvgLabels เพื่อจำกัดจำนวน FVG ที่แสดงตาม fvgHistoryNbr และลบ FVG เก่าออก
ฟังก์ชัน FVGDraw จะถูกเรียกเพื่ออัปเดตสถานะของ FVG (เช่น การถูก Mitigate) และปรับการแสดงผล
2.5 Structures Processing (การประมวลผลโครงสร้างตลาด)
Initialization: ที่ bar_index == 0 (แท่งเทียนแรกของกราฟ) จะมีการกำหนดค่าเริ่มต้นให้กับ structureHigh, structureLow, structureHighStartIndex, structureLowStartIndex
Finding Current High/Low: highest, highestBar, lowest, lowestBar ถูกใช้เพื่อหา High/Low ที่สุดและ Bar Index ของมันใน 10 แท่งล่าสุด (หรือทั้งหมดหากกราฟสั้นกว่า 10 แท่ง)
Calculating Structure Max/Min Bar: structureMaxBar และ structureMinBar ใช้ฟังก์ชัน get_structure_highest_bar และ get_structure_lowest_bar เพื่อหา Bar Index ของ Swing High/Low ที่แท้จริง (ไม่ใช่แค่ High/Low ที่สุดใน lookback แต่เป็นจุด Pivot ที่สมบูรณ์)
Break Price: lowStructBreakPrice และ highStructBreakPrice จะเป็นราคาปิด (close) หรือราคา Low/High ขึ้นอยู่กับ isStructBodyCandleBreak
isStuctureLowBroken / isStructureHighBroken: เงื่อนไขเหล่านี้ตรวจสอบว่าราคาได้ทำลาย structureLow หรือ structureHigh หรือไม่ โดยพิจารณาจากราคา Break, ราคาแท่งก่อนหน้า และ Bar Index ของจุดเริ่มต้นโครงสร้าง
Choch/BoS Logic (ส่วนสำคัญที่ถูกผสานกับ MACD):
if(isStuctureLowBroken and is_bearish_macd_cross): นี่คือจุดที่ MACD เข้ามามีบทบาท หากราคาทำลาย structureLow (สัญญาณขาลง) และ MACD Histogram เกิด Bearish Zero Cross (is_bearish_macd_cross เป็น true) อินดิเคเตอร์จะพิจารณาว่าเป็น Choch หรือ BoS
หาก structureDirection == 1 (เดิมเป็นขาขึ้น) หรือ 0 (ยังไม่กำหนด) จะตีเป็น "CHoCH" (เปลี่ยนทิศทางโครงสร้างเป็นขาลง)
หาก structureDirection == 2 (เดิมเป็นขาลง) จะตีเป็น "BOS" (ยืนยันโครงสร้างขาลง)
มีการสร้าง line.new และ label.new เพื่อวาดเส้นและป้ายกำกับ
structureDirection จะถูกอัปเดตเป็น 1 (Bullish)
structureHighStartIndex, structureLowStartIndex, structureHigh, structureLow จะถูกอัปเดตเพื่อกำหนดโครงสร้างใหม่
else if(isStructureHighBroken and is_bullish_macd_cross): เช่นกันสำหรับขาขึ้น หากราคาทำลาย structureHigh (สัญญาณขาขึ้น) และ MACD Histogram เกิด Bullish Zero Cross (is_bullish_macd_cross เป็น true) อินดิเคเตอร์จะพิจารณาว่าเป็น Choch หรือ BoS
หาก structureDirection == 2 (เดิมเป็นขาลง) หรือ 0 (ยังไม่กำหนด) จะตีเป็น "CHoCH" (เปลี่ยนทิศทางโครงสร้างเป็นขาขึ้น)
หาก structureDirection == 1 (เดิมเป็นขาขึ้น) จะตีเป็น "BOS" (ยืนยันโครงสร้างขาขึ้น)
มีการสร้าง line.new และ label.new เพื่อวาดเส้นและป้ายกำกับ
structureDirection จะถูกอัปเดตเป็น 2 (Bearish)
structureHighStartIndex, structureLowStartIndex, structureHigh, structureLow จะถูกอัปเดตเพื่อกำหนดโครงสร้างใหม่
การลบเส้นเก่า: d.delete_line (หากไลบรารีทำงาน) จะถูกเรียกเพื่อลบเส้นและป้ายกำกับเก่าออกเมื่อจำนวนเกิน structHistoryNbr
Updating Structure High/Low (else block): หากไม่มีการ Break เกิดขึ้น แต่ราคาปัจจุบันสูงกว่า structureHigh หรือต่ำกว่า structureLow ในทิศทางที่สอดคล้องกัน (เช่น ยังคงเป็นขาขึ้นและทำ High ใหม่) structureHigh หรือ structureLow จะถูกอัปเดตเพื่อติดตาม High/Low ที่สุดของโครงสร้างปัจจุบัน
Current Structure Display:
หาก isCurrentStructToShow เป็น true อินดิเคเตอร์จะวาดเส้น structureHighLine และ structureLowLine เพื่อแสดงขอบเขตของโครงสร้างตลาดปัจจุบัน
Fibonacci Display:
หาก isFiboXToShow เป็น true อินดิเคเตอร์จะคำนวณและวาดเส้น Fibonacci Levels ต่างๆ (0.786, 0.705, 0.618, 0.5, 0.382) โดยอิงจาก structureHigh และ structureLow ของโครงสร้างตลาดปัจจุบัน
Alerts:
alertcondition: ใช้สำหรับตั้งค่า Alert ใน TradingView เมื่อเกิดสัญญาณ BOS หรือ CHOCH
plot(na):
plot(na) เป็นคำสั่งที่สำคัญในอินดิเคเตอร์ที่ไม่ได้ต้องการพล็อต Series ของข้อมูลบนกราฟ (เช่น ไม่ได้พล็อตเส้น EMA หรือ RSI) แต่ใช้วาดอ็อบเจกต์ (Line, Label, Box) โดยตรง
การมี plot(na) ช่วยให้ Pine Script รู้ว่าอินดิเคเตอร์นี้มีเอาต์พุตที่แสดงผลบนกราฟ แม้ว่าจะไม่ได้เป็น Series ที่พล็อตตามปกติก็ตาม
3. วิธีใช้งาน
คัดลอกโค้ดทั้งหมด ที่อยู่ในบล็อก immersive ด้านบน
ไปที่ TradingView และเปิดกราฟที่คุณต้องการ
คลิกที่เมนู "Pine Editor" ที่อยู่ด้านล่างของหน้าจอ
ลบโค้ดเดิมที่มีอยู่ และ วางโค้ดที่คัดลอกมา ลงไปแทน
คลิกที่ปุ่ม "Add to Chart"
อินดิเคเตอร์จะถูกเพิ่มลงในกราฟของคุณโดยอัตโนมัติ คุณสามารถคลิกที่รูปฟันเฟืองข้างชื่ออินดิเคเตอร์บนกราฟเพื่อเข้าถึงหน้าต่างการตั้งค่าและปรับแต่งตามความต้องการของคุณได้
Hello! I will explain the "SMC Structures and FVG + MACD" indicator you provided in detail, section by section, so you can fully understand how it works.This indicator combines the concepts of Smart Money Concept (SMC), which focuses on analyzing Market Structure and Fair Value Gaps (FVG), with the MACD indicator to serve as a filter or confirmation for Choch (Change of Character) and BoS (Break of Structure) signals.1. Overall PurposeThe main purposes of this indicator are:Identify Market Structure: Automatically draw lines and label Choch (Change of Character) and BoS (Break of Structure) on the chart.Integrate MACD Confirmation: Choch/BoS signals will only be considered when the MACD Histogram performs a cross (Zero Cross) in the corresponding direction.Display Fair Value Gap (FVG): If enabled, FVG boxes will be drawn on the chart.Display Fibonacci Levels: Calculate and display important Fibonacci levels based on the current market structure.Adapt to Timeframe: All calculations and displays will automatically adjust to the timeframe you are currently using.2. Code BreakdownThis code can be divided into the following main sections:2.1 Inputs (Settings)This section contains variables that you can adjust in the indicator's settings window (click the gear icon next to the indicator's name on the chart).MACD Settings:fast_len: Length of the Fast EMA for MACD (default 12)slow_len: Length of the Slow EMA for MACD (default 26)signal_len: Length of the Signal Line for MACD (default 9) = ta.macd(close, fast_len, slow_len, signal_len): Calculates the MACD Line, Signal Line, and Histogram using the closing price (close) and the specified lengths.is_bullish_macd_cross: Checks if the MACD Histogram crosses above the 0 line (from negative to positive).is_bearish_macd_cross: Checks if the MACD Histogram crosses below the 0 line (from positive to negative).Fear Value Gap (FVG) Settings:isFvgToShow: (Boolean) Enables/disables the display of FVG on the chart.bullishFvgColor: Color for Bullish FVG.bearishFvgColor: Color for Bearish FVG.mitigatedFvgColor: Color for FVG that has been mitigated.fvgHistoryNbr: Number of historical FVG to display.isMitigatedFvgToReduce: (Boolean) Enables/disables reducing the size of FVG when mitigated.Structures (โครงสร้างตลาด) Settings:isStructBodyCandleBreak: (Boolean) If true, the break must occur with the candle body closing above/below the Swing High/Low. If false, a wick break is sufficient.isCurrentStructToShow: (Boolean) Enables/disables the display of the current market structure lines (blue lines in the example image).pivot_len: Lookback length for identifying Pivot points (Swing High/Low). A smaller value captures smaller, more frequent swings; a larger value captures larger, more significant swings.bullishBosColor, bearishBosColor: Colors for bullish/bearish BOS lines and labels.bosLineStyleOption, bosLineWidth: Style (Solid, Dotted, Dashed) and width of BOS lines.bullishChochColor, bearishChochColor: Colors for bullish/bearish CHoCH lines and labels.chochLineStyleOption, chochLineWidth: Style (Solid, Dotted, Dashed) and width of CHoCH lines.currentStructColor, currentStructLineStyleOption, currentStructLineWidth: Color, style, and width of the current market structure lines.structHistoryNbr: Number of historical breaks (Choch/BoS) to display.Structure Fibonacci (from original code):A set of inputs to enable/disable, define values, colors, styles, and widths for various Fibonacci Levels (0.786, 0.705, 0.618, 0.5, 0.382) that will be calculated from the current market structure.2.2 Helper FunctionsgetLineStyle(lineOption): This function converts the selected string input (e.g., "─", "┈", "╌") into a line.style_ format understood by Pine Script.get_structure_highest_bar(lookback): This function attempts to find the Bar Index of the Swing High within the specified lookback period.get_structure_lowest_bar(lookback): This function attempts to find the Bar Index of the Swing Low within the specified lookback period.is_structure_high_broken(...): This function checks if the current price has broken above _structureHigh (Swing High), considering _highStructBreakPrice (closing price or high price depending on isStructBodyCandleBreak setting).FVGDraw(...): This function takes arrays of FVG Boxes, Types, Mitigation Status, and Labels to process and update the status of FVG (e.g., whether it's mitigated) and adjust the size/position of FVG Boxes and Labels on the chart.2.3 Global VariablesThese are variables declared with var, meaning their values are stored and updated on each bar (persists across bars).structureLines, structureLabels: Arrays to store line and label objects for Choch/BoS lines drawn on the chart.fvgBoxes, fvgTypes, fvgLabels, isFvgMitigated: Arrays to store FVG box data and their respective statuses.structureHigh, structureLow: Stores the price of the significant Swing High/Low of the current market structure.structureHighStartIndex, structureLowStartIndex: Stores the Bar Index of the start point of the significant Swing High/Low.structureDirection: Stores the status of the market structure direction (1 = Bullish, 2 = Bearish, 0 = Undefined).fiboXPrice, fiboXStartIndex, fiboXLine, fiboXLabel: Variables to store data and objects for Fibonacci Levels.isBOSAlert, isCHOCHAlert: (Boolean) Used to trigger alerts in TradingView (if alerts are configured).2.4 FVG ProcessingThis section checks the conditions for FVG formation (Bullish FVG: high < low , Bearish FVG: low > high ).If FVG occurs and isFvgToShow is true, a new box and label are created to display the FVG on the chart.fvgBoxes and fvgLabels are managed to limit the number of FVG displayed according to fvgHistoryNbr and remove older FVG.The FVGDraw function is called to update the FVG status (e.g., whether it's mitigated) and adjust its display.2.5 Structures ProcessingInitialization: At bar_index == 0 (the first bar of the chart), structureHigh, structureLow, structureHighStartIndex, and structureLowStartIndex are initialized.Finding Current High/Low: highest, highestBar, lowest, lowestBar are used to find the highest/lowest price and its Bar Index of it in the last 10 bars (or all bars if the chart is shorter than 10 bars).Calculating Structure Max/Min Bar: structureMaxBar and structureMinBar use get_structure_highest_bar and get_structure_lowest_bar functions to find the Bar Index of the true Swing High/Low (not just the highest/lowest in the lookback but a complete Pivot point).Break Price: lowStructBreakPrice and highStructBreakPrice will be the closing price (close) or the Low/High price, depending on the isStructBodyCandleBreak setting.isStuctureLowBroken / isStructureHighBroken: These conditions check if the price has broken structureLow or structureHigh, considering the break price, previous bar prices, and the Bar Index of the structure's starting point.Choch/BoS Logic (Key Integration with MACD):if(isStuctureLowBroken and is_bearish_macd_cross): This is where MACD plays a role. If the price breaks structureLow (bearish signal) AND the MACD Histogram performs a Bearish Zero Cross (is_bearish_macd_cross is true), the indicator will consider it a Choch or BoS.If structureDirection == 1 (previously bullish) or 0 (undefined), it will be labeled "CHoCH" (changing structure direction to bearish).If structureDirection == 2 (already bearish), it will be labeled "BOS" (confirming bearish structure).line.new and label.new are used to draw the line and label.structureDirection will be updated to 1 (Bullish).structureHighStartIndex, structureLowStartIndex, structureHigh, structureLow will be updated to define the new structure.else if(isStructureHighBroken and is_bullish_macd_cross): Similarly for bullish breaks. If the price breaks structureHigh (bullish signal) AND the MACD Histogram performs a Bullish Zero Cross (is_bullish_macd_cross is true), the indicator will consider it a Choch or BoS.If structureDirection == 2 (previously bearish) or 0 (undefined), it will be labeled "CHoCH" (changing structure direction to bullish).If structureDirection == 1 (already bullish), it will be labeled "BOS" (confirming bullish structure).line.new and label.new are used to draw the line and label.structureDirection will be updated to 2 (Bearish).structureHighStartIndex, structureLowStartIndex, structureHigh, structureLow will be updated to define the new structure.Deleting Old Lines: d.delete_line (if the library works) will be called to delete old lines and labels when their number exceeds structHistoryNbr.Updating Structure High/Low (else block): If no break occurs, but the current price is higher than structureHigh or lower than structureLow in the corresponding direction (e.g., still bullish and making a new high), structureHigh or structureLow will be updated to track the highest/lowest point of the current structure.Current Structure Display:If isCurrentStructToShow is true, the indicator draws structureHighLine and structureLowLine to show the boundaries of the current market structure.Fibonacci Display:If isFiboXToShow is true, the indicator calculates and draws various Fibonacci Levels (0.786, 0.705, 0.618, 0.5, 0.382) based on the structureHigh and structureLow of the current market structure.Alerts:alertcondition: Used to set up alerts in TradingView when BOS or CHOCH signals occur.plot(na):plot(na) is an important statement in indicators that do not plot data series directly on the chart (e.g., not plotting EMA or RSI lines) but instead draw objects (Line, Label, Box).Having plot(na) helps Pine Script recognize that this indicator has an output displayed on the chart, even if it's not a regularly plotted series.3. How to UseCopy all the code in the immersive block above.Go to TradingView and open your desired chart.Click on the "Pine Editor" menu at the bottom of the screen.Delete any existing code and paste the copied code in its place.Click the "Add to Chart" button.The indicator will be added to your chart automatically. You can click the gear icon next to the indicator's name on the chart to access the settings window and customize it to your needs.I hope this explanation helps you understand this indicator in detail. If anything is unclear, or you need further adjustments, please let me know.
Market Zone Analyzer[BullByte]Understanding the Market Zone Analyzer
---
1. Purpose of the Indicator
The Market Zone Analyzer is a Pine Script™ (version 6) indicator designed to streamline market analysis on TradingView. Rather than scanning multiple separate tools, it unifies four core dimensions—trend strength, momentum, price action, and market activity—into a single, consolidated view. By doing so, it helps traders:
• Save time by avoiding manual cross-referencing of disparate signals.
• Reduce decision-making errors that can arise from juggling multiple indicators.
• Gain a clear, reliable read on whether the market is in a bullish, bearish, or sideways phase, so they can more confidently decide to enter, exit, or hold a position.
---
2. Why a Trader Should Use It
• Unified View: Combines all essential market dimensions into one easy-to-read score and dashboard, eliminating the need to piece together signals manually.
• Adaptability: Automatically adjusts its internal weighting for trend, momentum, and price action based on current volatility. Whether markets are choppy or calm, the indicator remains relevant.
• Ease of Interpretation: Outputs a simple “BULLISH,” “BEARISH,” or “SIDEWAYS” label, supplemented by an intuitive on-chart dashboard and an oscillator plot that visually highlights market direction.
• Reliability Features: Built-in smoothing of the net score and hysteresis logic (requiring consecutive confirmations before flips) minimize false signals during noisy or range-bound phases.
---
3. Why These Specific Indicators?
This script relies on a curated set of well-established technical tools, each chosen for its particular strength in measuring one of the four core dimensions:
1. Trend Strength:
• ADX/DMI (Average Directional Index / Directional Movement Index): Measures how strong a trend is, and whether the +DI line is above the –DI line (bullish) or vice versa (bearish).
• Moving Average Slope (Fast MA vs. Slow MA): Compares a shorter-period SMA to a longer-period SMA; if the fast MA sits above the slow MA, it confirms an uptrend, and vice versa for a downtrend.
• Ichimoku Cloud Differential (Senkou A vs. Senkou B): Provides a forward-looking view of trend direction; Senkou A above Senkou B signals bullishness, and the opposite signals bearishness.
2. Momentum:
• Relative Strength Index (RSI): Identifies overbought (above its dynamically calculated upper bound) or oversold (below its lower bound) conditions; changes in RSI often precede price reversals.
• Stochastic %K: Highlights shifts in short-term momentum by comparing closing price to the recent high/low range; values above its upper band signal bullish momentum, below its lower band signal bearish momentum.
• MACD Histogram: Measures the difference between the MACD line and its signal line; a positive histogram indicates upward momentum, a negative histogram indicates downward momentum.
3. Price Action:
• Highest High / Lowest Low (HH/LL) Range: Over a defined lookback period, this captures breakout or breakdown levels. A closing price near the recent highs (with a positive MA slope) yields a bullish score, and near the lows (with a negative MA slope) yields a bearish score.
• Heikin-Ashi Doji Detection: Uses Heikin-Ashi candles to identify indecision or continuation patterns. A small Heikin-Ashi body (doji) relative to recent volatility is scored as neutral; a larger body in the direction of the MA slope is scored bullish or bearish.
• Candle Range Measurement: Compares each candle’s high-low range against its own dynamic band (average range ± standard deviation). Large candles aligning with the prevailing trend score bullish or bearish accordingly; unusually small candles can indicate exhaustion or consolidation.
4. Market Activity:
• Bollinger Bands Width (BBW): Measures the distance between BB upper and lower bands; wide bands indicate high volatility, narrow bands indicate low volatility.
• Average True Range (ATR): Quantifies average price movement (volatility). A sudden spike in ATR suggests a volatile environment, while a contraction suggests calm.
• Keltner Channels Width (KCW): Similar to BBW but uses ATR around an EMA. Provides a second layer of volatility context, confirming or contrasting BBW readings.
• Volume (with Moving Average): Compares current volume to its moving average ± standard deviation. High volume validates strong moves; low volume signals potential lack of conviction.
By combining these tools, the indicator captures trend direction, momentum strength, price-action nuances, and overall market energy, yielding a more balanced and comprehensive assessment than any single tool alone.
---
4. What Makes This Indicator Stand Out
• Multi-Dimensional Analysis: Rather than relying on a lone oscillator or moving average crossover, it simultaneously evaluates trend, momentum, price action, and activity.
• Dynamic Weighting: The relative importance of trend, momentum, and price action adjusts automatically based on real-time volatility (Market Activity State). For example, in highly volatile conditions, trend and momentum signals carry more weight; in calm markets, price action signals are prioritized.
• Stability Mechanisms:
• Smoothing: The net score is passed through a short moving average, filtering out noise, especially on lower timeframes.
• Hysteresis: Both Market Activity State and the final bullish/bearish/sideways zone require two consecutive confirmations before flipping, reducing whipsaw.
• Visual Interpretation: A fully customizable on-chart dashboard displays each sub-indicator’s value, regime, score, and comment, all color-coded. The oscillator plot changes color to reflect the current market zone (green for bullish, red for bearish, gray for sideways) and shows horizontal threshold lines at +2, 0, and –2.
---
5. Recommended Timeframes
• Short-Term (5 min, 15 min): Day traders and scalpers can benefit from rapid signals, but should enable smoothing (and possibly disable hysteresis) to reduce false whipsaws.
• Medium-Term (1 h, 4 h): Swing traders find a balance between responsiveness and reliability. Less smoothing is required here, and the default parameters (e.g., ADX length = 14, RSI length = 14) perform well.
• Long-Term (Daily, Weekly): Position traders tracking major trends can disable smoothing for immediate raw readings, since higher-timeframe noise is minimal. Adjust lookback lengths (e.g., increase adxLength, rsiLength) if desired for slower signals.
Tip: If you keep smoothing off, stick to timeframes of 1 h or higher to avoid excessive signal “chatter.”
---
6. How Scoring Works
A. Individual Indicator Scores
Each sub-indicator is assigned one of three discrete scores:
• +1 if it indicates a bullish condition (e.g., RSI above its dynamically calculated upper bound).
• 0 if it is neutral (e.g., RSI between upper and lower bounds).
• –1 if it indicates a bearish condition (e.g., RSI below its dynamically calculated lower bound).
Examples of individual score assignments:
• ADX/DMI:
• +1 if ADX ≥ adxThreshold and +DI > –DI (strong bullish trend)
• –1 if ADX ≥ adxThreshold and –DI > +DI (strong bearish trend)
• 0 if ADX < adxThreshold (trend strength below threshold)
• RSI:
• +1 if RSI > RSI_upperBound
• –1 if RSI < RSI_lowerBound
• 0 otherwise
• ATR (as part of Market Activity):
• +1 if ATR > (ATR_MA + stdev(ATR))
• –1 if ATR < (ATR_MA – stdev(ATR))
• 0 otherwise
Each of the four main categories shares this same +1/0/–1 logic across their sub-components.
B. Category Scores
Once each sub-indicator reports +1, 0, or –1, these are summed within their categories as follows:
• Trend Score = (ADX score) + (MA slope score) + (Ichimoku differential score)
• Momentum Score = (RSI score) + (Stochastic %K score) + (MACD histogram score)
• Price Action Score = (Highest-High/Lowest-Low score) + (Heikin-Ashi doji score) + (Candle range score)
• Market Activity Raw Score = (BBW score) + (ATR score) + (KC width score) + (Volume score)
Each category’s summed value can range between –3 and +3 (for Trend, Momentum, and Price Action), and between –4 and +4 for Market Activity raw.
C. Market Activity State and Dynamic Weight Adjustments
Rather than contributing directly to the netScore like the other three categories, Market Activity determines how much weight to assign to Trend, Momentum, and Price Action:
1. Compute Market Activity Raw Score by summing BBW, ATR, KCW, and Volume individual scores (each +1/0/–1).
2. Bucket into High, Medium, or Low Activity:
• High if raw Score ≥ 2 (volatile market).
• Low if raw Score ≤ –2 (calm market).
• Medium otherwise.
3. Apply Hysteresis (if enabled): The state only flips after two consecutive bars register the same high/low/medium label.
4. Set Category Weights:
• High Activity: Trend = 50 %, Momentum = 35 %, Price Action = 15 %.
• Low Activity: Trend = 25 %, Momentum = 20 %, Price Action = 55 %.
• Medium Activity: Use the trader’s base weight inputs (e.g., Trend = 40 %, Momentum = 30 %, Price Action = 30 % by default).
D. Calculating the Net Score
5. Normalize Base Weights (so that the sum of Trend + Momentum + Price Action always equals 100 %).
6. Determine Current Weights based on the Market Activity State (High/Medium/Low).
7. Compute Each Category’s Contribution: Multiply (categoryScore) × (currentWeight).
8. Sum Contributions to get the raw netScore (a floating-point value that can exceed ±3 when scores are strong).
9. Smooth the netScore over two bars (if smoothing is enabled) to reduce noise.
10. Apply Hysteresis to the Final Zone:
• If the smoothed netScore ≥ +2, the bar is classified as “Bullish.”
• If the smoothed netScore ≤ –2, the bar is classified as “Bearish.”
• Otherwise, it is “Sideways.”
• To prevent rapid flips, the script requires two consecutive bars in the new zone before officially changing the displayed zone (if hysteresis is on).
E. Thresholds for Zone Classification
• BULLISH: netScore ≥ +2
• BEARISH: netScore ≤ –2
• SIDEWAYS: –2 < netScore < +2
---
7. Role of Volatility (Market Activity State) in Scoring
Volatility acts as a dynamic switch that shifts which category carries the most influence:
1. High Activity (Volatile):
• Detected when at least two sub-scores out of BBW, ATR, KCW, and Volume equal +1.
• The script sets Trend weight = 50 % and Momentum weight = 35 %. Price Action weight is minimized at 15 %.
• Rationale: In volatile markets, strong trending moves and momentum surges dominate, so those signals are more reliable than nuanced candle patterns.
2. Low Activity (Calm):
• Detected when at least two sub-scores out of BBW, ATR, KCW, and Volume equal –1.
• The script sets Price Action weight = 55 %, Trend = 25 %, and Momentum = 20 %.
• Rationale: In quiet, sideways markets, subtle price-action signals (breakouts, doji patterns, small-range candles) are often the best early indicators of a new move.
3. Medium Activity (Balanced):
• Raw Score between –1 and +1 from the four volatility metrics.
• Uses whatever base weights the trader has specified (e.g., Trend = 40 %, Momentum = 30 %, Price Action = 30 %).
Because volatility can fluctuate rapidly, the script employs hysteresis on Market Activity State: a new High or Low state must occur on two consecutive bars before weights actually shift. This avoids constant back-and-forth weight changes and provides more stability.
---
8. Scoring Example (Hypothetical Scenario)
• Symbol: Bitcoin on a 1-hour chart.
• Market Activity: Raw volatility sub-scores show BBW (+1), ATR (+1), KCW (0), Volume (+1) → Total raw Score = +3 → High Activity.
• Weights Selected: Trend = 50 %, Momentum = 35 %, Price Action = 15 %.
• Trend Signals:
• ADX strong and +DI > –DI → +1
• Fast MA above Slow MA → +1
• Ichimoku Senkou A > Senkou B → +1
→ Trend Score = +3
• Momentum Signals:
• RSI above upper bound → +1
• MACD histogram positive → +1
• Stochastic %K within neutral zone → 0
→ Momentum Score = +2
• Price Action Signals:
• Highest High/Lowest Low check yields 0 (close not near extremes)
• Heikin-Ashi doji reading is neutral → 0
• Candle range slightly above upper bound but trend is strong, so → +1
→ Price Action Score = +1
• Compute Net Score (before smoothing):
• Trend contribution = 3 × 0.50 = 1.50
• Momentum contribution = 2 × 0.35 = 0.70
• Price Action contribution = 1 × 0.15 = 0.15
• Raw netScore = 1.50 + 0.70 + 0.15 = 2.35
• Since 2.35 ≥ +2 and hysteresis is met, the final zone is “Bullish.”
Although the netScore lands at 2.35 (Bullish), smoothing might bring it slightly below 2.00 on the first bar (e.g., 1.90), in which case the script would wait for a second consecutive reading above +2 before officially classifying the zone as Bullish (if hysteresis is enabled).
---
9. Correlation Between Categories
The four categories—Trend Strength, Momentum, Price Action, and Market Activity—often reinforce or offset one another. The script takes advantage of these natural correlations:
• Bullish Alignment: If ADX is strong and pointed upward, fast MA is above slow MA, and Ichimoku is positive, that usually coincides with RSI climbing above its upper bound and the MACD histogram turning positive. In such cases, both Trend and Momentum categories generate +1 or +2. Because the Market Activity State is likely High (given the accompanying volatility), Trend and Momentum weights are at their peak, so the netScore quickly crosses into Bullish territory.
• Sideways/Consolidation: During a low-volatility, sideways phase, ADX may fall below its threshold, MAs may flatten, and RSI might hover in the neutral band. However, subtle price-action signals (like a small breakout candle or a Heikin-Ashi candle with a slight bias) can still produce a +1 in the Price Action category. If Market Activity is Low, Price Action’s weight (55 %) can carry enough influence—even if Trend and Momentum are neutral—to push the netScore out of “Sideways” into a mild bullish or bearish bias.
• Opposing Signals: When Trend is bullish but Momentum turns negative (for example, price continues up but RSI rolls over), the two scores can partially cancel. Market Activity may remain Medium, in which case the netScore lingers near zero (Sideways). The trader can then wait for either a clearer momentum shift or a fresh price-action breakout before committing.
By dynamically recognizing these correlations and adjusting weights, the indicator ensures that:
• When Trend and Momentum align (and volatility supports it), the netScore leaps strongly into Bullish or Bearish.
• When Trend is neutral but Price Action shows an early move in a low-volatility environment, Price Action’s extra weight in the Low Activity State can still produce actionable signals.
---
10. Market Activity State & Its Role (Detailed)
The Market Activity State is not a direct category score—it is an overarching context setter for how heavily to trust Trend, Momentum, or Price Action. Here’s how it is derived and applied:
1. Calculate Four Volatility Sub-Scores:
• BBW: Compare the current band width to its own moving average ± standard deviation. If BBW > (BBW_MA + stdev), assign +1 (high volatility); if BBW < (BBW_MA × 0.5), assign –1 (low volatility); else 0.
• ATR: Compare ATR to its moving average ± standard deviation. A spike above the upper threshold is +1; a contraction below the lower threshold is –1; otherwise 0.
• KCW: Same logic as ATR but around the KCW mean.
• Volume: Compare current volume to its volume MA ± standard deviation. Above the upper threshold is +1; below the lower threshold is –1; else 0.
2. Sum Sub-Scores → Raw Market Activity Score: Range between –4 and +4.
3. Assign Market Activity State:
• High Activity: Raw Score ≥ +2 (at least two volatility metrics are strongly spiking).
• Low Activity: Raw Score ≤ –2 (at least two metrics signal unusually low volatility or thin volume).
• Medium Activity: Raw Score is between –1 and +1 inclusive.
4. Hysteresis for Stability:
• If hysteresis is enabled, a new state only takes hold after two consecutive bars confirm the same High, Medium, or Low label.
• This prevents the Market Activity State from bouncing around when volatility is on the fence.
5. Set Category Weights Based on Activity State:
• High Activity: Trend = 50 %, Momentum = 35 %, Price Action = 15 %.
• Low Activity: Trend = 25 %, Momentum = 20 %, Price Action = 55 %.
• Medium Activity: Use trader’s base weights (e.g., Trend = 40 %, Momentum = 30 %, Price Action = 30 %).
6. Impact on netScore: Because category scores (–3 to +3) multiply by these weights, High Activity amplifies the effect of strong Trend and Momentum scores; Low Activity amplifies the effect of Price Action.
7. Market Context Tooltip: The dashboard includes a tooltip summarizing the current state—e.g., “High activity, trend and momentum prioritized,” “Low activity, price action prioritized,” or “Balanced market, all categories considered.”
---
11. Category Weights: Base vs. Dynamic
Traders begin by specifying base weights for Trend Strength, Momentum, and Price Action that sum to 100 %. These apply only when volatility is in the Medium band. Once volatility shifts:
• High Volatility Overrides:
• Trend jumps from its base (e.g., 40 %) to 50 %.
• Momentum jumps from its base (e.g., 30 %) to 35 %.
• Price Action is reduced to 15 %.
Example: If base weights were Trend = 40 %, Momentum = 30 %, Price Action = 30 %, then in High Activity they become 50/35/15. A Trend score of +3 now contributes 3 × 0.50 = +1.50 to netScore; a Momentum +2 contributes 2 × 0.35 = +0.70. In total, Trend + Momentum can easily push netScore above the +2 threshold on its own.
• Low Volatility Overrides:
• Price Action leaps from its base (30 %) to 55 %.
• Trend falls to 25 %, Momentum falls to 20 %.
Why? When markets are quiet, subtle candle breakouts, doji patterns, and small-range expansions tend to foreshadow the next swing more effectively than raw trend readings. A Price Action score of +3 in this state contributes 3 × 0.55 = +1.65, which can carry the netScore toward +2—even if Trend and Momentum are neutral or only mildly positive.
Because these weight shifts happen only after two consecutive bars confirm a High or Low state (if hysteresis is on), the indicator avoids constantly flipping its emphasis during borderline volatility phases.
---
12. Dominant Category Explained
Within the dashboard, a label such as “Trend Dominant,” “Momentum Dominant,” or “Price Action Dominant” appears when one category’s absolute weighted contribution to netScore is the largest. Concretely:
• Compute each category’s weighted contribution = (raw category score) × (current weight).
• Compare the absolute values of those three contributions.
• The category with the highest absolute value is flagged as Dominant for that bar.
Why It Matters:
• Momentum Dominant: Indicates that the combined force of RSI, Stochastic, and MACD (after weighting) is pushing netScore farther than either Trend or Price Action. In practice, it means that short-term sentiment and speed of change are the primary drivers right now, so traders should watch for continued momentum signals before committing to a trade.
• Trend Dominant: Means ADX, MA slope, and Ichimoku (once weighted) outweigh the other categories. This suggests a strong directional move is in place; trend-following entries or confirming pullbacks are likely to succeed.
• Price Action Dominant: Occurs when breakout/breakdown patterns, Heikin-Ashi candle readings, and range expansions (after weighting) are the most influential. This often happens in calmer markets, where subtle shifts in candle structure can foreshadow bigger moves.
By explicitly calling out which category is carrying the most weight at any moment, the dashboard gives traders immediate insight into why the netScore is tilting toward bullish, bearish, or sideways.
---
13. Oscillator Plot: How to Read It
The “Net Score” oscillator sits below the dashboard and visually displays the smoothed netScore as a line graph. Key features:
1. Value Range: In normal conditions it oscillates roughly between –3 and +3, but extreme confluences can push it outside that range.
2. Horizontal Threshold Lines:
• +2 Line (Bullish threshold)
• 0 Line (Neutral midline)
• –2 Line (Bearish threshold)
3. Zone Coloring:
• Green Background (Bullish Zone): When netScore ≥ +2.
• Red Background (Bearish Zone): When netScore ≤ –2.
• Gray Background (Sideways Zone): When –2 < netScore < +2.
4. Dynamic Line Color:
• The plotted netScore line itself is colored green in a Bullish Zone, red in a Bearish Zone, or gray in a Sideways Zone, creating an immediate visual cue.
Interpretation Tips:
• Crossing Above +2: Signals a strong enough combined trend/momentum/price-action reading to classify as Bullish. Many traders wait for a clear crossing plus a confirmation candle before entering a long position.
• Crossing Below –2: Indicates a strong Bearish signal. Traders may consider short or exit strategies.
• Rising Slope, Even Below +2: If netScore climbs steadily from neutral toward +2, it demonstrates building bullish momentum.
• Divergence: If price makes a higher high but the oscillator fails to reach a new high, it can warn of weakening momentum and a potential reversal.
---
14. Comments and Their Necessity
Every sub-indicator (ADX, MA slope, Ichimoku, RSI, Stochastic, MACD, HH/LL, Heikin-Ashi, Candle Range, BBW, ATR, KCW, Volume) generates a short comment that appears in the detailed dashboard. Examples:
• “Strong bullish trend” or “Strong bearish trend” for ADX/DMI
• “Fast MA above slow MA” or “Fast MA below slow MA” for MA slope
• “RSI above dynamic threshold” or “RSI below dynamic threshold” for RSI
• “MACD histogram positive” or “MACD histogram negative” for MACD Hist
• “Price near highs” or “Price near lows” for HH/LL checks
• “Bullish Heikin Ashi” or “Bearish Heikin Ashi” for HA Doji scoring
• “Large range, trend confirmed” or “Small range, trend contradicted” for Candle Range
Additionally, the top-row comment for each category is:
• Trend: “Highly Bullish,” “Highly Bearish,” or “Neutral Trend.”
• Momentum: “Strong Momentum,” “Weak Momentum,” or “Neutral Momentum.”
• Price Action: “Bullish Action,” “Bearish Action,” or “Neutral Action.”
• Market Activity: “Volatile Market,” “Calm Market,” or “Stable Market.”
Reasons for These Comments:
• Transparency: Shows exactly how each sub-indicator contributed to its category score.
• Education: Helps traders learn why a category is labeled bullish, bearish, or neutral, building intuition over time.
• Customization: If, for example, the RSI comment says “RSI neutral” despite an impending trend shift, a trader might choose to adjust RSI length or thresholds.
In the detailed dashboard, hovering over each comment cell also reveals a tooltip with additional context (e.g., “Fast MA above slow MA” or “Senkou A above Senkou B”), helping traders understand the precise rule behind that +1, 0, or –1 assignment.
---
15. Real-Life Example (Consolidated)
• Instrument & Timeframe: Bitcoin (BTCUSD), 1-hour chart.
• Current Market Activity: BBW and ATR both spike (+1 each), KCW is moderately high (+1), but volume is only neutral (0) → Raw Market Activity Score = +2 → State = High Activity (after two bars, if hysteresis is on).
• Category Weights Applied: Trend = 50 %, Momentum = 35 %, Price Action = 15 %.
• Trend Sub-Scores:
1. ADX = 25 (above threshold 20) with +DI > –DI → +1.
2. Fast MA (20-period) sits above Slow MA (50-period) → +1.
3. Ichimoku: Senkou A > Senkou B → +1.
→ Trend Score = +3.
• Momentum Sub-Scores:
4. RSI = 75 (above its moving average +1 stdev) → +1.
5. MACD histogram = +0.15 → +1.
6. Stochastic %K = 50 (mid-range) → 0.
→ Momentum Score = +2.
• Price Action Sub-Scores:
7. Price is not within 1 % of the 20-period high/low and slope = positive → 0.
8. Heikin-Ashi body is slightly larger than stdev over last 5 bars with haClose > haOpen → +1.
9. Candle range is just above its dynamic upper bound but trend is already captured, so → +1.
→ Price Action Score = +2.
• Calculate netScore (before smoothing):
• Trend contribution = 3 × 0.50 = 1.50
• Momentum contribution = 2 × 0.35 = 0.70
• Price Action contribution = 2 × 0.15 = 0.30
• Raw netScore = 1.50 + 0.70 + 0.30 = 2.50 → Immediately classified as Bullish.
• Oscillator & Dashboard Output:
• The oscillator line crosses above +2 and turns green.
• Dashboard displays:
• Trend Regime “BULLISH,” Trend Score = 3, Comment = “Highly Bullish.”
• Momentum Regime “BULLISH,” Momentum Score = 2, Comment = “Strong Momentum.”
• Price Action Regime “BULLISH,” Price Action Score = 2, Comment = “Bullish Action.”
• Market Activity State “High,” Comment = “Volatile Market.”
• Weights: Trend 50 %, Momentum 35 %, Price Action 15 %.
• Dominant Category: Trend (because 1.50 > 0.70 > 0.30).
• Overall Score: 2.50, posCount = (three +1s in Trend) + (two +1s in Momentum) + (two +1s in Price Action) = 7 bullish signals, negCount = 0.
• Final Zone = “BULLISH.”
• The trader sees that both Trend and Momentum are reinforcing each other under high volatility. They might wait one more candle for confirmation but already have strong evidence to consider a long.
---
• .
---
Disclaimer
This indicator is strictly a technical analysis tool and does not constitute financial advice. All trading involves risk, including potential loss of capital. Past performance is not indicative of future results. Traders should:
• Always backtest the “Market Zone Analyzer ” on their chosen symbols and timeframes before committing real capital.
• Combine this tool with sound risk management, position sizing, and, if possible, fundamental analysis.
• Understand that no indicator is foolproof; always be prepared for unexpected market moves.
Goodluck
-BullByte!
---
Long and Short Term Highs and LowsLong and Short Term Highs and Lows
Overview:
This indicator is designed to help traders identify significant price points by marking new highs and lows over two distinct timeframes—a long-term and a short-term period. It achieves this by drawing optional channel lines that outline the highest highs and lowest lows over the chosen time periods and by plotting visual markers (triangles) on the chart when a new high or low is detected.
Key Features:
Dual Timeframe Analysis:
Long Term: Uses a user-defined “Time Period” (default 52) and “Time Unit” (default: Weekly) to determine long-term high and low levels.
Short Term: Uses a separate “Time Period” (default 50) and “Time Unit” (default: Daily) to compute short-term high and low levels.
Optional Channel Display:
For both long and short term periods, you have the option to display a channel by plotting the highest and lowest values as lines. This visual channel helps to delineate the range within which the price has traded over the selected period.
New High/Low Markers:
The indicator identifies moments when the highest high or lowest low is updated relative to the previous bar.
When a new high is established, an up triangle is plotted above the bar.
Conversely, when a new low occurs, a down triangle is plotted below the bar.
Separate input toggles allow you to enable or disable these markers independently for the long-term and short-term setups.
Inputs and Settings:
Long Term High/Low Period Settings:
Show New High/Low? (STW): Toggle to enable or disable the plotting of new high/low markers for the long-term period.
Time Period: The number of bars used to calculate the highest high and lowest low (default is 52).
Time Unit: The timeframe on which the long-term calculation is based (default is Weekly).
Show Channel? (SCW): Toggle to display the channel lines that connect the long-term high and low levels.
Short Term High/Low Period Settings:
Show New High/Low?: Toggle to enable or disable the plotting of new high/low markers for the short-term period.
Time Period: The number of bars used for calculating the short-term extremes (default is 50).
Time Unit: The timeframe on which the short-term calculations are based (default is Daily).
Show Channel?: Toggle to display the channel lines for the short-term highs and lows.
Indicator Logic:
Channel Calculation:
The script uses the request.security function to pull data from the specified timeframes. For each timeframe:
It calculates the lowest low over the defined period using ta.lowest.
It calculates the highest high over the defined period using ta.highest.
These values can be optionally plotted as channel lines when the “Show Channel?” option is enabled.
New High/Low Detection:
For each timeframe, the indicator compares the current high (or low) with its immediate previous value:
New High: When the current high exceeds the previous bar’s high, an up triangle is drawn above the bar.
New Low: When the current low falls below the previous bar’s low, a down triangle is drawn below the bar.
Usage and Interpretation:
Trend Identification:
When new highs (or lows) occur, they can signal the start of a strong upward (or downward) movement. The indicator helps you visually track these critical turning points over both longer and shorter periods.
Channel Breakouts:
The optional channel display offers additional context. Price movement beyond these channels may indicate a breakout or a significant shift in trend.
Customizable Timeframes:
You can adjust both the time period and time unit to fit your trading style—whether you’re focusing on longer-term trends or short-term price action.
Conclusion:
This indicator provides a dual-layer analysis by combining long-term and short-term perspectives, making it a versatile tool for identifying key highs and lows. Whether you are looking to confirm trend strength or spot potential breakouts, the “Long and Short Term Highs and Lows” indicator adds a valuable visual element to your TradingView charts.
Statistcal Daily Profile & Ranges# Statistical Daily Profile & Ranges - TradingView Publication Guide
## Overview
The **Statistical Daily Profile & Ranges** indicator is a comprehensive tool designed to analyze intraday session behavior and daily range characteristics. It combines Average Daily Range (ADR) projection levels with detailed session-by-session statistics and probability-based trading insights derived from historical price action patterns.
## What This Indicator Does
This indicator provides traders with three core analytical components:
1. **ADR Projection Levels** - Dynamic support/resistance levels based on historical daily ranges
2. **Session Range Analysis** - Visual boxes and statistical breakdowns for four key trading sessions
3. **Dynamic Probability Display** - Real-time probability statistics based on overnight session relationships
## How It Works
### Average Daily Range (ADR) Calculation
The indicator calculates the average daily range over a user-defined lookback period (default: 10 days) and projects this range from each day's opening price. This creates two key levels:
- **ADR High**: Opening price + average daily range
- **ADR Low**: Opening price - average daily range
- **ADR Median**: The opening price (middle of the projected range)
These levels are recalculated at the start of each trading day and extend forward, providing dynamic support and resistance zones based on recent volatility characteristics.
### Session Tracking & Statistics
The indicator monitors four distinct trading sessions (times in Eastern Time):
1. **Asia Session** (8:00 PM - 2:00 AM)
2. **London Session** (2:00 AM - 8:00 AM)
3. **NY Open** (8:00 AM - 9:00 AM)
4. **NY Initial Balance** (9:30 AM - 10:30 AM)
For each session, the indicator:
- Draws a colored box showing the session's high-to-low range
- Tracks the opening price, high, and low
- Stores historical data for statistical analysis
- Calculates average ranges by day of week (Monday through Friday)
The session statistics are displayed in a customizable table showing average point ranges for each session across different weekdays, helping traders identify which sessions and days typically produce the most movement.
### Dynamic Probability System
The indicator analyzes the relationship between the Asia and London sessions to determine the current market setup. After the London session closes, it automatically detects one of four possible conditions:
**1. London Engulfs Asia**
- London session breaks both above Asia's high AND below Asia's low
- This indicates strong momentum during the European session
- Most common occurrence pattern
**2. Asia Engulfs London**
- Asia session range completely contains the London session range
- Indicates consolidation during London hours
- Relatively rare pattern (occurs approximately 5.36% of the time)
**3. London Partially Engulfs Upwards**
- London breaks above Asia's high but stays above Asia's low
- Suggests bullish momentum continuation from Asia into London
**4. London Partially Engulfs Downwards**
- London breaks below Asia's low but stays below Asia's high
- Suggests bearish momentum continuation from Asia into London
Once a condition is detected, the indicator displays a probability table showing historically observed outcomes for that specific setup, including:
- Probability of NY session taking out key levels (Asia high/low, London high/low)
- Probability of NY session engulfing the entire overnight range
- Directional bias for NY Cash session (9:30 AM - 4:00 PM)
## How to Use This Indicator
### Initial Setup
1. Add the indicator to your chart (works on any intraday timeframe below Daily)
2. Adjust the **ADR Days** setting (default: 10) to control the lookback period for range calculation
3. Adjust the **Session Lookback Days** setting (default: 50) to determine how much historical data feeds the statistics tables
### Reading the ADR Levels
- Use the **ADR High** and **ADR Low** lines as potential profit targets or areas where price may encounter resistance
- The **ADR Median** line represents the opening price and can act as a pivot point for intraday directional bias
- If price reaches the ADR High early in the session, it suggests strong bullish momentum; conversely for ADR Low
- These levels adapt daily based on recent volatility, making them more responsive than static levels
### Interpreting Session Boxes
- **Session boxes** visually highlight when each trading session is active and its price range
- Larger boxes indicate higher volatility during that session
- Compare current session ranges to the statistical averages shown in the table
- Sessions that are unusually quiet or active relative to historical averages may signal compression or expansion
### Using the Session Statistics Table
- The table shows average point ranges for each session broken down by weekday
- Identify which sessions typically produce the most movement on specific days
- For example, if London on Thursdays averages 40 points while Mondays average 25 points, you can adjust position sizing or expectations accordingly
- The **Total** column shows the overall average across all days
- Sample sizes (shown in brackets if enabled) indicate data reliability
### Trading with the Probability Table
The probability table updates dynamically after the London session closes and shows statistically probable outcomes based on 12 years of NQ futures data.
**Important Limitations:**
- **These probabilities are derived from NQ (Nasdaq E-mini futures) data only**
- **Do NOT apply these probability statistics to other instruments** (ES, stocks, forex, etc.)
- The probabilities represent historical frequencies, not guarantees
- Always combine with your own analysis, risk management, and market context
**How to Apply the Probabilities:**
When **London Engulfs Asia**:
- Watch for NY session to take out London's extremes (72.33% probability for high, 71.12% for low)
- Slight bullish bias in NY Cash session (54.80% vs 45.20%)
- Lower probability of complete overnight engulfment (44.13%)
When **Asia Engulfs London** (rare - 5.36% occurrence):
- Higher probability NY takes Asia's high (75.86%)
- Moderately high probability NY takes Asia's low (65.52%)
- Slight increase in bullish bias (58.42% vs 41.58%)
- Recognize this as an unusual setup
When **London Partially Engulfs Upwards**:
- Very high probability NY takes London high (81.51%)
- Strong probability NY takes London low (64.45%)
- Moderate probability NY takes Asian low (53.16%)
- Slight bullish bias (55.52%)
When **London Partially Engulfs Downwards**:
- Very high probability NY takes London low (75.29%)
- Strong probability NY takes London high (68.80%)
- Moderate probability NY takes Asian high (56.44%)
- Slight bullish bias maintained (52.99%)
### Practical Trading Applications
**Scenario 1: Range Projection**
If the ADR is 500 points and the market opens at 25,000:
- ADR High: 25,500 (potential resistance/target)
- ADR Low: 24,500 (potential support/target)
- Monitor how price interacts with these levels throughout the day
**Scenario 2: Session-Based Trading**
Using the statistics table, you notice London on Wednesdays averages 35 points. During a Wednesday London session:
- If London has already moved 30 points, the session may be exhausting its typical range
- If London has only moved 15 points with an hour remaining, there may be expansion potential
- Adjust stop losses and targets based on typical session behavior
**Scenario 3: Probability-Based Setup**
It's 8:05 AM ET and the indicator shows "London Partially Engulfs Upwards":
- You now know there's an 81.51% historical probability NY will take out London's high
- There's a 53.16% probability NY will reach down to Asia's low
- The NY Cash session has a slight bullish bias (55.52%)
- Consider this alongside your technical analysis for directional bias and level targeting
## Customization Options
### Visual Settings
- **Line Width**: Adjust thickness of ADR levels
- **ADR Color/Style**: Customize appearance of ADR projection lines (solid, dashed, dotted)
- **Median Line**: Toggle visibility and customize appearance separately
- **Session Box Colors**: Customize each session's box color independently
- **Show Session Boxes**: Toggle session box visibility on/off
### Label Settings
- **ADR Labels**: Show/hide labels for ADR High and ADR Low, adjust size
- **Median Label**: Separate control for median line label
- **Session Labels**: Show/hide session name labels, adjust size
- **Label Colors**: Customize text colors for all labels
### Table Settings
- **Session Stats Table**: Position (9 locations available), size (Tiny to Huge), toggle on/off
- **Sample Sizes**: Show/hide the number of historical samples used for each calculation
- **Probabilities Table**: Separate position and size controls, toggle on/off
### Session Times
- Each session's time range can be customized to fit different markets or preferences
- All times are in Eastern Time (America/New_York timezone)
## Technical Notes
### Data Requirements
- The indicator requires sufficient historical data based on your lookback settings
- Minimum recommended: 50+ days of intraday data for reliable statistics
- Works on any timeframe below Daily (1-minute, 5-minute, 15-minute, etc.)
### Calculation Methodology
- **ADR Calculation**: Simple average of absolute daily high-low ranges
- **Session Statistics**: Mean average of ranges for each session filtered by day of week
- **Condition Detection**: Boolean logic comparing session high/low relationships
- All calculations update in real-time as new bars form
### Probability Data Source
The probability statistics displayed in the dynamic table are derived from:
- **Dataset**: 12 years of NQ (Nasdaq E-mini futures) historical data
- **Methodology**: Frequency analysis of outcomes following specific setup conditions
- **Time Period**: Multiple market cycles including various volatility regimes
**Critical Warning**: These probabilities are specific to NQ and reflect that instrument's behavior patterns. Market microstructure, participant behavior, and volatility characteristics differ significantly across instruments. Do not apply these NQ-derived probabilities to other markets (ES, RTY, YM, individual stocks, forex, commodities, etc.).
## Best Practices
1. **Combine with Other Analysis**: Use this indicator as one component of a complete trading methodology, not a standalone system
2. **Respect Risk Management**: Probabilities are not certainties; always use proper position sizing and stop losses
3. **Context Matters**: High-impact news events, holiday trading, and extreme volatility can invalidate typical patterns
4. **Verify Statistics**: Monitor your own results and compare to the displayed probabilities
5. **Adapt Session Times**: If trading instruments with different active hours, adjust session times accordingly
6. **Regular Calibration**: Periodically review if the session averages and probabilities remain relevant to current market conditions
## Understanding Originality
This indicator is original in its approach to combining three analytical frameworks into a single tool:
1. **Dynamic ADR Projection**: Unlike static pivot points, these levels adapt daily based on recent volatility
2. **Session-Specific Statistics**: Goes beyond simple volume profiles by quantifying average ranges for specific time windows across weekdays
3. **Conditional Probability Display**: Automatically detects overnight session relationships and displays relevant probability data rather than showing all scenarios simultaneously
The conditional logic system that determines which probability set to display is a key differentiator—traders only see the statistics relevant to the current market setup, reducing information overload and improving decision-making clarity.
## Summary
The **Statistical Daily Profile & Ranges** indicator provides traders with a comprehensive framework for understanding daily range potential, session-specific behavior patterns, and probability-based setup analysis. By combining ADR projection levels with detailed session statistics and dynamic probability displays, traders gain multiple perspectives on potential price movement within the trading day.
The indicator is most effective when used to:
- Set realistic profit targets based on average daily range
- Identify which sessions typically produce movement on specific weekdays
- Understand probability-weighted outcomes for different overnight setup conditions (NQ only)
- Visualize session ranges and compare them to historical averages
Remember that all statistical analysis reflects historical patterns, and market behavior can change. Always combine indicator signals with sound risk management, proper position sizing, and your own market analysis.
VV Moving Average Convergence Divergence # VMACDv3 - Volume-Weighted MACD with A/D Divergence Detection
## Overview
**VMACDv3** (Volume-Weighted Moving Average Convergence Divergence Version 3) is a momentum indicator that applies volume-weighting to traditional MACD calculations on price, while using the Accumulation/Distribution (A/D) line for divergence detection. This hybrid approach combines volume-weighted price momentum with volume distribution analysis for comprehensive market insight.
## Key Features
- **Volume-Weighted Price MACD**: Traditional MACD calculation on price but weighted by volume for earlier signals
- **A/D Divergence Detection**: Identifies when A/D trend diverges from MACD momentum
- **Volume Strength Filtering**: Distinguishes high-volume confirmations from low-volume noise
- **Color-Coded Histogram**: 4-color system showing momentum direction and volume strength
- **Real-Time Alerts**: Background colors and alert conditions for bullish/bearish divergences
## Difference from ACCDv3
| Aspect | VMACDv3 | ACCDv3 |
|--------|---------|---------|
| **MACD Input** | **Price (Close)** | **A/D Line** |
| **Volume Weighting** | Applied to price | Applied to A/D line |
| **Primary Signal** | Volume-weighted price momentum | Volume distribution momentum |
| **Use Case** | Price momentum with volume confirmation | Volume flow and accumulation/distribution |
| **Sensitivity** | More responsive to price changes | More responsive to volume patterns |
| **Best For** | Trend following, breakouts | Volume analysis, smart money tracking |
**Key Insight**: VMACDv3 shows *where price is going* with volume weight, while ACCDv3 shows *where volume is accumulating/distributing*.
## Components
### 1. Volume-Weighted MACD on Price
Unlike standard MACD that uses simple price EMAs, VMACDv3 weights each price by its corresponding volume:
```
Fast Line = EMA(Price × Volume, 12) / EMA(Volume, 12)
Slow Line = EMA(Price × Volume, 26) / EMA(Volume, 26)
MACD = Fast Line - Slow Line
```
**Benefits of Volume Weighting**:
- High-volume price movements have greater impact
- Filters out low-volume noise and false moves
- Provides earlier trend change signals
- Better reflects institutional activity
### 2. Accumulation/Distribution (A/D) Line
Used for divergence detection, measuring buying/selling pressure:
```
A/D = Σ ((2 × Close - Low - High) / (High - Low)) × Volume
```
- **Rising A/D**: Accumulation (buying pressure)
- **Falling A/D**: Distribution (selling pressure)
- **Doji Handling**: When High = Low, contribution is zero
### 3. Signal Lines
- **MACD Line** (Blue, #2962FF): The fast-slow difference showing momentum
- **Signal Line** (Orange, #FF6D00): EMA or SMA smoothing of MACD
- **Zero Line**: Reference for bullish (above) vs bearish (below) bias
### 4. Histogram Color System
The histogram uses 4 distinct colors based on **direction** and **volume strength**:
| Condition | Color | Meaning |
|-----------|-------|---------|
| Rising + High Volume | **Dark Green** (#1B5E20) | Strong bullish momentum with volume confirmation |
| Rising + Low Volume | **Light Teal** (#26A69A) | Bullish momentum but weak volume (less reliable) |
| Falling + High Volume | **Dark Red** (#B71C1C) | Strong bearish momentum with volume confirmation |
| Falling + Low Volume | **Light Pink** (#FFCDD2) | Bearish momentum but weak volume (less reliable) |
Additional shading:
- **Light Cyan** (#B2DFDB): Positive but not rising (momentum stalling)
- **Bright Red** (#FF5252): Negative and accelerating down
### 5. Divergence Detection
VMACDv3 compares A/D trend against volume-weighted price MACD:
#### Bullish Divergence (Green Background)
- **Condition**: A/D is trending up BUT MACD is negative and trending down
- **Interpretation**: Volume is accumulating while price momentum appears weak
- **Signal**: Smart money accumulation, potential bullish reversal
- **Action**: Look for long entries, especially at support levels
#### Bearish Divergence (Red Background)
- **Condition**: A/D is trending down BUT MACD is positive and trending up
- **Interpretation**: Volume is distributing while price momentum appears strong
- **Signal**: Smart money distribution, potential bearish reversal
- **Action**: Consider exits, avoid new longs, watch for breakdown
## Parameters
| Parameter | Default | Range | Description |
|-----------|---------|-------|-------------|
| **Source** | Close | OHLC/HLC3/etc | Price source for MACD calculation |
| **Fast Length** | 12 | 1-50 | Period for fast EMA (shorter = more sensitive) |
| **Slow Length** | 26 | 1-100 | Period for slow EMA (longer = smoother) |
| **Signal Smoothing** | 9 | 1-50 | Period for signal line (MACD smoothing) |
| **Signal Line MA Type** | EMA | SMA/EMA | Moving average type for signal calculation |
| **Volume MA Length** | 20 | 5-100 | Period for volume average (strength filter) |
## Usage Guide
### Reading the Indicator
1. **MACD Lines (Blue & Orange)**
- **Blue Line (MACD)**: Volume-weighted price momentum
- **Orange Line (Signal)**: Smoothed trend of MACD
- **Crossovers**: Blue crosses above orange = bullish, below = bearish
- **Distance**: Wider gap = stronger momentum
- **Zero Line Position**: Above = bullish bias, below = bearish bias
2. **Histogram Colors**
- **Dark Green (#1B5E20)**: Strong bullish move with high volume - **most reliable buy signal**
- **Light Teal (#26A69A)**: Bullish but low volume - wait for confirmation
- **Dark Red (#B71C1C)**: Strong bearish move with high volume - **most reliable sell signal**
- **Light Pink (#FFCDD2)**: Bearish but low volume - may be temporary dip
3. **Background Divergence Alerts**
- **Green Background**: A/D accumulating while price weak - potential bottom
- **Red Background**: A/D distributing while price strong - potential top
- Most powerful at key support/resistance levels
### Trading Strategies
#### Strategy 1: Volume-Confirmed Trend Following
1. Wait for MACD to cross above zero line
2. Look for **dark green** histogram bars (high volume confirmation)
3. Enter long on second consecutive dark green bar
4. Hold while histogram remains green
5. Exit when histogram turns light green or red appears
6. Set stop below recent swing low
**Example**:
```
Price: 26,400 → 26,450 (rising)
MACD: -50 → +20 (crosses zero)
Histogram: Light teal → Dark green → Dark green
Volume: 50k → 75k → 90k (increasing)
```
#### Strategy 2: Divergence Reversal Trading
1. Identify divergence background (green = bullish, red = bearish)
2. Confirm with price structure (support/resistance, chart patterns)
3. Wait for MACD to cross signal line in divergence direction
4. Enter on first **dark colored** histogram bar after divergence
5. Set stop beyond divergence area
6. Target previous swing high/low
**Example - Bullish Divergence**:
```
Price: Making lower lows (26,350 → 26,300 → 26,250)
A/D: Rising (accumulation)
MACD: Below zero but starting to curve up
Background: Green shading appears
Entry: MACD crosses signal line + dark green bar
Stop: Below 26,230
Target: 26,450 (previous high)
```
#### Strategy 3: Momentum Scalping
1. Trade only in direction of MACD zero line (above = long, below = short)
2. Enter on dark colored bars only
3. Exit on first light colored bar or opposite color
4. Quick in and out (1-5 minute holds)
5. Tight stops (0.2-0.5% depending on instrument)
#### Strategy 4: Histogram Pattern Trading
**V-Bottom Reversal (Bullish)**:
- Red histogram bars start rising (becoming less negative)
- Forms "V" shape at the bottom
- Transitions to light red → light teal → **dark green**
- Entry: First dark green bar
- Signal: Momentum reversal with volume
**Λ-Top Reversal (Bearish)**:
- Green histogram bars start falling (becoming less positive)
- Forms inverted "V" at the top
- Transitions to light green → light pink → **dark red**
- Entry: First dark red bar
- Signal: Momentum exhaustion with volume
### Multi-Timeframe Analysis
**Recommended Approach**:
1. **Higher Timeframe (15m/1h)**: Identify overall trend direction
2. **Trading Timeframe (5m)**: Time entries using VMACDv3 signals
3. **Lower Timeframe (1m)**: Fine-tune entry prices
**Example Setup**:
```
15-minute: MACD above zero (bullish bias)
5-minute: Dark green histogram appears after pullback
1-minute: Enter on break of recent high with volume
```
### Volume Strength Interpretation
The volume filter compares current volume to 20-period average:
- **Volume > Average**: Dark colors (green/red) - high confidence signals
- **Volume < Average**: Light colors (teal/pink) - lower confidence signals
**Trading Rules**:
- ✓ **Aggressive**: Take all dark colored signals
- ✓ **Conservative**: Only take dark colors that follow 2+ light colors of same type
- ✗ **Avoid**: Trading light colored signals during high volatility
- ✗ **Avoid**: Ignoring volume context during news events
## Technical Details
### Volume-Weighted Calculation
```pine
// Volume-weighted fast EMA
fast_ma = ta.ema(src * volume, fast_length) / ta.ema(volume, fast_length)
// Volume-weighted slow EMA
slow_ma = ta.ema(src * volume, slow_length) / ta.ema(volume, slow_length)
// MACD is the difference
macd = fast_ma - slow_ma
// Signal line smoothing
signal = ta.ema(macd, signal_length) // or ta.sma() if SMA selected
// Histogram
hist = macd - signal
```
### Divergence Detection Logic
```pine
// A/D trending up if above its 5-period SMA
ad_trend = ad > ta.sma(ad, 5)
// MACD trending up if above zero
macd_trend = macd > 0
// Divergence when trends oppose each other
divergence = ad_trend != macd_trend
// Specific conditions for alerts
bullish_divergence = ad_trend and not macd_trend and macd < 0
bearish_divergence = not ad_trend and macd_trend and macd > 0
```
### Histogram Coloring Logic
```pine
hist_color = (hist >= 0
? (hist < hist
? (vol_strength ? #1B5E20 : #26A69A) // Rising: dark/light green
: #B2DFDB) // Positive but falling: cyan
: (hist < hist
? (vol_strength ? #B71C1C : #FFCDD2) // Rising (less negative): dark/light red
: #FF5252)) // Falling more: bright red
```
## Alerts
Built-in alert conditions for divergence detection:
### Bullish Divergence Alert
- **Trigger**: A/D trending up, MACD negative and trending down
- **Message**: "Bullish Divergence: A/D trending up but MACD trending down"
- **Use Case**: Potential reversal or continuation after pullback
- **Action**: Look for long entry setups
### Bearish Divergence Alert
- **Trigger**: A/D trending down, MACD positive and trending up
- **Message**: "Bearish Divergence: A/D trending down but MACD trending up"
- **Use Case**: Potential top or trend reversal
- **Action**: Consider exits or short entries
### Setting Up Alerts
1. Click "Create Alert" in TradingView
2. Condition: Select "VMACDv3"
3. Choose alert type: "Bullish Divergence" or "Bearish Divergence"
4. Configure: Email, SMS, webhook, or popup
5. Set frequency: "Once Per Bar Close" recommended
## Comparison Tables
### VMACDv3 vs Standard MACD
| Feature | Standard MACD | VMACDv3 |
|---------|---------------|---------|
| **Price Weighting** | Equal weight all bars | Volume-weighted |
| **Sensitivity** | Fixed | Adaptive to volume |
| **False Signals** | More during low volume | Fewer (volume filter) |
| **Divergence** | Price vs MACD | A/D vs MACD |
| **Volume Analysis** | None | Built-in |
| **Color System** | 2 colors | 4+ colors |
| **Best For** | Simple trend following | Volume-confirmed trading |
### VMACDv3 vs ACCDv3
| Aspect | VMACDv3 | ACCDv3 |
|--------|---------|--------|
| **Focus** | Price momentum | Volume distribution |
| **Reactivity** | Faster to price moves | Faster to volume shifts |
| **Best Markets** | Trending, breakouts | Accumulation/distribution phases |
| **Signal Type** | Where price + volume going | Where smart money positioning |
| **Divergence Meaning** | Volume vs price disagreement | A/D vs momentum disagreement |
| **Use Together?** | ✓ Yes, complementary | ✓ Yes, different perspectives |
## Example Trading Scenarios
### Scenario 1: Strong Bullish Breakout
```
Time: 9:30 AM (market open)
Price: Breaks above 26,400 resistance
MACD: Crosses above zero line
Histogram: Dark green bars (#1B5E20)
Volume: 2x average (150k vs 75k avg)
A/D: Rising (no divergence)
Action: Enter long at 26,405
Stop: 26,380 (below breakout)
Target 1: 26,450 (risk:reward 1:2)
Target 2: 26,500 (risk:reward 1:4)
Result: High probability setup with volume confirmation
```
### Scenario 2: False Breakout (Avoided)
```
Time: 2:30 PM (slow period)
Price: Breaks above 26,400 resistance
MACD: Slightly positive
Histogram: Light teal bars (#26A69A)
Volume: 0.5x average (40k vs 75k avg)
A/D: Flat/declining
Action: Avoid trade
Reason: Low volume, no conviction, potential false breakout
Outcome: Price reverses back below 26,400 within 10 minutes
Saved: Avoided losing trade due to volume filter
```
### Scenario 3: Bullish Divergence Bottom
```
Time: 11:00 AM
Price: Making lower lows (26,350 → 26,300 → 26,280)
MACD: Below zero but curving upward
Histogram: Red bars getting shorter (V-bottom forming)
Background: Green shading (divergence alert)
A/D: Rising despite price falling
Volume: Increasing on down bars
Setup:
1. Divergence appears at 26,280 (green background)
2. Wait for MACD to cross signal line
3. First dark green bar appears at 26,290
4. Enter long: 26,295 (next bar open)
5. Stop: 26,265 (below divergence low)
6. Target: 26,350 (previous swing high)
Result: +55 points (30 point risk, 1.8:1 reward)
Key: Divergence + volume confirmation = high probability reversal
```
### Scenario 4: Bearish Divergence Top
```
Time: 1:45 PM
Price: Making higher highs (26,500 → 26,520 → 26,540)
MACD: Positive but flattening
Histogram: Green bars getting shorter (Λ-top forming)
Background: Red shading (bearish divergence)
A/D: Declining despite rising price
Volume: Decreasing on up bars
Setup:
1. Bearish divergence at 26,540 (red background)
2. MACD crosses below signal line
3. First dark red bar appears at 26,535
4. Enter short: 26,530
5. Stop: 26,555 (above divergence high)
6. Target: 26,475 (support level)
Result: +55 points (25 point risk, 2.2:1 reward)
Key: Distribution while price rising = smart money exiting
```
### Scenario 5: V-Bottom Reversal
```
Downtrend in progress
MACD: Deep below zero (-150)
Histogram: Series of dark red bars
Pattern Development:
Bar 1: Dark red, hist = -80, falling
Bar 2: Dark red, hist = -95, falling
Bar 3: Dark red, hist = -100, falling (extreme)
Bar 4: Light pink, hist = -98, rising!
Bar 5: Light pink, hist = -90, rising
Bar 6: Light teal, hist = -75, rising (crosses to positive momentum)
Bar 7: Dark green, hist = -55, rising + volume
Action: Enter long on Bar 7
Reason: V-bottom confirmed with volume
Stop: Below Bar 3 low
Target: Zero line on histogram (mean reversion)
```
## Best Practices
### Entry Rules
✓ **Wait for dark colors**: High-volume confirmation is key
✓ **Confirm divergences**: Use with price support/resistance
✓ **Trade with zero line**: Long above, short below for best odds
✓ **Multiple timeframes**: Align 1m, 5m, 15m signals
✓ **Watch for patterns**: V-bottoms and Λ-tops are reliable
### Exit Rules
✓ **Partial profits**: Take 50% at first target
✓ **Trail stops**: Use histogram color changes
✓ **Respect signals**: Exit on opposite dark color
✓ **Time stops**: Close positions before major news
✓ **End of day**: Square up before close
### Avoid
✗ **Don't chase light colors**: Low volume = low confidence
✗ **Don't ignore divergence**: Early warning system
✗ **Don't overtrade**: Wait for clear setups
✗ **Don't fight the trend**: Zero line dictates bias
✗ **Don't skip stops**: Always use risk management
## Risk Management
### Position Sizing
- **Dark green/red signals**: 1-2% account risk
- **Light signals**: 0.5% account risk or skip
- **Divergence plays**: 1% account risk (higher uncertainty)
- **Multiple confirmations**: Up to 2% account risk
### Stop Loss Placement
- **Trend trades**: Below/above recent swing (20-30 points typical)
- **Breakout trades**: Below/above breakout level (15-25 points)
- **Divergence trades**: Beyond divergence extreme (25-40 points)
- **Scalp trades**: Tight stops at 10-15 points
### Profit Targets
- **Minimum**: 1.5:1 reward to risk ratio
- **Scalps**: 15-25 points (quick in/out)
- **Swing**: 50-100 points (hold through pullbacks)
- **Runners**: Trail with histogram color changes
## Timeframe Recommendations
| Timeframe | Trading Style | Typical Hold | Advantages | Challenges |
|-----------|---------------|--------------|------------|------------|
| **1-minute** | Scalping | 1-5 minutes | Fast profits, many setups | Noisy, high false signals |
| **5-minute** | Intraday | 15-60 minutes | Balance of speed/clarity | Still requires quick decisions |
| **15-minute** | Swing | 1-4 hours | Clearer trends, less noise | Fewer opportunities |
| **1-hour** | Position | 4-24 hours | Strong signals, less monitoring | Wider stops required |
**Recommendation**: Start with 5-minute for best balance of signal quality and opportunity frequency.
## Combining with Other Indicators
### VMACDv3 + ACCDv3
- **Use**: Confirm volume flow with price momentum
- **Signal**: Both showing dark green = highest conviction long
- **Divergence**: VMACDv3 bullish + ACCDv3 bearish = examine price action
### VMACDv3 + RSI
- **Use**: Overbought/oversold with momentum confirmation
- **Signal**: RSI < 30 + dark green VMACD = strong reversal
- **Caution**: RSI > 70 + light green VMACD = potential false breakout
### VMACDv3 + Elder Impulse
- **Use**: Bar coloring + histogram confirmation
- **Signal**: Green Elder bars + dark green VMACD = aligned momentum
- **Exit**: Blue Elder bars + light colors = momentum stalling
## Limitations
- **Requires volume data**: Will not work on instruments without volume feed
- **Lagging indicator**: MACD inherently follows price (2-3 bar delay)
- **Consolidation noise**: Generates false signals in tight ranges
- **Gap handling**: Large gaps can distort volume-weighted values
- **Not standalone**: Should combine with price action and support/resistance
## Troubleshooting
**Problem**: Too many light colored signals
**Solution**: Increase Volume MA Length to 30-40 for stricter filtering
**Problem**: Missing entries due to waiting for dark colors
**Solution**: Lower Volume MA Length to 10-15 for more signals (accept lower quality)
**Problem**: Divergences not appearing
**Solution**: Verify volume data available; check if A/D line is calculating
**Problem**: Histogram colors not changing
**Solution**: Ensure real-time data feed; refresh indicator
## Version History
- **v3**: Removed traditional MACD, using volume-weighted MACD on price with A/D divergence
- **v2**: Added A/D divergence detection, volume strength filtering, enhanced histogram colors
- **v1**: Basic volume-weighted MACD on price
## Related Indicators
**Companion Tools**:
- **ACCDv3**: Volume-weighted MACD on A/D line (distribution focus)
- **RSIv2**: RSI with A/D divergence detection
- **DMI**: Directional Movement Index with A/D divergence
- **Elder Impulse**: Bar coloring system using volume-weighted MACD
**Use Together**: VMACDv3 (momentum) + ACCDv3 (distribution) + Elder Impulse (bar colors) = complete volume-based trading system
---
*This indicator is for educational purposes. Past performance does not guarantee future results. Always practice proper risk management and never risk more than you can afford to lose.*
TraderDemircan Auto Fibonacci RetracementDescription:
What This Indicator Does:This indicator automatically identifies significant swing high and swing low points within a customizable lookback period and draws comprehensive Fibonacci retracement and extension levels between them. Unlike the manual Fibonacci tool that requires you to constantly redraw levels as price action evolves, this automated version continuously updates the Fibonacci grid based on the most recent major swing points, ensuring you always have current and relevant support/resistance zones displayed on your chart.Key Features:
Automatic Swing Detection: Continuously scans the specified lookback period to find the most significant high and low points, eliminating manual drawing errors
Comprehensive Level Coverage: Plots 16 Fibonacci levels including 7 retracement levels (0.0 to 1.0) and 9 extension levels (1.115 to 3.618)
Top-Down Methodology: Draws from swing high to swing low (right-to-left), following the traditional Fibonacci retracement convention where 100% is at the top
Dual Labeling System: Shows both exact price values and Fibonacci percentages for easy reference
Complete Customization: Individual toggle controls and color selection for each of the 16 levels
Flexible Display Options: Adjust line thickness (1-5), style (solid/dashed/dotted), and extension direction (left/right/both)
Visual Swing Markers: Red diamond at the swing high (starting point) and green diamond at the swing low (ending point)
Optional Trend Line: Connects the two swing points to visualize the overall price movement direction
How It Works:The indicator employs a sophisticated swing point detection algorithm that operates in two stages:Stage 1 - Find the Swing Low (Support Base):
Scans the entire lookback period to identify the lowest low, which becomes the anchor point (0.0 level in traditional retracement terms, though displayed at the bottom of the grid).Stage 2 - Find the Swing High (Resistance Peak):
After identifying the swing low, searches for the highest high that occurred after that low point, establishing the swing range. This creates a valid price movement range for Fibonacci analysis.Fibonacci Calculation Method:
The indicator uses the top-down approach where:
1.0 Level = Swing High (100% retracement, the top)
0.0 Level = Swing Low (0% retracement, the bottom)
Retracement Levels (0.236 to 0.786) = Potential support zones during pullbacks from the high
Extension Levels (1.115 to 3.618) = Potential target zones below the swing low
Formula: Price = SwingHigh - (SwingHigh - SwingLow) × FibonacciLevelThis ensures that 0.0 is at the bottom and extensions (>1.0) plot below the swing low, following standard Fibonacci retracement convention.Fibonacci Levels Explained:Retracement Levels (0.0 - 1.0):
0.0 (Gray): Swing low - the base support level
0.236 (Red): Shallow retracement, first minor support
0.382 (Orange): Moderate retracement, commonly watched support
0.5 (Purple): Psychological midpoint, significant support/resistance
0.618 (Blue - Golden Ratio): The most important retracement level, high-probability reversal zone
0.786 (Cyan): Deep retracement, last defense before full reversal
1.0 (Gray): Swing high - the initial resistance level
Extension Levels (1.115 - 3.618):
1.115 (Green): First extension, minimal downside target
1.272 (Light Green): Minor extension, common profit target
1.414 (Yellow-Green): Square root of 2, mathematical significance
1.618 (Gold - Golden Extension): Primary downside target, most watched extension level
2.0 (Orange-Red): 200% extension, psychological round number
2.382 (Pink): Secondary extension target
2.618 (Purple): Deep extension, major target zone
3.272 (Deep Purple): Extreme extension level
3.618 (Blue): Maximum extension, rare but powerful target
How to Use:For Retracement Trading (Buying Pullbacks in Uptrends):
Wait for price to make a significant move up from swing low to swing high
When price starts pulling back, watch for reactions at key Fibonacci levels
Most common entry zones: 0.382, 0.5, and especially 0.618 (golden ratio)
Enter long positions when price shows reversal signals (candlestick patterns, volume increase) at these levels
Place stop loss below the next Fibonacci level
Target: Return to swing high or higher extension levels
For Extension Trading (Profit Targets):
After price breaks below the swing low (0.0 level), use extensions as profit targets
First target: 1.272 (conservative)
Primary target: 1.618 (golden extension - most commonly reached)
Extended target: 2.618 (for strong trends)
Extreme target: 3.618 (only in powerful trending moves)
For Counter-Trend Trading (Fading Extremes):
When price reaches deep retracements (0.786 or below), look for exhaustion signals
Watch for divergences between price and momentum indicators at these levels
Enter reversal trades with tight stops below the swing low
Target: 0.5 or 0.382 levels on the bounce
For Trend Continuation:
In strong uptrends, shallow retracements (0.236 to 0.382) often hold
Use these as low-risk entry points to join the existing trend
Failure to hold 0.5 suggests weakening momentum
Breaking below 0.618 often indicates trend reversal, not just retracement
Multi-Timeframe Strategy:
Use daily timeframe Fibonacci for major support/resistance zones
Use 4H or 1H Fibonacci for precise entry timing within those zones
Confluence between multiple timeframe Fibonacci levels creates high-probability zones
Example: Daily 0.618 level aligning with 4H 0.5 level = strong support
Settings Guide:Lookback Period (10-500):
Short (20-50): Captures recent swings, more frequent updates, suited for day trading
Medium (50-150): Balanced approach, good for swing trading (default: 100)
Long (150-500): Identifies major market structure, suited for position trading
Higher values = more stable levels but slower to adapt to new trends
Pivot Sensitivity (1-20):
Controls how many candles are required to confirm a swing point
Low (1-5): More sensitive, identifies minor swings (default: 5)
High (10-20): Less sensitive, only major swings qualify
Use higher sensitivity on lower timeframes to filter noise
Individual Level Toggles:
Enable only the levels you actively trade to reduce chart clutter
Common minimalist setup: Show only 0.382, 0.5, 0.618, 1.0, 1.618, 2.618
Comprehensive setup: Enable all levels for maximum information
Visual Customization:
Line Thickness: Thicker lines (3-5) for presentation, thinner (1-2) for trading
Line Style: Solid for primary levels (0.5, 0.618, 1.618), dashed/dotted for secondary
Price Labels: Essential for knowing exact entry/exit prices
Percent Labels: Helpful for quickly identifying which Fibonacci level you're looking at
Extension Direction: Extend right for forward-looking analysis, left for historical context
What Makes This Original:While Fibonacci indicators are common on TradingView, this script's originality comes from:
Intelligent Two-Stage Detection: Unlike simple high/low finders, this uses a sequential approach (find low first, then find the high that occurred after it), ensuring logical price flow representation
Comprehensive Level Set: Includes 16 levels spanning from retracement to extreme extensions, more than most Fibonacci tools
Top-Down Methodology: Properly implements the traditional Fibonacci retracement convention (high to low) rather than the reverse
Automatic Range Validation: Only draws Fibonacci when both swing points are valid and in the correct temporal order
Dual Extension Options: Separate controls for extending lines left (historical context) and right (forward projection)
Smart Label Positioning: Places percentage labels on the left and price labels on the right for clarity
Visual Swing Confirmation: Diamond markers at swing points help users understand why levels are positioned where they are
Important Considerations:
Historical Nature: Fibonacci retracements are based on past price swings; they don't predict future moves, only suggest potential support/resistance
Self-Fulfilling Prophecy: Fibonacci levels work partly because many traders watch them, creating actual support/resistance at those levels
Not All Levels Hold: In strong trends, price may slice through multiple Fibonacci levels without pausing
Context Matters: Fibonacci works best when aligned with other support/resistance (previous highs/lows, moving averages, trendlines)
Volume Confirmation: The most reliable Fibonacci reversals occur with volume spikes at key levels
Dynamic Updates: The levels will redraw as new swing highs/lows form, so don't rely solely on static screenshots
Best Practices:
Don't Trade Blindly: Fibonacci levels are zones, not exact prices. Look for confirmation (candlestick patterns, indicators, volume)
Combine with Price Action: Watch for pin bars, engulfing candles, or doji at key Fibonacci levels
Use Stop Losses: Place stops beyond the next Fibonacci level to give trades room but limit risk
Scale In/Out: Consider entering partial positions at 0.5 and adding more at 0.618 rather than all-in at one level
Check Multiple Timeframes: Daily Fibonacci + 4H Fibonacci convergence = high-probability zone
Respect the 0.618: This golden ratio level is historically the most reliable for reversals
Extensions Need Strong Trends: Don't expect extensions to be hit unless there's clear momentum beyond the swing low
Optimal Timeframes:
Scalping (1-5 minutes): Lookback 20-30, watch 0.382, 0.5, 0.618 only
Day Trading (15m-1H): Lookback 50-100, all retracement levels important
Swing Trading (4H-Daily): Lookback 100-200, focus on 0.5, 0.618, 0.786, and extensions
Position Trading (Daily-Weekly): Lookback 200-500, all levels relevant for long-term planning
Common Fibonacci Trading Mistakes to Avoid:
Wrong Swing Selection: Choosing insignificant swings produces meaningless levels
Premature Entry: Entering as soon as price touches a Fibonacci level without confirmation
Ignoring Trend: Fighting the main trend by buying deep retracements in downtrends
Over-Reliance: Using Fibonacci in isolation without confirming with other technical factors
Static Analysis: Not updating your Fibonacci as market structure evolves
Arbitrary Lookback: Using the same lookback period for all assets and timeframes
Integration with Other Tools:Fibonacci + Moving Averages:
When 0.618 level aligns with 50 or 200 EMA, confluence creates stronger support
Price bouncing from both Fibonacci and MA simultaneously = high-probability trade
Fibonacci + RSI/Stochastic:
Oversold indicators at 0.618 or deeper retracements = strong buy signal
Overbought indicators at swing high (1.0) = potential reversal warning
Fibonacci + Volume Profile:
High-volume nodes aligning with Fibonacci levels create robust support/resistance
Low-volume areas near Fibonacci levels may see rapid price movement through them
Fibonacci + Trendlines:
Fibonacci retracement level + ascending trendline = double support
Breaking both simultaneously confirms trend change
Technical Notes:
Uses ta.lowest() and ta.highest() for efficient swing detection across the lookback period
Implements dynamic line and label arrays for clean redraws without memory leaks
All calculations update in real-time as new bars form
Extension options allow customization without modifying core code
Format.mintick ensures price labels match the symbol's minimum price increment
Tooltip on swing markers shows exact price values for precision
Dynamic Equity Allocation Model"Cash is Trash"? Not Always. Here's Why Science Beats Guesswork.
Every retail trader knows the frustration: you draw support and resistance lines, you spot patterns, you follow market gurus on social media—and still, when the next bear market hits, your portfolio bleeds red. Meanwhile, institutional investors seem to navigate market turbulence with ease, preserving capital when markets crash and participating when they rally. What's their secret?
The answer isn't insider information or access to exotic derivatives. It's systematic, scientifically validated decision-making. While most retail traders rely on subjective chart analysis and emotional reactions, professional portfolio managers use quantitative models that remove emotion from the equation and process multiple streams of market information simultaneously.
This document presents exactly such a system—not a proprietary black box available only to hedge funds, but a fully transparent, academically grounded framework that any serious investor can understand and apply. The Dynamic Equity Allocation Model (DEAM) synthesizes decades of financial research from Nobel laureates and leading academics into a practical tool for tactical asset allocation.
Stop drawing colorful lines on your chart and start thinking like a quant. This isn't about predicting where the market goes next week—it's about systematically adjusting your risk exposure based on what the data actually tells you. When valuations scream danger, when volatility spikes, when credit markets freeze, when multiple warning signals align—that's when cash isn't trash. That's when cash saves your portfolio.
The irony of "cash is trash" rhetoric is that it ignores timing. Yes, being 100% cash for decades would be disastrous. But being 100% equities through every crisis is equally foolish. The sophisticated approach is dynamic: aggressive when conditions favor risk-taking, defensive when they don't. This model shows you how to make that decision systematically, not emotionally.
Whether you're managing your own retirement portfolio or seeking to understand how institutional allocation strategies work, this comprehensive analysis provides the theoretical foundation, mathematical implementation, and practical guidance to elevate your investment approach from amateur to professional.
The choice is yours: keep hoping your chart patterns work out, or start using the same quantitative methods that professionals rely on. The tools are here. The research is cited. The methodology is explained. All you need to do is read, understand, and apply.
The Dynamic Equity Allocation Model (DEAM) is a quantitative framework for systematic allocation between equities and cash, grounded in modern portfolio theory and empirical market research. The model integrates five scientifically validated dimensions of market analysis—market regime, risk metrics, valuation, sentiment, and macroeconomic conditions—to generate dynamic allocation recommendations ranging from 0% to 100% equity exposure. This work documents the theoretical foundations, mathematical implementation, and practical application of this multi-factor approach.
1. Introduction and Theoretical Background
1.1 The Limitations of Static Portfolio Allocation
Traditional portfolio theory, as formulated by Markowitz (1952) in his seminal work "Portfolio Selection," assumes an optimal static allocation where investors distribute their wealth across asset classes according to their risk aversion. This approach rests on the assumption that returns and risks remain constant over time. However, empirical research demonstrates that this assumption does not hold in reality. Fama and French (1989) showed that expected returns vary over time and correlate with macroeconomic variables such as the spread between long-term and short-term interest rates. Campbell and Shiller (1988) demonstrated that the price-earnings ratio possesses predictive power for future stock returns, providing a foundation for dynamic allocation strategies.
The academic literature on tactical asset allocation has evolved considerably over recent decades. Ilmanen (2011) argues in "Expected Returns" that investors can improve their risk-adjusted returns by considering valuation levels, business cycles, and market sentiment. The Dynamic Equity Allocation Model presented here builds on this research tradition and operationalizes these insights into a practically applicable allocation framework.
1.2 Multi-Factor Approaches in Asset Allocation
Modern financial research has shown that different factors capture distinct aspects of market dynamics and together provide a more robust picture of market conditions than individual indicators. Ross (1976) developed the Arbitrage Pricing Theory, a model that employs multiple factors to explain security returns. Following this multi-factor philosophy, DEAM integrates five complementary analytical dimensions, each tapping different information sources and collectively enabling comprehensive market understanding.
2. Data Foundation and Data Quality
2.1 Data Sources Used
The model draws its data exclusively from publicly available market data via the TradingView platform. This transparency and accessibility is a significant advantage over proprietary models that rely on non-public data. The data foundation encompasses several categories of market information, each capturing specific aspects of market dynamics.
First, price data for the S&P 500 Index is obtained through the SPDR S&P 500 ETF (ticker: SPY). The use of a highly liquid ETF instead of the index itself has practical reasons, as ETF data is available in real-time and reflects actual tradability. In addition to closing prices, high, low, and volume data are captured, which are required for calculating advanced volatility measures.
Fundamental corporate metrics are retrieved via TradingView's Financial Data API. These include earnings per share, price-to-earnings ratio, return on equity, debt-to-equity ratio, dividend yield, and share buyback yield. Cochrane (2011) emphasizes in "Presidential Address: Discount Rates" the central importance of valuation metrics for forecasting future returns, making these fundamental data a cornerstone of the model.
Volatility indicators are represented by the CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) and related metrics. The VIX, often referred to as the market's "fear gauge," measures the implied volatility of S&P 500 index options and serves as a proxy for market participants' risk perception. Whaley (2000) describes in "The Investor Fear Gauge" the construction and interpretation of the VIX and its use as a sentiment indicator.
Macroeconomic data includes yield curve information through US Treasury bonds of various maturities and credit risk premiums through the spread between high-yield bonds and risk-free government bonds. These variables capture the macroeconomic conditions and financing conditions relevant for equity valuation. Estrella and Hardouvelis (1991) showed that the shape of the yield curve has predictive power for future economic activity, justifying the inclusion of these data.
2.2 Handling Missing Data
A practical problem when working with financial data is dealing with missing or unavailable values. The model implements a fallback system where a plausible historical average value is stored for each fundamental metric. When current data is unavailable for a specific point in time, this fallback value is used. This approach ensures that the model remains functional even during temporary data outages and avoids systematic biases from missing data. The use of average values as fallback is conservative, as it generates neither overly optimistic nor pessimistic signals.
3. Component 1: Market Regime Detection
3.1 The Concept of Market Regimes
The idea that financial markets exist in different "regimes" or states that differ in their statistical properties has a long tradition in financial science. Hamilton (1989) developed regime-switching models that allow distinguishing between different market states with different return and volatility characteristics. The practical application of this theory consists of identifying the current market state and adjusting portfolio allocation accordingly.
DEAM classifies market regimes using a scoring system that considers three main dimensions: trend strength, volatility level, and drawdown depth. This multidimensional view is more robust than focusing on individual indicators, as it captures various facets of market dynamics. Classification occurs into six distinct regimes: Strong Bull, Bull Market, Neutral, Correction, Bear Market, and Crisis.
3.2 Trend Analysis Through Moving Averages
Moving averages are among the oldest and most widely used technical indicators and have also received attention in academic literature. Brock, Lakonishok, and LeBaron (1992) examined in "Simple Technical Trading Rules and the Stochastic Properties of Stock Returns" the profitability of trading rules based on moving averages and found evidence for their predictive power, although later studies questioned the robustness of these results when considering transaction costs.
The model calculates three moving averages with different time windows: a 20-day average (approximately one trading month), a 50-day average (approximately one quarter), and a 200-day average (approximately one trading year). The relationship of the current price to these averages and the relationship of the averages to each other provide information about trend strength and direction. When the price trades above all three averages and the short-term average is above the long-term, this indicates an established uptrend. The model assigns points based on these constellations, with longer-term trends weighted more heavily as they are considered more persistent.
3.3 Volatility Regimes
Volatility, understood as the standard deviation of returns, is a central concept of financial theory and serves as the primary risk measure. However, research has shown that volatility is not constant but changes over time and occurs in clusters—a phenomenon first documented by Mandelbrot (1963) and later formalized through ARCH and GARCH models (Engle, 1982; Bollerslev, 1986).
DEAM calculates volatility not only through the classic method of return standard deviation but also uses more advanced estimators such as the Parkinson estimator and the Garman-Klass estimator. These methods utilize intraday information (high and low prices) and are more efficient than simple close-to-close volatility estimators. The Parkinson estimator (Parkinson, 1980) uses the range between high and low of a trading day and is based on the recognition that this information reveals more about true volatility than just the closing price difference. The Garman-Klass estimator (Garman and Klass, 1980) extends this approach by additionally considering opening and closing prices.
The calculated volatility is annualized by multiplying it by the square root of 252 (the average number of trading days per year), enabling standardized comparability. The model compares current volatility with the VIX, the implied volatility from option prices. A low VIX (below 15) signals market comfort and increases the regime score, while a high VIX (above 35) indicates market stress and reduces the score. This interpretation follows the empirical observation that elevated volatility is typically associated with falling markets (Schwert, 1989).
3.4 Drawdown Analysis
A drawdown refers to the percentage decline from the highest point (peak) to the lowest point (trough) during a specific period. This metric is psychologically significant for investors as it represents the maximum loss experienced. Calmar (1991) developed the Calmar Ratio, which relates return to maximum drawdown, underscoring the practical relevance of this metric.
The model calculates current drawdown as the percentage distance from the highest price of the last 252 trading days (one year). A drawdown below 3% is considered negligible and maximally increases the regime score. As drawdown increases, the score decreases progressively, with drawdowns above 20% classified as severe and indicating a crisis or bear market regime. These thresholds are empirically motivated by historical market cycles, in which corrections typically encompassed 5-10% drawdowns, bear markets 20-30%, and crises over 30%.
3.5 Regime Classification
Final regime classification occurs through aggregation of scores from trend (40% weight), volatility (30%), and drawdown (30%). The higher weighting of trend reflects the empirical observation that trend-following strategies have historically delivered robust results (Moskowitz, Ooi, and Pedersen, 2012). A total score above 80 signals a strong bull market with established uptrend, low volatility, and minimal losses. At a score below 10, a crisis situation exists requiring defensive positioning. The six regime categories enable a differentiated allocation strategy that not only distinguishes binarily between bullish and bearish but allows gradual gradations.
4. Component 2: Risk-Based Allocation
4.1 Volatility Targeting as Risk Management Approach
The concept of volatility targeting is based on the idea that investors should maximize not returns but risk-adjusted returns. Sharpe (1966, 1994) defined with the Sharpe Ratio the fundamental concept of return per unit of risk, measured as volatility. Volatility targeting goes a step further and adjusts portfolio allocation to achieve constant target volatility. This means that in times of low market volatility, equity allocation is increased, and in times of high volatility, it is reduced.
Moreira and Muir (2017) showed in "Volatility-Managed Portfolios" that strategies that adjust their exposure based on volatility forecasts achieve higher Sharpe Ratios than passive buy-and-hold strategies. DEAM implements this principle by defining a target portfolio volatility (default 12% annualized) and adjusting equity allocation to achieve it. The mathematical foundation is simple: if market volatility is 20% and target volatility is 12%, equity allocation should be 60% (12/20 = 0.6), with the remaining 40% held in cash with zero volatility.
4.2 Market Volatility Calculation
Estimating current market volatility is central to the risk-based allocation approach. The model uses several volatility estimators in parallel and selects the higher value between traditional close-to-close volatility and the Parkinson estimator. This conservative choice ensures the model does not underestimate true volatility, which could lead to excessive risk exposure.
Traditional volatility calculation uses logarithmic returns, as these have mathematically advantageous properties (additive linkage over multiple periods). The logarithmic return is calculated as ln(P_t / P_{t-1}), where P_t is the price at time t. The standard deviation of these returns over a rolling 20-trading-day window is then multiplied by √252 to obtain annualized volatility. This annualization is based on the assumption of independently identically distributed returns, which is an idealization but widely accepted in practice.
The Parkinson estimator uses additional information from the trading range (High minus Low) of each day. The formula is: σ_P = (1/√(4ln2)) × √(1/n × Σln²(H_i/L_i)) × √252, where H_i and L_i are high and low prices. Under ideal conditions, this estimator is approximately five times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator (Parkinson, 1980), as it uses more information per observation.
4.3 Drawdown-Based Position Size Adjustment
In addition to volatility targeting, the model implements drawdown-based risk control. The logic is that deep market declines often signal further losses and therefore justify exposure reduction. This behavior corresponds with the concept of path-dependent risk tolerance: investors who have already suffered losses are typically less willing to take additional risk (Kahneman and Tversky, 1979).
The model defines a maximum portfolio drawdown as a target parameter (default 15%). Since portfolio volatility and portfolio drawdown are proportional to equity allocation (assuming cash has neither volatility nor drawdown), allocation-based control is possible. For example, if the market exhibits a 25% drawdown and target portfolio drawdown is 15%, equity allocation should be at most 60% (15/25).
4.4 Dynamic Risk Adjustment
An advanced feature of DEAM is dynamic adjustment of risk-based allocation through a feedback mechanism. The model continuously estimates what actual portfolio volatility and portfolio drawdown would result at the current allocation. If risk utilization (ratio of actual to target risk) exceeds 1.0, allocation is reduced by an adjustment factor that grows exponentially with overutilization. This implements a form of dynamic feedback that avoids overexposure.
Mathematically, a risk adjustment factor r_adjust is calculated: if risk utilization u > 1, then r_adjust = exp(-0.5 × (u - 1)). This exponential function ensures that moderate overutilization is gently corrected, while strong overutilization triggers drastic reductions. The factor 0.5 in the exponent was empirically calibrated to achieve a balanced ratio between sensitivity and stability.
5. Component 3: Valuation Analysis
5.1 Theoretical Foundations of Fundamental Valuation
DEAM's valuation component is based on the fundamental premise that the intrinsic value of a security is determined by its future cash flows and that deviations between market price and intrinsic value are eventually corrected. Graham and Dodd (1934) established in "Security Analysis" the basic principles of fundamental analysis that remain relevant today. Translated into modern portfolio context, this means that markets with high valuation metrics (high price-earnings ratios) should have lower expected returns than cheaply valued markets.
Campbell and Shiller (1988) developed the Cyclically Adjusted P/E Ratio (CAPE), which smooths earnings over a full business cycle. Their empirical analysis showed that this ratio has significant predictive power for 10-year returns. Asness, Moskowitz, and Pedersen (2013) demonstrated in "Value and Momentum Everywhere" that value effects exist not only in individual stocks but also in asset classes and markets.
5.2 Equity Risk Premium as Central Valuation Metric
The Equity Risk Premium (ERP) is defined as the expected excess return of stocks over risk-free government bonds. It is the theoretical heart of valuation analysis, as it represents the compensation investors demand for bearing equity risk. Damodaran (2012) discusses in "Equity Risk Premiums: Determinants, Estimation and Implications" various methods for ERP estimation.
DEAM calculates ERP not through a single method but combines four complementary approaches with different weights. This multi-method strategy increases estimation robustness and avoids dependence on single, potentially erroneous inputs.
The first method (35% weight) uses earnings yield, calculated as 1/P/E or directly from operating earnings data, and subtracts the 10-year Treasury yield. This method follows Fed Model logic (Yardeni, 2003), although this model has theoretical weaknesses as it does not consistently treat inflation (Asness, 2003).
The second method (30% weight) extends earnings yield by share buyback yield. Share buybacks are a form of capital return to shareholders and increase value per share. Boudoukh et al. (2007) showed in "The Total Shareholder Yield" that the sum of dividend yield and buyback yield is a better predictor of future returns than dividend yield alone.
The third method (20% weight) implements the Gordon Growth Model (Gordon, 1962), which models stock value as the sum of discounted future dividends. Under constant growth g assumption: Expected Return = Dividend Yield + g. The model estimates sustainable growth as g = ROE × (1 - Payout Ratio), where ROE is return on equity and payout ratio is the ratio of dividends to earnings. This formula follows from equity theory: unretained earnings are reinvested at ROE and generate additional earnings growth.
The fourth method (15% weight) combines total shareholder yield (Dividend + Buybacks) with implied growth derived from revenue growth. This method considers that companies with strong revenue growth should generate higher future earnings, even if current valuations do not yet fully reflect this.
The final ERP is the weighted average of these four methods. A high ERP (above 4%) signals attractive valuations and increases the valuation score to 95 out of 100 possible points. A negative ERP, where stocks have lower expected returns than bonds, results in a minimal score of 10.
5.3 Quality Adjustments to Valuation
Valuation metrics alone can be misleading if not interpreted in the context of company quality. A company with a low P/E may be cheap or fundamentally problematic. The model therefore implements quality adjustments based on growth, profitability, and capital structure.
Revenue growth above 10% annually adds 10 points to the valuation score, moderate growth above 5% adds 5 points. This adjustment reflects that growth has independent value (Modigliani and Miller, 1961, extended by later growth theory). Net margin above 15% signals pricing power and operational efficiency and increases the score by 5 points, while low margins below 8% indicate competitive pressure and subtract 5 points.
Return on equity (ROE) above 20% characterizes outstanding capital efficiency and increases the score by 5 points. Piotroski (2000) showed in "Value Investing: The Use of Historical Financial Statement Information" that fundamental quality signals such as high ROE can improve the performance of value strategies.
Capital structure is evaluated through the debt-to-equity ratio. A conservative ratio below 1.0 multiplies the valuation score by 1.2, while high leverage above 2.0 applies a multiplier of 0.8. This adjustment reflects that high debt constrains financial flexibility and can become problematic in crisis times (Korteweg, 2010).
6. Component 4: Sentiment Analysis
6.1 The Role of Sentiment in Financial Markets
Investor sentiment, defined as the collective psychological attitude of market participants, influences asset prices independently of fundamental data. Baker and Wurgler (2006, 2007) developed a sentiment index and showed that periods of high sentiment are followed by overvaluations that later correct. This insight justifies integrating a sentiment component into allocation decisions.
Sentiment is difficult to measure directly but can be proxied through market indicators. The VIX is the most widely used sentiment indicator, as it aggregates implied volatility from option prices. High VIX values reflect elevated uncertainty and risk aversion, while low values signal market comfort. Whaley (2009) refers to the VIX as the "Investor Fear Gauge" and documents its role as a contrarian indicator: extremely high values typically occur at market bottoms, while low values occur at tops.
6.2 VIX-Based Sentiment Assessment
DEAM uses statistical normalization of the VIX by calculating the Z-score: z = (VIX_current - VIX_average) / VIX_standard_deviation. The Z-score indicates how many standard deviations the current VIX is from the historical average. This approach is more robust than absolute thresholds, as it adapts to the average volatility level, which can vary over longer periods.
A Z-score below -1.5 (VIX is 1.5 standard deviations below average) signals exceptionally low risk perception and adds 40 points to the sentiment score. This may seem counterintuitive—shouldn't low fear be bullish? However, the logic follows the contrarian principle: when no one is afraid, everyone is already invested, and there is limited further upside potential (Zweig, 1973). Conversely, a Z-score above 1.5 (extreme fear) adds -40 points, reflecting market panic but simultaneously suggesting potential buying opportunities.
6.3 VIX Term Structure as Sentiment Signal
The VIX term structure provides additional sentiment information. Normally, the VIX trades in contango, meaning longer-term VIX futures have higher prices than short-term. This reflects that short-term volatility is currently known, while long-term volatility is more uncertain and carries a risk premium. The model compares the VIX with VIX9D (9-day volatility) and identifies backwardation (VIX > 1.05 × VIX9D) and steep backwardation (VIX > 1.15 × VIX9D).
Backwardation occurs when short-term implied volatility is higher than longer-term, which typically happens during market stress. Investors anticipate immediate turbulence but expect calming. Psychologically, this reflects acute fear. The model subtracts 15 points for backwardation and 30 for steep backwardation, as these constellations signal elevated risk. Simon and Wiggins (2001) analyzed the VIX futures curve and showed that backwardation is associated with market declines.
6.4 Safe-Haven Flows
During crisis times, investors flee from risky assets into safe havens: gold, US dollar, and Japanese yen. This "flight to quality" is a sentiment signal. The model calculates the performance of these assets relative to stocks over the last 20 trading days. When gold or the dollar strongly rise while stocks fall, this indicates elevated risk aversion.
The safe-haven component is calculated as the difference between safe-haven performance and stock performance. Positive values (safe havens outperform) subtract up to 20 points from the sentiment score, negative values (stocks outperform) add up to 10 points. The asymmetric treatment (larger deduction for risk-off than bonus for risk-on) reflects that risk-off movements are typically sharper and more informative than risk-on phases.
Baur and Lucey (2010) examined safe-haven properties of gold and showed that gold indeed exhibits negative correlation with stocks during extreme market movements, confirming its role as crisis protection.
7. Component 5: Macroeconomic Analysis
7.1 The Yield Curve as Economic Indicator
The yield curve, represented as yields of government bonds of various maturities, contains aggregated expectations about future interest rates, inflation, and economic growth. The slope of the yield curve has remarkable predictive power for recessions. Estrella and Mishkin (1998) showed that an inverted yield curve (short-term rates higher than long-term) predicts recessions with high reliability. This is because inverted curves reflect restrictive monetary policy: the central bank raises short-term rates to combat inflation, dampening economic activity.
DEAM calculates two spread measures: the 2-year-minus-10-year spread and the 3-month-minus-10-year spread. A steep, positive curve (spreads above 1.5% and 2% respectively) signals healthy growth expectations and generates the maximum yield curve score of 40 points. A flat curve (spreads near zero) reduces the score to 20 points. An inverted curve (negative spreads) is particularly alarming and results in only 10 points.
The choice of two different spreads increases analysis robustness. The 2-10 spread is most established in academic literature, while the 3M-10Y spread is often considered more sensitive, as the 3-month rate directly reflects current monetary policy (Ang, Piazzesi, and Wei, 2006).
7.2 Credit Conditions and Spreads
Credit spreads—the yield difference between risky corporate bonds and safe government bonds—reflect risk perception in the credit market. Gilchrist and Zakrajšek (2012) constructed an "Excess Bond Premium" that measures the component of credit spreads not explained by fundamentals and showed this is a predictor of future economic activity and stock returns.
The model approximates credit spread by comparing the yield of high-yield bond ETFs (HYG) with investment-grade bond ETFs (LQD). A narrow spread below 200 basis points signals healthy credit conditions and risk appetite, contributing 30 points to the macro score. Very wide spreads above 1000 basis points (as during the 2008 financial crisis) signal credit crunch and generate zero points.
Additionally, the model evaluates whether "flight to quality" is occurring, identified through strong performance of Treasury bonds (TLT) with simultaneous weakness in high-yield bonds. This constellation indicates elevated risk aversion and reduces the credit conditions score.
7.3 Financial Stability at Corporate Level
While the yield curve and credit spreads reflect macroeconomic conditions, financial stability evaluates the health of companies themselves. The model uses the aggregated debt-to-equity ratio and return on equity of the S&P 500 as proxies for corporate health.
A low leverage level below 0.5 combined with high ROE above 15% signals robust corporate balance sheets and generates 20 points. This combination is particularly valuable as it represents both defensive strength (low debt means crisis resistance) and offensive strength (high ROE means earnings power). High leverage above 1.5 generates only 5 points, as it implies vulnerability to interest rate increases and recessions.
Korteweg (2010) showed in "The Net Benefits to Leverage" that optimal debt maximizes firm value, but excessive debt increases distress costs. At the aggregated market level, high debt indicates fragilities that can become problematic during stress phases.
8. Component 6: Crisis Detection
8.1 The Need for Systematic Crisis Detection
Financial crises are rare but extremely impactful events that suspend normal statistical relationships. During normal market volatility, diversified portfolios and traditional risk management approaches function, but during systemic crises, seemingly independent assets suddenly correlate strongly, and losses exceed historical expectations (Longin and Solnik, 2001). This justifies a separate crisis detection mechanism that operates independently of regular allocation components.
Reinhart and Rogoff (2009) documented in "This Time Is Different: Eight Centuries of Financial Folly" recurring patterns in financial crises: extreme volatility, massive drawdowns, credit market dysfunction, and asset price collapse. DEAM operationalizes these patterns into quantifiable crisis indicators.
8.2 Multi-Signal Crisis Identification
The model uses a counter-based approach where various stress signals are identified and aggregated. This methodology is more robust than relying on a single indicator, as true crises typically occur simultaneously across multiple dimensions. A single signal may be a false alarm, but the simultaneous presence of multiple signals increases confidence.
The first indicator is a VIX above the crisis threshold (default 40), adding one point. A VIX above 60 (as in 2008 and March 2020) adds two additional points, as such extreme values are historically very rare. This tiered approach captures the intensity of volatility.
The second indicator is market drawdown. A drawdown above 15% adds one point, as corrections of this magnitude can be potential harbingers of larger crises. A drawdown above 25% adds another point, as historical bear markets typically encompass 25-40% drawdowns.
The third indicator is credit market spreads above 500 basis points, adding one point. Such wide spreads occur only during significant credit market disruptions, as in 2008 during the Lehman crisis.
The fourth indicator identifies simultaneous losses in stocks and bonds. Normally, Treasury bonds act as a hedge against equity risk (negative correlation), but when both fall simultaneously, this indicates systemic liquidity problems or inflation/stagflation fears. The model checks whether both SPY and TLT have fallen more than 10% and 5% respectively over 5 trading days, adding two points.
The fifth indicator is a volume spike combined with negative returns. Extreme trading volumes (above twice the 20-day average) with falling prices signal panic selling. This adds one point.
A crisis situation is diagnosed when at least 3 indicators trigger, a severe crisis at 5 or more indicators. These thresholds were calibrated through historical backtesting to identify true crises (2008, 2020) without generating excessive false alarms.
8.3 Crisis-Based Allocation Override
When a crisis is detected, the system overrides the normal allocation recommendation and caps equity allocation at maximum 25%. In a severe crisis, the cap is set at 10%. This drastic defensive posture follows the empirical observation that crises typically require time to develop and that early reduction can avoid substantial losses (Faber, 2007).
This override logic implements a "safety first" principle: in situations of existential danger to the portfolio, capital preservation becomes the top priority. Roy (1952) formalized this approach in "Safety First and the Holding of Assets," arguing that investors should primarily minimize ruin probability.
9. Integration and Final Allocation Calculation
9.1 Component Weighting
The final allocation recommendation emerges through weighted aggregation of the five components. The standard weighting is: Market Regime 35%, Risk Management 25%, Valuation 20%, Sentiment 15%, Macro 5%. These weights reflect both theoretical considerations and empirical backtesting results.
The highest weighting of market regime is based on evidence that trend-following and momentum strategies have delivered robust results across various asset classes and time periods (Moskowitz, Ooi, and Pedersen, 2012). Current market momentum is highly informative for the near future, although it provides no information about long-term expectations.
The substantial weighting of risk management (25%) follows from the central importance of risk control. Wealth preservation is the foundation of long-term wealth creation, and systematic risk management is demonstrably value-creating (Moreira and Muir, 2017).
The valuation component receives 20% weight, based on the long-term mean reversion of valuation metrics. While valuation has limited short-term predictive power (bull and bear markets can begin at any valuation), the long-term relationship between valuation and returns is robustly documented (Campbell and Shiller, 1988).
Sentiment (15%) and Macro (5%) receive lower weights, as these factors are subtler and harder to measure. Sentiment is valuable as a contrarian indicator at extremes but less informative in normal ranges. Macro variables such as the yield curve have strong predictive power for recessions, but the transmission from recessions to stock market performance is complex and temporally variable.
9.2 Model Type Adjustments
DEAM allows users to choose between four model types: Conservative, Balanced, Aggressive, and Adaptive. This choice modifies the final allocation through additive adjustments.
Conservative mode subtracts 10 percentage points from allocation, resulting in consistently more cautious positioning. This is suitable for risk-averse investors or those with limited investment horizons. Aggressive mode adds 10 percentage points, suitable for risk-tolerant investors with long horizons.
Adaptive mode implements procyclical adjustment based on short-term momentum: if the market has risen more than 5% in the last 20 days, 5 percentage points are added; if it has declined more than 5%, 5 points are subtracted. This logic follows the observation that short-term momentum persists (Jegadeesh and Titman, 1993), but the moderate size of adjustment avoids excessive timing bets.
Balanced mode makes no adjustment and uses raw model output. This neutral setting is suitable for investors who wish to trust model recommendations unchanged.
9.3 Smoothing and Stability
The allocation resulting from aggregation undergoes final smoothing through a simple moving average over 3 periods. This smoothing is crucial for model practicality, as it reduces frequent trading and thus transaction costs. Without smoothing, the model could fluctuate between adjacent allocations with every small input change.
The choice of 3 periods as smoothing window is a compromise between responsiveness and stability. Longer smoothing would excessively delay signals and impede response to true regime changes. Shorter or no smoothing would allow too much noise. Empirical tests showed that 3-period smoothing offers an optimal ratio between these goals.
10. Visualization and Interpretation
10.1 Main Output: Equity Allocation
DEAM's primary output is a time series from 0 to 100 representing the recommended percentage allocation to equities. This representation is intuitive: 100% means full investment in stocks (specifically: an S&P 500 ETF), 0% means complete cash position, and intermediate values correspond to mixed portfolios. A value of 60% means, for example: invest 60% of wealth in SPY, hold 40% in money market instruments or cash.
The time series is color-coded to enable quick visual interpretation. Green shades represent high allocations (above 80%, bullish), red shades low allocations (below 20%, bearish), and neutral colors middle allocations. The chart background is dynamically colored based on the signal, enhancing readability in different market phases.
10.2 Dashboard Metrics
A tabular dashboard presents key metrics compactly. This includes current allocation, cash allocation (complement), an aggregated signal (BULLISH/NEUTRAL/BEARISH), current market regime, VIX level, market drawdown, and crisis status.
Additionally, fundamental metrics are displayed: P/E Ratio, Equity Risk Premium, Return on Equity, Debt-to-Equity Ratio, and Total Shareholder Yield. This transparency allows users to understand model decisions and form their own assessments.
Component scores (Regime, Risk, Valuation, Sentiment, Macro) are also displayed, each normalized on a 0-100 scale. This shows which factors primarily drive the current recommendation. If, for example, the Risk score is very low (20) while other scores are moderate (50-60), this indicates that risk management considerations are pulling allocation down.
10.3 Component Breakdown (Optional)
Advanced users can display individual components as separate lines in the chart. This enables analysis of component dynamics: do all components move synchronously, or are there divergences? Divergences can be particularly informative. If, for example, the market regime is bullish (high score) but the valuation component is very negative, this signals an overbought market not fundamentally supported—a classic "bubble warning."
This feature is disabled by default to keep the chart clean but can be activated for deeper analysis.
10.4 Confidence Bands
The model optionally displays uncertainty bands around the main allocation line. These are calculated as ±1 standard deviation of allocation over a rolling 20-period window. Wide bands indicate high volatility of model recommendations, suggesting uncertain market conditions. Narrow bands indicate stable recommendations.
This visualization implements a concept of epistemic uncertainty—uncertainty about the model estimate itself, not just market volatility. In phases where various indicators send conflicting signals, the allocation recommendation becomes more volatile, manifesting in wider bands. Users can understand this as a warning to act more cautiously or consult alternative information sources.
11. Alert System
11.1 Allocation Alerts
DEAM implements an alert system that notifies users of significant events. Allocation alerts trigger when smoothed allocation crosses certain thresholds. An alert is generated when allocation reaches 80% (from below), signaling strong bullish conditions. Another alert triggers when allocation falls to 20%, indicating defensive positioning.
These thresholds are not arbitrary but correspond with boundaries between model regimes. An allocation of 80% roughly corresponds to a clear bull market regime, while 20% corresponds to a bear market regime. Alerts at these points are therefore informative about fundamental regime shifts.
11.2 Crisis Alerts
Separate alerts trigger upon detection of crisis and severe crisis. These alerts have highest priority as they signal large risks. A crisis alert should prompt investors to review their portfolio and potentially take defensive measures beyond the automatic model recommendation (e.g., hedging through put options, rebalancing to more defensive sectors).
11.3 Regime Change Alerts
An alert triggers upon change of market regime (e.g., from Neutral to Correction, or from Bull Market to Strong Bull). Regime changes are highly informative events that typically entail substantial allocation changes. These alerts enable investors to proactively respond to changes in market dynamics.
11.4 Risk Breach Alerts
A specialized alert triggers when actual portfolio risk utilization exceeds target parameters by 20%. This is a warning signal that the risk management system is reaching its limits, possibly because market volatility is rising faster than allocation can be reduced. In such situations, investors should consider manual interventions.
12. Practical Application and Limitations
12.1 Portfolio Implementation
DEAM generates a recommendation for allocation between equities (S&P 500) and cash. Implementation by an investor can take various forms. The most direct method is using an S&P 500 ETF (e.g., SPY, VOO) for equity allocation and a money market fund or savings account for cash allocation.
A rebalancing strategy is required to synchronize actual allocation with model recommendation. Two approaches are possible: (1) rule-based rebalancing at every 10% deviation between actual and target, or (2) time-based monthly rebalancing. Both have trade-offs between responsiveness and transaction costs. Empirical evidence (Jaconetti, Kinniry, and Zilbering, 2010) suggests rebalancing frequency has moderate impact on performance, and investors should optimize based on their transaction costs.
12.2 Adaptation to Individual Preferences
The model offers numerous adjustment parameters. Component weights can be modified if investors place more or less belief in certain factors. A fundamentally-oriented investor might increase valuation weight, while a technical trader might increase regime weight.
Risk target parameters (target volatility, max drawdown) should be adapted to individual risk tolerance. Younger investors with long investment horizons can choose higher target volatility (15-18%), while retirees may prefer lower volatility (8-10%). This adjustment systematically shifts average equity allocation.
Crisis thresholds can be adjusted based on preference for sensitivity versus specificity of crisis detection. Lower thresholds (e.g., VIX > 35 instead of 40) increase sensitivity (more crises are detected) but reduce specificity (more false alarms). Higher thresholds have the reverse effect.
12.3 Limitations and Disclaimers
DEAM is based on historical relationships between indicators and market performance. There is no guarantee these relationships will persist in the future. Structural changes in markets (e.g., through regulation, technology, or central bank policy) can break established patterns. This is the fundamental problem of induction in financial science (Taleb, 2007).
The model is optimized for US equities (S&P 500). Application to other markets (international stocks, bonds, commodities) would require recalibration. The indicators and thresholds are specific to the statistical properties of the US equity market.
The model cannot eliminate losses. Even with perfect crisis prediction, an investor following the model would lose money in bear markets—just less than a buy-and-hold investor. The goal is risk-adjusted performance improvement, not risk elimination.
Transaction costs are not modeled. In practice, spreads, commissions, and taxes reduce net returns. Frequent trading can cause substantial costs. Model smoothing helps minimize this, but users should consider their specific cost situation.
The model reacts to information; it does not anticipate it. During sudden shocks (e.g., 9/11, COVID-19 lockdowns), the model can only react after price movements, not before. This limitation is inherent to all reactive systems.
12.4 Relationship to Other Strategies
DEAM is a tactical asset allocation approach and should be viewed as a complement, not replacement, for strategic asset allocation. Brinson, Hood, and Beebower (1986) showed in their influential study "Determinants of Portfolio Performance" that strategic asset allocation (long-term policy allocation) explains the majority of portfolio performance, but this leaves room for tactical adjustments based on market timing.
The model can be combined with value and momentum strategies at the individual stock level. While DEAM controls overall market exposure, within-equity decisions can be optimized through stock-picking models. This separation between strategic (market exposure) and tactical (stock selection) levels follows classical portfolio theory.
The model does not replace diversification across asset classes. A complete portfolio should also include bonds, international stocks, real estate, and alternative investments. DEAM addresses only the US equity allocation decision within a broader portfolio.
13. Scientific Foundation and Evaluation
13.1 Theoretical Consistency
DEAM's components are based on established financial theory and empirical evidence. The market regime component follows from regime-switching models (Hamilton, 1989) and trend-following literature. The risk management component implements volatility targeting (Moreira and Muir, 2017) and modern portfolio theory (Markowitz, 1952). The valuation component is based on discounted cash flow theory and empirical value research (Campbell and Shiller, 1988; Fama and French, 1992). The sentiment component integrates behavioral finance (Baker and Wurgler, 2006). The macro component uses established business cycle indicators (Estrella and Mishkin, 1998).
This theoretical grounding distinguishes DEAM from purely data-mining-based approaches that identify patterns without causal theory. Theory-guided models have greater probability of functioning out-of-sample, as they are based on fundamental mechanisms, not random correlations (Lo and MacKinlay, 1990).
13.2 Empirical Validation
While this document does not present detailed backtest analysis, it should be noted that rigorous validation of a tactical asset allocation model should include several elements:
In-sample testing establishes whether the model functions at all in the data on which it was calibrated. Out-of-sample testing is crucial: the model should be tested in time periods not used for development. Walk-forward analysis, where the model is successively trained on rolling windows and tested in the next window, approximates real implementation.
Performance metrics should be risk-adjusted. Pure return consideration is misleading, as higher returns often only compensate for higher risk. Sharpe Ratio, Sortino Ratio, Calmar Ratio, and Maximum Drawdown are relevant metrics. Comparison with benchmarks (Buy-and-Hold S&P 500, 60/40 Stock/Bond portfolio) contextualizes performance.
Robustness checks test sensitivity to parameter variation. If the model only functions at specific parameter settings, this indicates overfitting. Robust models show consistent performance over a range of plausible parameters.
13.3 Comparison with Existing Literature
DEAM fits into the broader literature on tactical asset allocation. Faber (2007) presented a simple momentum-based timing system that goes long when the market is above its 10-month average, otherwise cash. This simple system avoided large drawdowns in bear markets. DEAM can be understood as a sophistication of this approach that integrates multiple information sources.
Ilmanen (2011) discusses various timing factors in "Expected Returns" and argues for multi-factor approaches. DEAM operationalizes this philosophy. Asness, Moskowitz, and Pedersen (2013) showed that value and momentum effects work across asset classes, justifying cross-asset application of regime and valuation signals.
Ang (2014) emphasizes in "Asset Management: A Systematic Approach to Factor Investing" the importance of systematic, rule-based approaches over discretionary decisions. DEAM is fully systematic and eliminates emotional biases that plague individual investors (overconfidence, hindsight bias, loss aversion).
References
Ang, A. (2014) *Asset Management: A Systematic Approach to Factor Investing*. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Ang, A., Piazzesi, M. and Wei, M. (2006) 'What does the yield curve tell us about GDP growth?', *Journal of Econometrics*, 131(1-2), pp. 359-403.
Asness, C.S. (2003) 'Fight the Fed Model', *The Journal of Portfolio Management*, 30(1), pp. 11-24.
Asness, C.S., Moskowitz, T.J. and Pedersen, L.H. (2013) 'Value and Momentum Everywhere', *The Journal of Finance*, 68(3), pp. 929-985.
Baker, M. and Wurgler, J. (2006) 'Investor Sentiment and the Cross-Section of Stock Returns', *The Journal of Finance*, 61(4), pp. 1645-1680.
Baker, M. and Wurgler, J. (2007) 'Investor Sentiment in the Stock Market', *Journal of Economic Perspectives*, 21(2), pp. 129-152.
Baur, D.G. and Lucey, B.M. (2010) 'Is Gold a Hedge or a Safe Haven? An Analysis of Stocks, Bonds and Gold', *Financial Review*, 45(2), pp. 217-229.
Bollerslev, T. (1986) 'Generalized Autoregressive Conditional Heteroskedasticity', *Journal of Econometrics*, 31(3), pp. 307-327.
Boudoukh, J., Michaely, R., Richardson, M. and Roberts, M.R. (2007) 'On the Importance of Measuring Payout Yield: Implications for Empirical Asset Pricing', *The Journal of Finance*, 62(2), pp. 877-915.
Brinson, G.P., Hood, L.R. and Beebower, G.L. (1986) 'Determinants of Portfolio Performance', *Financial Analysts Journal*, 42(4), pp. 39-44.
Brock, W., Lakonishok, J. and LeBaron, B. (1992) 'Simple Technical Trading Rules and the Stochastic Properties of Stock Returns', *The Journal of Finance*, 47(5), pp. 1731-1764.
Calmar, T.W. (1991) 'The Calmar Ratio', *Futures*, October issue.
Campbell, J.Y. and Shiller, R.J. (1988) 'The Dividend-Price Ratio and Expectations of Future Dividends and Discount Factors', *Review of Financial Studies*, 1(3), pp. 195-228.
Cochrane, J.H. (2011) 'Presidential Address: Discount Rates', *The Journal of Finance*, 66(4), pp. 1047-1108.
Damodaran, A. (2012) *Equity Risk Premiums: Determinants, Estimation and Implications*. Working Paper, Stern School of Business.
Engle, R.F. (1982) 'Autoregressive Conditional Heteroskedasticity with Estimates of the Variance of United Kingdom Inflation', *Econometrica*, 50(4), pp. 987-1007.
Estrella, A. and Hardouvelis, G.A. (1991) 'The Term Structure as a Predictor of Real Economic Activity', *The Journal of Finance*, 46(2), pp. 555-576.
Estrella, A. and Mishkin, F.S. (1998) 'Predicting U.S. Recessions: Financial Variables as Leading Indicators', *Review of Economics and Statistics*, 80(1), pp. 45-61.
Faber, M.T. (2007) 'A Quantitative Approach to Tactical Asset Allocation', *The Journal of Wealth Management*, 9(4), pp. 69-79.
Fama, E.F. and French, K.R. (1989) 'Business Conditions and Expected Returns on Stocks and Bonds', *Journal of Financial Economics*, 25(1), pp. 23-49.
Fama, E.F. and French, K.R. (1992) 'The Cross-Section of Expected Stock Returns', *The Journal of Finance*, 47(2), pp. 427-465.
Garman, M.B. and Klass, M.J. (1980) 'On the Estimation of Security Price Volatilities from Historical Data', *Journal of Business*, 53(1), pp. 67-78.
Gilchrist, S. and Zakrajšek, E. (2012) 'Credit Spreads and Business Cycle Fluctuations', *American Economic Review*, 102(4), pp. 1692-1720.
Gordon, M.J. (1962) *The Investment, Financing, and Valuation of the Corporation*. Homewood: Irwin.
Graham, B. and Dodd, D.L. (1934) *Security Analysis*. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Hamilton, J.D. (1989) 'A New Approach to the Economic Analysis of Nonstationary Time Series and the Business Cycle', *Econometrica*, 57(2), pp. 357-384.
Ilmanen, A. (2011) *Expected Returns: An Investor's Guide to Harvesting Market Rewards*. Chichester: Wiley.
Jaconetti, C.M., Kinniry, F.M. and Zilbering, Y. (2010) 'Best Practices for Portfolio Rebalancing', *Vanguard Research Paper*.
Jegadeesh, N. and Titman, S. (1993) 'Returns to Buying Winners and Selling Losers: Implications for Stock Market Efficiency', *The Journal of Finance*, 48(1), pp. 65-91.
Kahneman, D. and Tversky, A. (1979) 'Prospect Theory: An Analysis of Decision under Risk', *Econometrica*, 47(2), pp. 263-292.
Korteweg, A. (2010) 'The Net Benefits to Leverage', *The Journal of Finance*, 65(6), pp. 2137-2170.
Lo, A.W. and MacKinlay, A.C. (1990) 'Data-Snooping Biases in Tests of Financial Asset Pricing Models', *Review of Financial Studies*, 3(3), pp. 431-467.
Longin, F. and Solnik, B. (2001) 'Extreme Correlation of International Equity Markets', *The Journal of Finance*, 56(2), pp. 649-676.
Mandelbrot, B. (1963) 'The Variation of Certain Speculative Prices', *The Journal of Business*, 36(4), pp. 394-419.
Markowitz, H. (1952) 'Portfolio Selection', *The Journal of Finance*, 7(1), pp. 77-91.
Modigliani, F. and Miller, M.H. (1961) 'Dividend Policy, Growth, and the Valuation of Shares', *The Journal of Business*, 34(4), pp. 411-433.
Moreira, A. and Muir, T. (2017) 'Volatility-Managed Portfolios', *The Journal of Finance*, 72(4), pp. 1611-1644.
Moskowitz, T.J., Ooi, Y.H. and Pedersen, L.H. (2012) 'Time Series Momentum', *Journal of Financial Economics*, 104(2), pp. 228-250.
Parkinson, M. (1980) 'The Extreme Value Method for Estimating the Variance of the Rate of Return', *Journal of Business*, 53(1), pp. 61-65.
Piotroski, J.D. (2000) 'Value Investing: The Use of Historical Financial Statement Information to Separate Winners from Losers', *Journal of Accounting Research*, 38, pp. 1-41.
Reinhart, C.M. and Rogoff, K.S. (2009) *This Time Is Different: Eight Centuries of Financial Folly*. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Ross, S.A. (1976) 'The Arbitrage Theory of Capital Asset Pricing', *Journal of Economic Theory*, 13(3), pp. 341-360.
Roy, A.D. (1952) 'Safety First and the Holding of Assets', *Econometrica*, 20(3), pp. 431-449.
Schwert, G.W. (1989) 'Why Does Stock Market Volatility Change Over Time?', *The Journal of Finance*, 44(5), pp. 1115-1153.
Sharpe, W.F. (1966) 'Mutual Fund Performance', *The Journal of Business*, 39(1), pp. 119-138.
Sharpe, W.F. (1994) 'The Sharpe Ratio', *The Journal of Portfolio Management*, 21(1), pp. 49-58.
Simon, D.P. and Wiggins, R.A. (2001) 'S&P Futures Returns and Contrary Sentiment Indicators', *Journal of Futures Markets*, 21(5), pp. 447-462.
Taleb, N.N. (2007) *The Black Swan: The Impact of the Highly Improbable*. New York: Random House.
Whaley, R.E. (2000) 'The Investor Fear Gauge', *The Journal of Portfolio Management*, 26(3), pp. 12-17.
Whaley, R.E. (2009) 'Understanding the VIX', *The Journal of Portfolio Management*, 35(3), pp. 98-105.
Yardeni, E. (2003) 'Stock Valuation Models', *Topical Study*, 51, Yardeni Research.
Zweig, M.E. (1973) 'An Investor Expectations Stock Price Predictive Model Using Closed-End Fund Premiums', *The Journal of Finance*, 28(1), pp. 67-78.
Contrarian Period High & LowContrarian Period High & Low
This indicator pairs nicely with the Contrarian 100 MA and can be located here:
Overview
The "Contrarian Period High & Low" indicator is a powerful technical analysis tool designed for traders seeking to identify key support and resistance levels and capitalize on contrarian trading opportunities. By tracking the highest highs and lowest lows over user-defined periods (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly), this indicator plots historical levels and generates buy and sell signals when price breaks these levels in a contrarian manner. A unique blue dot counter and action table enhance decision-making, making it ideal for swing traders, trend followers, and those trading forex, stocks, or cryptocurrencies. Optimized for daily charts, it can be adapted to other timeframes with proper testing.
How It Works
The indicator identifies the highest high and lowest low within a specified period (e.g., daily, weekly, or monthly) and draws horizontal lines for the previous period’s extremes on the chart. These levels act as dynamic support and resistance zones. Contrarian signals are generated when the price crosses below the previous period’s low (buy signal) or above the previous period’s high (sell signal), indicating potential reversals. A blue dot counter tracks consecutive buy signals, and a table displays the count and recommended action, helping traders decide whether to hold or flip positions.
Key Components
Period High/Low Levels: Tracks the highest high and lowest low for each period, plotting red lines for highs and green lines for lows from the bar where they occurred, extending for a user-defined length (default: 200 bars).
Contrarian Signals: Generates buy signals (blue circles) when price crosses below the previous period’s low and sell signals (white circles) when price crosses above the previous period’s high, designed to capture potential reversals.
Blue Dot Tracker: Counts consecutive buy signals (“blue dots”). If three or more occur, it suggests a stronger trend, with the table recommending whether to “Hold Investment” or “Flip Investment.”
Action Table: A 2x2 table in the bottom-right corner displays the blue dot count and action (“Hold Investment” if count ≥ 4, else “Flip Investment”) for quick reference.
Mathematical Concepts
Period Detection: Uses an approximate bar count to define periods (1 bar for Daily, 5 bars for Weekly, 20 bars for Monthly on a daily chart). When a new period starts, the previous period’s high/low is finalized and plotted.
High/Low Tracking:
Highest high (periodHigh) and lowest low (periodLow) are updated within the period.
Lines are drawn at these levels when the period ends, starting from the bar where the extreme occurred (periodHighBar, periodLowBar).
Signal Logic:
Buy signal: ta.crossunder(close , prevPeriodLow) and not lowBroken and barstate.isconfirmed
Sell signal: ta.crossover(close , prevPeriodHigh) and not highBroken and barstate.isconfirmed
Flags (highBroken, lowBroken) prevent multiple signals for the same level within a period.
Blue Dot Counter: Increments on each buy signal, resets on a sell signal or if price exceeds the entry price after three or more buy signals.
Entry and Exit Rules
Buy Signal (Blue Circle): Triggered when the price crosses below the previous period’s low, suggesting a potential oversold condition and buying opportunity. The signal appears as a blue circle below the price bar.
Sell Signal (White Circle): Triggered when the price crosses above the previous period’s high, indicating a potential overbought condition and selling opportunity. The signal appears as a white circle above the price bar.
Blue Dot Tracker:
Increments blueDotCount on each buy signal and sets an entryPrice on the first buy.
Resets on a sell signal or if price exceeds entryPrice after three or more buy signals.
If blueDotCount >= 3, the table suggests holding; if >= 4, it reinforces “Hold Investment.”
Exit Rules: Exit a buy position on a sell signal or when price exceeds the entry price after three or more buy signals. Combine with other tools (e.g., trendlines, support/resistance) for additional confirmation. Always apply proper risk management.
Recommended Usage
The "Contrarian Period High & Low" indicator is optimized for daily charts but can be adapted to other timeframes (e.g., 1H, 4H) with adjustments to the period bar count. It excels in markets with clear support/resistance levels and potential reversal zones. Traders should:
Backtest the indicator on their chosen asset and timeframe to validate signal reliability.
Combine with other technical tools (e.g., moving averages, Fibonacci levels) for stronger trade confirmation.
Adjust barsPerPeriod (e.g., ~120 bars for Weekly on hourly charts) based on the chart timeframe and market volatility.
Monitor the action table to guide position management based on blue dot counts.
Customization Options
Period Type: Choose between Daily, Weekly, or Monthly periods (default: Monthly).
Line Length: Set the length of high/low lines in bars (default: 200).
Show Highs/Lows: Toggle visibility of period high (red) and low (green) lines.
Max Lines to Keep: Limit the number of historical lines displayed (default: 10).
Hide Signals: Toggle buy/sell signal visibility for a cleaner chart.
Table Display: A fixed table in the bottom-right corner shows the blue dot count and action, with yellow (Hold) or green (Flip) backgrounds based on the count.
Why Use This Indicator?
The "Contrarian Period High & Low" indicator offers a unique blend of support/resistance visualization and contrarian signal generation, making it a versatile tool for identifying potential reversals. Its clear visual cues (lines and signals), blue dot tracker, and actionable table provide traders with an intuitive way to monitor market structure and manage trades. Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced trader, this indicator enhances your ability to spot key levels and time entries/exits effectively.
Tips for Users
Test the indicator thoroughly on your chosen market and timeframe to optimize settings (e.g., adjust barsPerPeriod for non-daily charts).
Use in conjunction with price action or other indicators for stronger trade setups.
Monitor the action table to decide whether to hold or flip positions based on blue dot counts.
Ensure your chart timeframe aligns with the selected period type (e.g., daily chart for Monthly periods).
Apply strict risk management to protect against false breakouts.
Happy trading with the Contrarian Period High & Low indicator! Share your feedback and strategies in the TradingView community!
Fibonacci Retracement levels Automatically D/W/MIndicator Description: Fibonacci Retracement levels Automatically
Fibonacci retracement levels based on the day, week, month High Low range and Fibonacci retracement levels draws automatically .This Pine Script indicator is designed to plot Fibonacci retracement levels based on the high and low prices of a user-selected timeframe (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly). It identifies bullish or bearish candles in the chosen timeframe, draws key price levels, and overlays Fibonacci retracement lines and semi-transparent colored boxes to highlight potential support and resistance zones. The indicator dynamically updates with each new period and extends lines, labels, and boxes to the current bar for real-time visualization. Key Features
1. Timeframe Selection: Users can choose the timeframe for analysis: Daily, Weekly, or Monthly via an input dropdown. The indicator retrieves the open, high, low, and close prices for the selected timeframe using `request.security`.
2. High and Low Tracking : Tracks the highest high and lowest low within the selected timeframe. Stores these values and their corresponding bar indices in arrays (`whigh`, `wlow`, `whighIdx`,`wlowIdx`). Limits the array size to the most recent period to optimize performance.
3. Bullish and Bearish Candle Detection : Identifies whether the previous period’s candle is bullish (`close > open`) or bearish (`close < open`). Uses this to determine the direction for Fibonacci retracement calculations. Bullish candle: Fibonacci levels are drawn from low to high
Bearish candle: Fibonacci levels are drawn from high to low
4. Fibonacci Retracement Levels : Plots Fibonacci levels at 0.236, 0.382, 0.5, 0.618, and 0.786 between the high and low of the period. For bullish candles, levels are calculated from the low (support) to the high (resistance). For bearish candles, levels are calculated from the high (resistance) to the low (support). Each Fibonacci level is drawn as a horizontal line with a unique color:
- 0.236: Blue
- 0.382: Purple
- 0.5: Yellow
- 0.618: Teal
- 0.786: Fuchsia
5. Visual Elements: - High/Low Lines and Labels: Draws a red line and label for the previous period’s high. Draws a green line and label for the previous period’s low. Fibonacci Lines and Labels: Each Fibonacci level has a horizontal line and a label displaying the ratio.
Colored Boxes: Semi-transparent boxes are drawn between consecutive Fibonacci levels (including high and low) to highlight zones.
6. Dynamic Updates:
- At the start of a new period (e.g., new week for Weekly timeframe), the indicator:
- Clears previous Fibonacci lines, labels, and boxes.
- Recalculates the high and low for the new period.
- Redraws lines, labels, and boxes based on the new data.
- Extends all lines, labels, and boxes to the current bar index for real-time tracking.
7. Performance Optimization:
- Deletes old lines, labels, and boxes to prevent clutter.
- Limits the storage of highs and lows to the most recent period.
How It Works
1. Initialization: Defines variables for tracking bullish/bearish candles, lines, labels, and arrays for Fibonacci levels and boxes. Sets up color arrays for Fibonacci lines and boxes with distinct, semi-transparent colors.
2. Data Collection: Fetches the previous period’s OHLC (open, high, low, close) using `request.security`. Detects new periods (e.g., new week or month) using `ta.change(time(tf))`.
3. Fibonacci Calculation: On a new period, stores the high and low prices and their bar indices.
- Identifies the maximum high and minimum low from the stored data. - Calculates Fibonacci levels based on the range (`maxHigh - minLow`) and the direction (bullish or bearish).
4. Drawing:
- Draws high/low lines and labels at the identified price levels. Plots Fibonacci retracement lines and labels for each ratio. Creates semi-transparent boxes between Fibonacci levels to visually distinguish zones.
5. Updates:
- Extends all lines, labels, and boxes to the current bar index when a new period is detected. Clears old Fibonacci elements to avoid overlap and ensure clarity.
Usage
- Purpose: This indicator is useful for traders who use Fibonacci retracement levels to identify potential support and resistance zones in financial markets.
- Application:
- Select the desired timeframe (Daily, Weekly, Monthly) via the input settings.
- The indicator automatically plots the previous period’s high/low and Fibonacci levels on the chart.
- Use the labeled Fibonacci levels and colored boxes to identify key price zones for trading decisions.
- Customization:
- Modify the `timeframe` input to switch between Daily, Weekly, or Monthly analysis.
- Adjust the `fibLineColors` and `fibFillColors` arrays to change the visual appearance of lines and boxes.
- The indicator is designed for use on TradingView with Pine Script.
- The maximum array size for highs/lows is limited to 1 period in this version (can be adjusted by modifying the `array.shift` logic).
- The indicator dynamically updates with each new period, ensuring real-time relevance.
This indicator make educational purpose use only
GEEKSDOBYTE IFVG w/ Buy/Sell Signals1. Inputs & Configuration
Swing Lookback (swingLen)
Controls how many bars on each side are checked to mark a swing high or swing low (default = 5).
Booleans to Toggle Plotting
showSwings – Show small triangle markers at swing highs/lows
showFVG – Show Fair Value Gap zones
showSignals – Show “BUY”/“SELL” labels when price inverts an FVG
showDDLine – Show a yellow “DD” line at the close of the inversion bar
showCE – Show an orange dashed “CE” line at the midpoint of the gap area
2. Swing High / Low Detection
isSwingHigh = ta.pivothigh(high, swingLen, swingLen)
Marks a bar as a swing high if its high is higher than the highs of the previous swingLen bars and the next swingLen bars.
isSwingLow = ta.pivotlow(low, swingLen, swingLen)
Marks a bar as a swing low if its low is lower than the lows of the previous and next swingLen bars.
Plotting
If showSwings is true, small red downward triangles appear above swing highs, and green upward triangles below swing lows.
3. Fair Value Gap (3‐Bar) Identification
A Fair Value Gap (FVG) is defined here using a simple three‐bar logic (sometimes called an “inefficiency” in price):
Bullish FVG (bullFVG)
Checks if, two bars ago, the low of that bar (low ) is strictly greater than the current bar’s high (high).
In other words:
bullFVG = low > high
Bearish FVG (bearFVG)
Checks if, two bars ago, the high of that bar (high ) is strictly less than the current bar’s low (low).
In other words:
bearFVG = high < low
When either condition is true, it identifies a three‐bar “gap” or unfilled imbalance in the market.
4. Drawing FVG Zones
If showFVG is enabled, each time a bullish or bearish FVG is detected:
Bullish FVG Zone
Draws a semi‐transparent green box from the bar two bars ago (where the gap began) at low up to the current bar’s high.
Bearish FVG Zone
Draws a semi‐transparent red box from the bar two bars ago at high down to the current bar’s low.
These colored boxes visually highlight the “fair value imbalance” area on the chart.
5. Inversion (Fill) Detection & Entry Signals
An inversion is defined as the price “closing through” that previously drawn FVG:
Bullish Inversion (bullInversion)
Occurs when a bullish FVG was identified on bar-2 (bullFVG), and on the current bar the close is greater than that old bar-2 low:
bullInversion = bullFVG and close > low
Bearish Inversion (bearInversion)
Occurs when a bearish FVG was identified on bar-2 (bearFVG), and on the current bar the close is lower than that old bar-2 high:
bearInversion = bearFVG and close < high
When an inversion is true, the indicator optionally draws two lines and a label (depending on input toggles):
Draw “DD” Line (yellow, solid)
Plots a horizontal yellow line from the current bar’s close price extending five bars forward (bar_index + 5). This is often referred to as a “Demand/Daily Demand” line, marking where price inverted the gap.
Draw “CE” Line (orange, dashed)
Calculates the midpoint (ce) of the original FVG zone.
For a bullish inversion:
ce = (low + high) / 2
For a bearish inversion:
ce = (high + low) / 2
Plots a horizontal dashed orange line at that midpoint for five bars forward.
Plot Label (“BUY” / “SELL”)
If showSignals is true, a green “BUY” label is placed at the low of the current bar when a bullish inversion occurs.
Likewise, a red “SELL” label at the high of the current bar when a bearish inversion happens.
6. Putting It All Together
Swing Markers (Optional):
Visually confirm recent swing highs and swing lows with small triangles.
FVG Zones (Optional):
Highlight areas where price left a 3-bar gap (bullish in green, bearish in red).
Inversion Confirmation:
Wait for price to close beyond the old FVG boundary.
Once that happens, draw the yellow “DD” line at the close, the orange dashed “CE” line at the zone’s midpoint, and place a “BUY” or “SELL” label exactly on that bar.
User Controls:
All of the above elements can be individually toggled on/off (showSwings, showFVG, showSignals, showDDLine, showCE).
In Practice
A bullish FVG forms whenever a strong drop leaves a gap in liquidity (three bars ago low > current high).
When price later “fills” that gap by closing above the old low, the script signals a potential long entry (BUY), draws a demand line at the closing price, and marks the midpoint of that gap.
Conversely, a bearish FVG marks a potential short zone (three bars ago high < current low). When price closes below that gap’s high, it signals a SELL, with similar lines drawn.
By combining these elements, the indicator helps users visually identify inefficiencies (FVGs), confirm when price inverts/fills them, and place straightforward buy/sell labels alongside reference lines for trade management.
